NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual (IPX U Type) PDF NEC Type Issue 1

IPX Installation Manual (IPX-U Type) Iss 1(2430610w) IPX Installation Manual (IPX-U Type) Iss 1(2430610w)

NEC IPX Installation Manual IPX U Type Issue 1 NEC_IPX_Installation_Manual_IPX_U_Type_Issue_1 www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 420

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

NDA-24306
ISSUE 1
STOCK # 200788

®

Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)

OCTOBER, 2000

NEC America, Inc.

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions,
or features, at any time, without notice.
NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and
customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America,
Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC
America, Inc.
NEAX® and Dterm® are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
Copyright 2000
NEC America, Inc.
Printed in the U.S.A

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

i

1

11

1

ii

1

12

1

iii

1

13

1

iv

1

14

1

v

1

15

1

vi

1

16

1

vii

1

17

1

viii

1

18

1

ix

1

19

1

x

1

20

1

xi

1

21

1

xii

1

22

1

xiii

1

23

1

xiv

1

24

1

xv

1

25

1

xvi

1

26

1

xvii

1

27

1

xviii

1

28

1

xix

1

29

1

xx

1

30

1

xxi

1

31

1

xxii

1

32

1

xxiii

1

33

1

xxiv

1

34

1

xxv

1

35

1

xxvi

1

36

1

xxvii

1

37

1

xxviii

1

38

1

1

1

39

1

2

1

40

1

3

1

41

1

4

1

42

1

5

1

43

1

6

1

44

1

7

1

45

1

8

1

46

1

9

1

47

1

10

48

1
ISSUE 1

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

ISSUE 6

NEAX2400 IPX
Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)

3

4

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

1
ISSUE 3

DATE

DATE

2

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 1/6

NDA-24306

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

49

1

87

1

50

1

88

1

51

1

89

1

52

1

90

1

53

1

91

1

54

1

92

1

55

1

93

1

56

1

94

1

57

1

95

1

58

1

96

1

59

1

97

1

60

1

98

1

61

1

99

1

62

1

100

1

63

1

101

1

64

1

102

1

65

1

103

1

66

1

104

1

67

1

105

1

68

1

106

1

69

1

107

1

70

1

108

1

71

1

109

1

72

1

110

1

73

1

111

1

74

1

112

1

75

1

113

1

76

1

114

1

77

1

115

1

78

1

116

1

79

1

117

1

80

1

118

1

81

1

119

1

82

1

120

1

83

1

121

1

84

1

122

1

85

1

123

1

86

1

124

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

ISSUE 6

NEAX2400 IPX
Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 2/6

NDA-24306

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

125

1

163

1

126

1

164

1

127

1

165

1

128

1

166

1

129

1

167

1

130

1

168

1

131

1

169

1

132

1

170

1

133

1

171

1

134

1

172

1

135

1

173

1

136

1

174

1

137

1

175

1

138

1

176

1

139

1

177

1

140

1

178

1

141

1

179

1

142

1

180

1

143

1

181

1

144

1

182

1

145

1

183

1

146

1

184

1

147

1

185

1

148

1

186

1

149

1

187

1

150

1

188

1

151

1

189

1

152

1

190

1

153

1

191

1

154

1

192

1

155

1

193

1

156

1

194

1

157

1

195

1

158

1

196

1

159

1

197

1

160

1

198

1

161

1

199

1

162

1

200

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

ISSUE 6

NEAX2400 IPX
Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 3/6

NDA-24306

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

201

1

239

1

202

1

240

1

203

1

241

1

204

1

242

1

205

1

243

1

206

1

244

1

207

1

245

1

208

1

246

1

209

1

247

1

210

1

248

1

211

1

249

1

212

1

250

1

213

1

251

1

214

1

252

1

215

1

253

1

216

1

254

1

217

1

255

1

218

1

256

1

219

1

257

1

220

1

258

1

221

1

259

1

222

1

260

1

223

1

261

1

224

1

262

1

225

1

263

1

226

1

264

1

227

1

265

1

228

1

266

1

229

1

267

1

230

1

268

1

231

1

269

1

232

1

270

1

233

1

271

1

234

1

272

1

235

1

273

1

236

1

274

1

237

1

275

1

238

1

276

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

ISSUE 6

NEAX2400 IPX
Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 4/6

NDA-24306

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

277

1

315

1

278

1

316

1

279

1

317

1

280

1

318

1

281

1

319

1

282

1

320

1

283

1

321

1

284

1

322

1

285

1

323

1

286

1

324

1

287

1

325

1

288

1

326

1

289

1

327

1

290

1

328

1

291

1

329

1

292

1

330

1

293

1

331

1

294

1

332

1

295

1

333

1

296

1

334

1

297

1

335

1

298

1

336

1

299

1

337

1

300

1

338

1

301

1

339

1

302

1

340

1

303

1

341

1

304

1

342

1

305

1

343

1

306

1

344

1

307

1

345

1

308

1

346

1

309

1

347

1

310

1

348

1

311

1

349

1

312

1

350

1

313

1

351

1

314

1

352

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

ISSUE 6

NEAX2400 IPX
Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 5/6

NDA-24306

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No.
1

353

1

391

1

354

1

392

1

355

1

356

1

357

1

358

1

359

1

360

1

361

1

362

1

363

1

364

1

365

1

366

1

367

1

368

1

369

1

370

1

371

1

372

1

373

1

374

1

375

1

376

1

377

1

378

1

379

1

380

1

381

1

382

1

383

1

384

1

385

1

386

1

387

1

388

1

389

1

390

1
ISSUE 1

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

ISSUE 6

NEAX2400 IPX
Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

DATE

2

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

5

ISSUE 8
DATE

Revision Sheet 6/6

NDA-24306

NDA-24306
ISSUE 1
OCTOBER, 2000

NEAX2400 IPX
Installation Manual
(IPX-U Type)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
..
REGULATORY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
1. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
2. FCC PART 15 REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
3. FCC PART 68 REGISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
3.1 Company Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
3.2 Service Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
3.3 Location of FCC Compliance Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
4. DIRECT-INWARD DIALING (DID) CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
5. REGULATORY INFORMATION ON SINGLE-LINE ANALOG TELEPHONES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
6. HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
7. INDUSTRY CANADA CS-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
8. SAFETY LISTING/CERTIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xx
.
8.1 Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 How to Follow NAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 How To Follow Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Figure and Table Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Essential/Critical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
1
2
4
6
6

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
2.1 Temperature and Humidity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2 Heat Generation from Switching Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3. FLOOR SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

NDA-24306

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page i
Revision 1.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
4. FLOOR LOAD REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5. EQUIPMENT ROOM REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.1 Floor Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.2 Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.3 Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
5.4 Lighting Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Main Source Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Current Consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Power Distribution Box Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10
10
11
12
12

7. MDF REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
8. INSTALLATION TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
9. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 Configuration of the System and Module Accommodations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Circuit Card Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Assignment of Network Control Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 Preparation of Trunking Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 Preparation of Module Group Face Layout and Port Accommodation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6 Preparation of Circuit Card Switch Setting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
15
26
32
36
36
36

10. INSTALLATION CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10.1 AC Input, DC Power, and Ground Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
10.2 Cables between the PBX and MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-001. Installation Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-002. Marking, Leveling, and Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. WHEN SECURING THE PBX DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. WHEN SECURING THE PBX WITH THE SPECIAL STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. WHEN SECURING THE PBX WITH FLOOR ELEVATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. MARKING, LEVELING AND DRILLING FOR MDF, POWER EQUIPMENT, AND
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-003. Unpacking and Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. UNPACKING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-004. Installation of the Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT USING A SPECIAL STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-005. Mounting of Units and Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. MOUNTING OF UNITS AND MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. INSTALLATION OF FANU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. ATTACHING THE ADDITIONAL NOISE FILTER UNIT (NFILU) TO THE BASEU . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-006. Installation of Power Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page ii
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

48
49
51
52
54
56
57
58
58
59
60
60
62
63
63
64
76
79

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
NAP-200-007. Installation of the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
NAP-200-008. Connection of Power and Ground Cables from the Power Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1. CONNECTION OF THE POWER AND GROUND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2. CONNECTION OF DC-DC CONVERTER FOR TELEPHONE SETS EQUIPPED WITH
MESSAGE WAITING LAMPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3. END JOINTING OF POWER AND GROUND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4. BRANCHING OF POWER CABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
NAP-200-009. Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting of the Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
1. PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2. EXTRACTION OF MOUNTED CIRCUIT CARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3. MOUNTING OF CIRCUIT CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4. SETTING OF SWITCH POSITIONS ON CIRCUIT CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5. INSTALLATION OF CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NAP-200-010. Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
1. INTERNAL CABLE CONNECTIONS FOR ISW/LN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2. INTER-FRAME CABLE CONNECTION FOR LN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3. PCM AND ALARM CABLE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN ISW AND EACH LN . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4. ETHER CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
NAP-200-011. Front Cable Connections between Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
NAP-200-012. Cable Running from the PBX to MDF, ATTCON, MAT and SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
1. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MDF AND ATTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
2. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MAT AND SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3. CONNECTIONS AT THE PBX SIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4. CABLE TYING AT THE PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5. TERMINATION OF THE CABLES BETWEEN THE PBX AND THE MDF OR ATTCON
ONTO THE CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
NAP-200-013. Termination of Cables on MDF (Wire Accommodation of Each Cable) . . . . . . . . . . 192
NAP-200-014. Cable Termination and Cross Connections from MDF to
Peripheral Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
1. CROSS CONNECTION OF STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
2. CROSS CONNECTION OF TRUNKS (C.O. LINES AND TIE LINES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
3. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR PFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4. CROSS CONNECTION OF ALARM INDICATING PANEL AND MUSIC ON HOLD . . . . . . . 199
5. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR TAS INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
6. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR EXTERNAL SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
7. CONNECTION OF ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8. CONNECTION OF PAGING EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
9. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR Dterm Series E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
10. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR DIGITAL INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
NAP-200-015. Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
NAP-200-016. Installation of the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) and. . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
1. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
2. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTION BY USING MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
3. INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM MESSAGE PRINTER AND CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . 266
NAP-200-017. Connections of SMDR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

NDA-24306

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iii
Revision 1.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING SYSTEM STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
3. SYSTEM STARTUP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-018. Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-019. Program Install and Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-020. Assignment of Office Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-021. Check of Lamp Indications and System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-022. Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

276
277
279
285
291
296

CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
1. HOW TO ENTER DATA IN THE TEST CHECK COLUMN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2. BASIC CONNECTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Basic Connection Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-023. Dial Tone Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-024. Station to Station Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

301
301
301
302
303

3. SYSTEM INITIALIZED TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 System Initialized Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-025. System Changeover Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-026. System Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-027. Circuit Card Initialization Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

305
305
305
306
319
324

4. PORT CONNECTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Port Connection Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-028. ORT (RST Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-029. ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-030. Line (LC, ELC, DLC Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-031. Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-032. Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-033. Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-034. SND (RST Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-035. 3-party Conference Trunk Function Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-036. Connection Test-Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-037. Connection Test-Digital Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service . . . . . . .
NAP-200-038. Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging Access Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-039. Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging Transfer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-040. Radio Paging Trunk (COT Card) Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-041. Howler & Ringing Signal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

325
325
325
326
328
329
330
333
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
343
344

5. OVERALL TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Overall Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-042. Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-043. Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-044. Overall Test of Fusion Link Connection with Other IPX and/or IMX Series . . . . . . .

346
346
346
347
350
353

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iv
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

NAP-200-045.
NAP-200-046.
NAP-200-047.
NAP-200-048.
NAP-200-049.

Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Incoming Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test of Connection and Alternate Routing to All Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAD Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. LOAD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Load Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-050. Load Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page
354
356
357
359
361
363
363
363
364

CHAPTER 6 FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
2. OUTLINE OF PROCEDURE FOR FAULT RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-051. Abnormal Lamp Indications After System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-052. Dial Tone Connection Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAP-200-053. Station to Station Connection Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

367
368
370
371

CHAPTER 7 WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
1. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
1.1 Preservation of Office Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
2. PREPARATION OF TEST RESULT REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
3. MOUNTING OF THE FRONT AND REAR COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
4. ATTACHMENT OF INTER-FRAME BRACKETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
5. SITE CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

NDA-24306

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page v
Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page vi
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-9
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-17
Figure 2-18
Figure 2-19
Figure 2-20
Figure 2-21
Figure 2-22
Figure 2-23
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 002-1
Figure 002-2
Figure 002-3
Figure 002-4
Figure 002-5
Figure 004-1
Figure 004-2
Figure 004-3
Figure 004-4
Figure 005-1
Figure 005-2
Figure 005-3
Figure 005-4
Figure 005-5
Figure 005-6
Figure 005-7
Figure 005-8

Example of NAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Example of a Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Static Caution Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3M“ Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Heat Generation from Switching Equipment for the PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Current Consumption of the PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Details on PCM Cable Connections between ISW and LNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Details on Ether Cable Connections (Establishment of Fusion Link) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Details on Ether Cable Connections (Using MAT via Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Time Slot, Group Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Face Layout of ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Face Layout of IMG0 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Face Layout of IMG1 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Face Layout of IMG2 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Face Layout of IMG3 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Controlling Circuit Cards in ISWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Example of NCN Assignment (1/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Calculation Method for Sectional Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Outline of Cables from Module Group to the Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Scope of Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Locations of Base Unit Securing Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Cable Hole on a Free-Access or Computer Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Example of Special Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Special Stand Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Example of Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Mounting the Base Unit on an Ordinary Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Mounting the Base Unit on a Free-Access or Computer Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Mounting the Base Unit on a Free-Access or Computer Floor via Elevation . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting the BASEU via Special Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Procedure for Mounting Units and Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Locations of FANU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Mounting of FANU (on TOPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Attachment of FAN Fuse (PZ-M369) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Cable Connections for FANU on TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Connection of “FAN” Connector Cable (TOPU-PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Attachment of the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Relocation of FANU and Insertion into FAN BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NDA-24306

LIST OF FIGURES
Page vii
Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Figure 005-9
Figure 005-10
Figure 005-11
Figure 005-12
Figure 005-13
Figure 005-14
Figure 008-1
Figure 008-2
Figure 008-3
Figure 008-4
Figure 008-5
Figure 008-6
Figure 008-7
Figure 008-8
Figure 008-9
Figure 008-10
Figure 008-11
Figure 009-1
Figure 009-2
Figure 009-3
Figure 009-4
Figure 009-5
Figure 009-6
Figure 009-7
Figure 009-8
Figure 009-9
Figure 010-1
Figure 010-2
Figure 010-3
Figure 010-4
Figure 010-5
Figure 010-6
Figure 010-7
Figure 010-8
Figure 010-9
Figure 010-10
Figure 010-11
Figure 010-12
Figure 010-13
Figure 010-14
Figure 010-15
Figure 010-16
Figure 010-17
Figure 010-18
Figure 010-19
Figure 010-20
Figure 010-21
Figure 010-22

FAN Cable Connections for FC0/FC1/FC2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Cable Connections for FANU in FAN BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Connection of “FAN” Connector Cable (FAN BOX-PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Insertion of NFILU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Attaching of NFILU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Cabling Diagram of NFILU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Detail of Cable Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Connection of Power and Ground Cables to Power Receiving Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Example Connection Diagram-DC-DC Converter for Message Waiting Lamps . . . . . . . . 85
Removal of Shorting Piece and Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Placing the Clamp Terminal on the Die . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Clamping Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Stripped Length of Main and Branch Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Inserting of Cables into Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Clamping for Branch Jointing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Taping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Removal of Card Stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Extraction of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Circuit Card Mounting (Partial Insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Removing Front Panel and Top Cover from CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Inserting ISAGT and LANI Cards into CPR Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Reattaching CPR Top Cover and Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Accommodating New CPR into LPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Insertion of New HFD into CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Switch Setting on the CPU Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Location of Connectors on the ISWM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Location of Terminal Registers on the ISWM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Details on Fastening PZ-M513 by Metal Fittings (ISWM Backplane) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Location of Connectors on the LPM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Location of Connectors on the TSWM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Attachment of Terminal Registers for TSWM Backplane (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Location of Connectors on the PIM Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Location of Connectors on the Power Distribution Terminal Board (PZ-M371) . . . . . . . 121
Internal Power Cable Connection for ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Internal Bus Cable Connection for ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Inter-frame ISA Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Inter-frame ISA Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

LIST OF FIGURES
Page viii
Revision 1.0

Page

NDA-24306

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 010-23
Figure 010-24
Figure 010-25
Figure 010-26
Figure 010-27
Figure 010-28
Figure 010-29
Figure 010-30
Figure 010-31
Figure 010-32
Figure 010-33
Figure 010-34
Figure 010-35
Figure 010-36
Figure 010-37
Figure 010-38
Figure 010-39
Figure 011-1
Figure 012-1
Figure 012-2
Figure 012-3
Figure 012-4
Figure 012-5
Figure 012-6
Figure 014-1
Figure 014-2
Figure 014-3
Figure 014-4
Figure 014-5
Figure 014-6
Figure 014-7
Figure 014-8
Figure 014-9
Figure 014-10
Figure 014-11
Figure 014-12
Figure 014-13
Figure 014-14
Figure 014-15
Figure 014-16

Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG2-IMG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Cable Connection for ISW-LN0, IMG0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Cable Connection for ISW-LN1, IMG0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Cable Connection for ISW-LN2, IMG0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Cable Connection for ISW-LN3, IMG0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN0, IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN0, IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN1, IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN1, IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN2, IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN2, IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN3, IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN3, IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ether Cable Connection for ISW and LN (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Ether Cable Connection When Second LANIs Are Used (Example) . . . . . . .
Front Cable Connections between Circuit Cards for CCIS/ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LT Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Routing of Circuit Card Front Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Cable Tying Using Tie-Wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Support Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clamp Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination of Installation Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross Connection of Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross Connection of Trunks (C.O. Lines and Tie Lines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Locations of PFT (PA-M53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross Connection for PFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram for TAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outer View of External Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of External Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of Announcement Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of Paging Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outer View of Dterm Series E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection for Dterm Series E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Distributing Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Accepting Synchronization
Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 014-17 LT Connector Lead Accommodation of PLO (ISW-LN0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 014-18 Cable Connection Diagram (LN) for Distributing Clock from a Digital Interface . . . . . . .
Figure 015-1 Outer View of DESK CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 015-2 Cable Connection Diagram for DESK CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 015-3 Cable Connection Diagram (When the power is supplied from the PBX) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 015-4 Cable Connection Diagram (When using Local Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 015-5 Cable Connection Diagram for DESK CONSOLE Modular Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24306

147
148
149
152
153
154
155
156
158
160
162
164
166
168
170
174
176
178
182
183
186
188
190
191
194
196
197
198
200
201
203
205
206
208
210
211
212
214
215
216
218
219
220
222
224
226
227

LIST OF FIGURES
Page ix
Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Figure 015-6
Figure 015-7
Figure 015-8
Figure 015-9
Figure 015-10
Figure 015-11
Figure 015-12
Figure 015-13
Figure 015-14

Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting of Handset (Left side of DESK CONSOLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting of Handset (Right side of DESK CONSOLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three DESK CONSOLEs and One Recording Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Six DESK CONSOLEs and One Recording Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-core Line Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of AC-DC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Console Cable Connection Diagram
(When the power is supplied from the PBX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram for Add-On Console Modular Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting of Add-On Console (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting of Add-On Console (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of AC-DC Adapter for Add-On Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling of MAT when Using Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram for the MAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling of MAT Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of System Message Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detail of RS-232C CA-(0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detail of RS-232C CA-(1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detail of RS-232C CA-(3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection Diagram for the SMDR Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of SMDR by Using MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Connection Route Data Assignment (AFPC Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indications of ISW in Normal Operation (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indications of IMG0 in Normal Operation (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indications of IMG1/2 in Normal Operation (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indications of IMG3 in Normal Operation (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Lamps on the TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Entry to Test Check Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station-to-Station Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP in ACT/ST-BY Mode (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP in ACT/ST-BY Mode (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs and Switches for Speech Path System Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs and Switches for PLO Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Block Diagram of the Whole System (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Block Diagram for ISW Switching Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Block Diagram for LN Switching Network (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys on the TOPU (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys on the TOPU (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COT Test Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TLT Test Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTI Test Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combination of Tie Line Network and Public Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie Line Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 015-15
Figure 015-16
Figure 015-17
Figure 015-18
Figure 016-1
Figure 016-2
Figure 016-3
Figure 016-4
Figure 016-5
Figure 016-6
Figure 016-7
Figure 017-1
Figure 017-2
Figure 017-3
Figure 020-1
Figure 021-1
Figure 021-2
Figure 021-3
Figure 021-4
Figure 022-1
Figure 5-1
Figure 024-1
Figure 025-1
Figure 025-2
Figure 025-3
Figure 025-4
Figure 025-5
Figure 025-6
Figure 025-7
Figure 026-1
Figure 026-2
Figure 031-1
Figure 031-2
Figure 031-3
Figure 042-1
Figure 043-1
Figure 047-1
Figure 047-2

LIST OF FIGURES
Page x
Revision 1.0

Page

NDA-24306

228
229
232
235
236
237
238
239
240
242
243
245
247
262
263
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
290
292
293
294
295
296
300
304
307
308
311
313
314
316
317
320
321
331
331
332
348
351
358
358

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 048-1
Figure 049-1
Figure 049-2
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Figure 7-7
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-9
Figure 7-10
Figure 7-11
Figure 7-12
Figure 7-13

Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of PAD Setting (Analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of PAD Setting (Digital) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting of the Covers in a Full System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting of the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPM+PIM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Cover Mounting Method (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPM+PIM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cover Mounting Method (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cover Mounting Method (FANU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover Mounting Method in a Full System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPM+PIM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover Mounting Method (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Cover Mounting Method (FANU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locations of Inter-frame Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24306

359
361
362
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388

LIST OF FIGURES
Page xi
Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

LIST OF FIGURES
Page xii
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

LIST OF TABLES
Table

Title

Page

Table 2-1
Table 2-2
Table 2-3
Table 2-4
Table 2-5
Table 2-6
Table 2-7
Table 2-8
Table 2-9
Table 2-10
Table 2-11
Table 2-12
Table 2-13
Table 002-1
Table 008-1
Table 010-1
Table 010-2
Table 010-3
Table 010-4
Table 010-5
Table 010-6
Table 010-7
Table 010-8
Table 010-9
Table 010-10
Table 010-11
Table 010-12
Table 010-13
Table 010-14
Table 010-15
Table 010-16
Table 010-17
Table 010-18
Table 010-19
Table 010-20
Table 010-21
Table 010-22
Table 010-23
Table 012-1
Table 050-1
Table 050-2

Temperature and Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Typical Installation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Condition for Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Controlling Circuit Cards in ISWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Clamp Terminal Shape and Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Selection of T-Type Clamp Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Clamping Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Calculating the Number of Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Specification of Anchor Bolts-Sleeve Expansion Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Stripped Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Quick Reference Table for LN Cable Connection (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Internal Power Cable Connection for ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Internal Bus Cable Connection for ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Internal Bus Cables for IMG2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Inter-frame ISA Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG2-IMG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN0, IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN0, IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN1, IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN1, IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN2, IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN2, IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN3, IMG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN3, IMG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Ether Cable Connections (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Ether Cable Connections for Second LANI (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Cable Support Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Load Test Patterns by CPU and TSW Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Load Test Connection Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

NDA-24306

LIST OF TABLES
Page xiii
Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

LIST OF TABLES
Page xiv
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
IMPORTANT — SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
(1)

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

(2)

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.

(3)

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.

(4)

Use caution when installing or moving telephone lines.

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the
risk of fire, electric shock and injury, including the following:
(5)

Read and understand all instructions.

(6)

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

(7)

Disconnect this product from the power source before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol
cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

(8)

Do not use this product near water; for example, under water pipes near a bath tub, sink, or laundry
tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

(9)

Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious
damage to the product.

(10) Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect it
from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be
blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should
never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a builtin installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
(11) This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label.
If you are not sure of the type of power source available, consult with your local power company.
(12) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
(13) Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous
voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid
of any kind on the product.

NDA-24306

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Page xv
Revision 1.0

(14) To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualified
serviceman when some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose
you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the
appliance is subsequently used.
(15) Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
(a)

When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

(b)

If liquid has been spilled into the product.

(c)

If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

(d)

If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls, that are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of
other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.

(e)

If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

(f)

If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.

(16) Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
(17) Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Page xvi
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

REGULATORY INFORMATION
1. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules that permit the NEAX2400 IPX to be
directly connected to the telephone network. A jack is provided on party lines or coin lines.
The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures. If such changes affect
the compatibility or use of the NEAX2400 IPX, the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of
the changes.
This equipment complies with the requirements in Part 15 of FCC Rules for a Class A computing device.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception
requiring the operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct this interference.
2. FCC PART 15 REQUIREMENTS
In compliance with FCC Part 15 Rules, the following statement is provided:
WARNING
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15
of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the
user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be
required to correct the interference.

3. FCC PART 68 REGISTRATION
3.1 Company Notification

Before installing the NEAX2400 IPX to the telephone network, the telephone company must be provided with
the following:
•

Your telephone number

•

The FCC registration numbers:
• PBX:
• Hybrid:

JAPAN
AY5JPN-74906-PF-E
AY5JPN-74904-MF-E

USA
AY5USA-74905-PF-E
AY5USA-74913-MF-E

The Ringer Equivalence Number is 2.1B; the required USOC jacks are RJ21X, RJ2EX, and RJ2GX.

NDA-24306

REGULATORY INFORMATION
Page xvii
Revision 1.0

3.2 Service Requirements

In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs will be performed by NEC or an authorized distributor of
NEC. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to NEC or to one of their
authorized distributors.
If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company
will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that affect the
operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you
to make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact NEC America, Inc.’s Oregon plant at (503) 6485000 for repair and/or warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
NO REPAIRS CAN BE DONE BY THE CUSTOMER.
3.3 Location of FCC Compliance Labels

Labels stating the NEAX2400 IPX FCC registration number and compliance with FCC Parts 15 and 68 are
attached to the Base Unit. If the unit is in a table-top configuration, the labels are located on the side of the
enclosure. The appearance of the labels is as shown below:
COMPLIES WITH PART 68 FCC RULES
NEAX2400 IMS-IP
FCC registration numbers:

AY5USA-74905-PF-E
AY5USA-74913-MF-E

Ringer Equivalence:

2.1B

NEC
NEC America
Made In U.S.A.
4. DIRECT-INWARD DIALING (DID) CALLS
Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not provide for proper answer supervision is a
violation of Part 68 of the FCC’s rules.
PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS WHEN:
(a) This equipment returns answer supervision to the PSTN when DID calls are:
• Answered by the called station
• Answered by the attendant

REGULATORY INFORMATION
Page xviii
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

• Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user
• Routed to a dial prompt
(b) This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN. Permissible
exceptions are:
• A call is unanswered
• A busy tone is received
• A reorder tone is received.
EQUAL ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use
of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation
of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.
5. REGULATORY INFORMATION ON SINGLE-LINE ANALOG TELEPHONES
NEC single-line telephones comply with Part 68 of FCC Rules. On the bottom of the equipment is a label that
states, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for the
equipment. If requested, this information should be provided to the telephone company.
The equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.
The equipment should be used only behind a PBX or KTS. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices
that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not
ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0).
To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs, contact
the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
6. HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY
The Dterm terminals provided for the NEAX2400 IPX are hearing aid compatible. FCC rules prohibit the use of
non-hearing aid compatible telephones.
NEC-type single-line telephone sets used in conjunction with the NEAX2400 IPX are hearing aid compatible.
If other than NEC-type single-line telephone sets are to be used with this system, ensure that these are hearing
aid compatible.
CAUTION: The use of a monitoring, recording or listening device to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve or record

telephone conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous with its
transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice
should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone
conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to the
telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or require the
consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording a telephone
conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
7. INDUSTRY CANADA CS-03
Certification number: 140 5452A
NDA-24306

REGULATORY INFORMATION
Page xix
Revision 1.0

Ringer Equivalence Number: 2.1
NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. The certification means that the equipment
meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements. The department does
not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing the equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the
local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of
connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be
extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware
that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by
the supplier. Any repairs or installations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may
give the telecommunications company cause to request that the user disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This protection may
be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the

appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
NOTICE: The “Ringer Equivalence Number” assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface
may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer
Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
8. SAFETY LISTING/CERTIFICATIONS
This equipment has been listed by Underwriters Laboratories and found to comply with all the applicable
requirements of the standard for telephone equipment U.L. 1459. This equipment complies with Canadian
Standards Association standard C 22.2 No. 225.
8.1 Safety Considerations

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of
fire, electric shock and injury, including the following:
1.

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

2.

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.

3.

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at
the network interface.

4.

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

NOTICE: Also follow the precautionary items listed under “Safety Considerations” on the previous pages.

REGULATORY INFORMATION
Page xx
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

1. GENERAL
During the period from equipment carry-in of the system till it is placed in service, the following must be
performed:
•

Installation of the system and its peripheral equipment

•

System startup

•

Installation test

•

Miscellaneous jobs

This manual explains how to proceed with these activities, and related precautions. It is recommended that the
installer thoroughly read Section 2., “HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL” before engaging in any phase of
the installation.
Note:

This manual assumes that the reader has sufficient knowledge on the FCCS network service, because the system to be
installed can be in service via the FCCS link, established within the system.
For this reason, if more information is required, also refer to the “Fusion Network System Manual.”

2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL
2.1 Outline

1.

The work required to be performed is divided into the following five chapters. Basically, the work is
performed in the order of these chapters:
• Chapter 2, INSTALLATION DESIGN
This chapter explains installation design and preparation of the required installation materials.
• Chapter 3, INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
This chapter explains the procedures pertaining to equipment carry-in, installation, power supply (cabling, wiring), etc., of the system, and also explains the installation procedures concerning peripheral
equipment (MDF, Rectifier, Terminal Equipment).
• Chapter 4, SYSTEM STARTUP
This chapter explains the procedures for initial power-on and office data entry upon completion of the
system installation.
• Chapter 5, INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE
This chapter explains the test procedures to be performed, upon completion of the system startup, to determine:
• If the system operates as directed by the office data.
• Whether reinitialization or system changeover can be performed.
• Whether the interface with the associated distant office is normal.
• Chapter 6, FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS
This chapter explains the recovery procedure which the installer needs to follow in case of a fault occurrence while engaging in work pertaining to system startup and basic connections.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 1
Page 1
Revision 1.0

INTRODUCTION

• Chapter 7, WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS
This chapter explains various kinds of work and site cleaning, etc., which must be performed after completion of installation tests so that the system can be cut over normally.
2.2 How to Follow NAPs

This manual categorizes the work contents of installation, system startup and installation tests into detailed work
items, and an NEC Action Procedure (NAP) number is assigned to each of such work item.
The following shows how to interpret a NAP number.
NAP- XXX-XXX
Serial Number (000-999) Note
Work Category Number
200: Installation
215: System Startup, Installation Test, Fault Recovery
Note:

It is recommended to perform NAPs in sequential order by serial numbers.

Figure 1-1 shows an example of an NAP.

CHAPTER 1
Page 2
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INTRODUCTION

NAP Number
Sheet Number of NAP
Title of NAP

NAP- 200-004
Sheet 3/3
Installation of the Base Unit

2. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT USING A SPECIAL STAND
START
Securing the Base Unit

Secure the Base Unit onto the special stand per Figure 3-11.

Level Check

Check the level of the Base Unit. If necessary, adjust the
level by inserting spacers beneath the Base Unit.

END

FREE-ACCESS FLOOR

BASE-U

BOLT(M-10)
SPRING WASHER
PLAIN WASHER

SPECIAL STAND

Figure 1-1 Example of NAP

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 1
Page 3
Revision 1.0

INTRODUCTION

2.3 How To Follow Trees

This manual explains performance of a predetermined procedure (work contents covered in each NAP) in a
“Tree” format as shown in Figure 1-2. Before engaging in the intended work, be sure to understand the work
contents by tracing the given tree.

START
On the MDF, make temporary cross connections between the Trunk for Direct-In Termination
(DIT) and an LC.
C.O. Line Incoming Call

Station “B” dials the number of LC “C” (Station
“C”).

Incoming Call to Station via DIT
Trunk

The call terminates to Station “A”; Station “A”
rings.
Confirm that the ringing is distinct from that of an
intra-office call or ordinary C.O. call.
• The ringing signal for Direct-In Termination
calls can be the same as that used for C.O.
calls if the related Office Data is assigned.
System Data SYS1, INDEX 72, SYS3,
INDEX 0, and parameter DR of Command
“ARTD.”

Answer and Talk

Station “A” goes off-hook.
Station “A” and “B” talk with each other.

Release

Station “A” and “B” both go on-hook.

Remove the temporary cross connections.
END

Figure 1-2 Example of a Tree

CHAPTER 1
Page 4
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INTRODUCTION

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Figure 1-3 Static Caution Indication

This manual provides “Static Caution” indicators (see Figure 1-3) on pages where work involving staticsensitive components is described.
The 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit, shown in Figure 1-4, is recommended as an effective
countermeasure against static electricity.

Connect ground wire to the Earth
terminal of the Module Group.

Place the Circuit
Card on a
conductive sheet.

Wrist Strap

Figure 1-4 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit
Note:

3M is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing, Inc.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 1
Page 5
Revision 1.0

INTRODUCTION

2.4 Figure and Table Numbers

Each figure and table within this manual is numbered as shown below.
1.

Figures and tables in NAP
Figure XXX-X
Serial number of figures in each NAP
Serial number (000-999) of the NAP in which the
Figure exists.

2.

Other figures and tables
Table X-X
Serial number of table in each chapter
Number of the chapter in which the Table exists.

2.5 Essential/Critical Information

To prevent accidents or equipment damage from occurring while work is being performed, each manual
provides WARNING, CAUTION, and Note indications to draw the technician’s attention to specific matters.
1.

Meaning
WARNING:

Personal injury may result if the warning is not heeded.

CAUTION:

Damage to the equipment and/or the system may result if the caution is not heeded.

Note: Indicates an item which requires special attention.

2.

Locations of Indicators
WARNING and CAUTION indications are located at the top of the page. Notes are included as part of
the work procedures on the page.

CHAPTER 1
Page 6
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2

INSTALLATION DESIGN

1. GENERAL
This chapter provides information pertaining to installation design and preparation of the required installation
materials. The following topics are discussed:
•

Environmental Requirements

•

Floor Space

•

Floor Load Requirements

•

Equipment Room Requirements

•

Power Supply Requirements

•

MDF Requirements

•

Installation Tools

•

System Accommodation

•

Installation Cables

2. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The PBX is sensitive to rises in temperature and humidity, as a computer is. Air conditioning may be required,
depending on the installation environment. The following paragraphs address the following environmental
conditions.
•

Temperature and Humidity

•

Heat Generation from Switching Equipment

2.1 Temperature and Humidity

Table 2-1 shows the environmental conditions required in the switching equipment room.
If the switching system is operated in an environment that does not meet these specifications, the reliability of
the switching equipment may be impaired. Improper operating conditions can cause circuit boards, etc., to
deteriorate. Therefore, to enable the equipment to operate for the extent of its expected lifetime, careful
consideration must be given to the location of the equipment, and to proper ventilation and air conditioning.
If no equipment is provided to remove the heat generated by the system, or if the temperature or humidity
fluctuates repeatedly, the system’s electronic parts can be adversely affected. Such conditions will promote
corrosion of metal parts and deterioration of insulation, thereby lowering the overall reliability of the system.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 7
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Table 2-1 Temperature and Humidity
TEMPERATURE

RELATIVE
HUMIDITY

Normal Operations

5°C ~ 30°C
(41°F ~ 86°F)

15% ~ 65%

Short Period*

0°C ~ 40°C
(32°F ~ 104°F)

15% ~ 90%

-18°C ~ 50°C
(0°F ~ 122°F)

8% ~ 90%

During Operations

During Storage
& In Transit

Maximum 5°C/30 Min.
(9°F /30 Min.)

Temperature Change
Note:

REMARKS

* A short period means a period not exceeding three consecutive days (72 hours) or 15 days (360 hours) in a year.

2.2 Heat Generation from Switching Equipment

Figure 2-1 shows heat generation from the switching equipment with respect to current consumption.

BTU/HT
3.5K

3.0K

2.5K

2.0K

1.5K

1.0K

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

No. of PORTS

Figure 2-1 Heat Generation from Switching Equipment for the PBX

CHAPTER 2
Page 8
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

900

1000

INSTALLATION DESIGN

3. FLOOR SPACE
1.

The PBX requires floor space for the following system equipment:
• Switching Equipment (Module Group)
• Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT)
• MDF
• Rectifier
• Batteries
• Attendant Console

2.

3.

The required floor space for the various equipment rooms is as follows.
• Switching Equipment Room:

For installing the Module Group, MAT, MDF and Rectifier

• Battery Room:

For installing Batteries

• Operator Room:

For installing an Attendant Console with desk and chair

Equipment Room: Free Access Floor or Computer Floor

4. FLOOR LOAD REQUIREMENTS
Required floor capacities are as follows:
•

Switching Equipment Room:

More than 3430 Pa (0.49 pounds per square inch)

•

Operator Room:

More than 2940 Pa (0.43 pounds per square inch)

5. EQUIPMENT ROOM REQUIREMENTS
The following floor conditions should be considered prior to installation:
5.1 Floor Surface

1.

Switching Equipment Room
• The maximum difference in floor level at each point within the room should be less than +5mm (0.2
inch).
• An elevated-type floor such as Free Access floor or computer room floor should be constructed.

2.

Battery Room
• It is recommended that the floor have a slope (1/1000) and drain at the end of the slope.
• The floor surface should be made of acid-resistant materials.

5.2 Wall

1.

Switching Equipment Room
• A Concrete wall is necessary so that cable racks can be installed (unless a free-access floor is used).
• It is recommended that the walls be painted so that the wall materials do not generate dust, etc.
• The maximum difference in level at the wall surface should be less than +5 mm (0.2 inch).

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 9
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

5.3 Ceiling

1.

Switching Equipment Room
• The required ceiling height is more than 2.3 meters (7.5 feet).

5.4 Lighting Facilities

1.

Switching Equipment Room
• Fluorescent lamps are recommended.
• No less than 200 lux at the floor level is necessary.

2.

Operator Room
• Fluorescent lamps are recommended.
• No less than 200 lux at the floor level is necessary.

3.

Battery Room
• Anti-explosion type lamps must be utilized.
• No less than 150 lux at the floor level is necessary.

6. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
6.1 Main Source Power

The PBX requires an operating power of -48 V DC ±5 V DC. This DC operating power is supplied from the
rectifier which receives AC power from the commercial AC power source. For greater system reliability, it is
recommended that the PBX be supplied with backup DC operating power for a predetermined duration from the
batteries installed as the auxiliary power supply source.
The batteries for the PBX must be connected in parallel with the -48 V DC output of the rectifier. Also, when
installing batteries, an EMF panel must be placed in-line (series) with the input -48 V DC supplied to the PBX.
This panel is necessary when changing the state of the rectifier from float to equalize and vice versa.
Note 1: When the rectifier is in the equalize state (charging the batteries), the output DC voltage should be 1.5 to 2 volts higher
than the float voltage. For example: the voltages for floating and equalizing are listed below:

Float: 50.5 V DC
Equalize: 52 V DC (Refer to Note 2.)
Note 2: The Equalize voltage is 1.5 to 2 V higher when an EMF panel (Diode Drop) is used. When an EMF panel is not
provided, the Float and Equalize Voltage must be the same (50.5 V).
Note 3: The main source power is AC input.
Note 4: Noise present in the -48 V output from the rectifier should be less than5 mV.

CHAPTER 2
Page 10
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN
6.2 Current Consumption

The PBX operates on -48 V ±5 V DC which is supplied from external power equipment (the rectifier and the
battery).
Various DC voltages required within the system are provided by the DC-DC converter in each module. The DCDC converter, upon receiving the -48 V DC source power, converts it into various DC voltages and supplies
them to the associated circuits.
Figure 2-2 shows the current consumption of the PBX.

(AMPS)
35

30

25

DC
-48V

20

15

10

5

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

No. of PORTS

Figure 2-2 Current Consumption of the PBX

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 11
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

6.3 Power Distribution Box Requirements

The Power Distribution Box (PDB) should be installed with the following considerations:
1.

The AC power source service outlet and the fuse for the junction box should be provided independently of
any equipment other than the switching equipment.

2.

A warning notice should be attached to be PDB circuit breaker so that it will not be turned off accidentally.

3.

The Power Distribution Box should be installed at a location that is easy to reach.

4.

The Power Distribution Box should be installed at a location where the connecting cables extending to the
switching equipment will not be broken accidentally.

5.

The PDB cables should be run in such a way that they do not hamper the technician performing the
installation.

6.

The Personal Computer (MAT) must have a separate AC service outlet.

6.4 Grounding

System grounding must have a specific ground resistance and AC noise level, and is to be connected to a
predetermined terminal in the PBX.
1.

Standard grounding requirements are shown below.
• Communication grounding:

Less than 1 ohm

• Security ground for Module Group:

Less than 1 ohm

• Grounding for the line protector of the MDF: Less than 0.1 ohms
Note:

The AC ripple of various types of grounding should be less than 1/2 V-pp.

7. MDF REQUIREMENTS
Either a self-standing or wall-mounted type MDF can be used. The MDF must be equipped with the following
types of terminal blocks.
•

Arrester board for C.O. lines and external lines

•

Test spring terminals for localization tests

•

Local Block terminals

The number of terminals is to be determined according to the circuit configuration of the PBX and the number
of local lines.

CHAPTER 2
Page 12
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

8. INSTALLATION TOOLS
Table 2-2 shows the tools used in a typical system installation.
Table 2-2 Typical Installation Tools
FUNCTION

TOOLS

PURPOSE

Marking

•
•
•
•

Steel Tape Measure
L-Square
Iron Square
Iron Level

• Center Punch
• Step Ladder
• Scriber

For Leveling and
Marking Plumb
Line

Drilling

•
•
•
•
•

Electric Drill
Electric Vibration Drill
Hammer
Point Drill
Drill Bit for Concrete

•
•
•
•

Concrete Chisel
Drill Bit for Metal
Power Cable Drum
Extension Cable

Drilling

Module Group and • Plump Bob
Rack Installation
• Jigsaw
• Hacksaw Frame
• Hacksaw Blade
• Flat File
• Half Round File
• Set File
• Adjustable Angle Wrench

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Frame Cart
Cutter
Set Wrench
Socket Wrench Set
Step Ladder
Phillips Screwdriver
Screwdriver
Plastic Hammer

Module Group and
Rack Installation

Power Cable
Installation

• Clamping Tool
(for End Terminal,
Branch Terminal)

• Phillips Screwdriver
• Screwdriver
• Cutter

Miscellaneous

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Circuit Tester
Pocket Measure
Scissors
Wire Clipper
Cable Cutter
Nipper
Wire Stripper
Round Nose Pliers
Non-Metallic Stick
Solder-Helper
Solder Sucker
IC ClipMini Test Probe

Power Cable
Installation

Telephone Set
Working Lamp
Wrapping Tool
Unwrapping Tool
Soldering Iron
Soldering Iron Stand
Connector Clamping Tool
Logic Checker and Counter
Pen Light
Precision Screwdriver (+)(-)
IC Buzzer
Tweezer
Portable Field Service Kit

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 13
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

9. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This Section explains the configuration of the NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U system.

This figure shows an example of the fully expanded system.
LN0
;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

LN1
;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

ISW
......
;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

LN2

LN3
;:;;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

FRONT VIEW

ISW: Inter-node Switch

LN: Local Node

Figure 2-3 NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U

CHAPTER 2
Page 14
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

;:;;::;:

;:;::;::;:

INSTALLATION DESIGN
9.1 Configuration of the System and Module Accommodations

As shown in the figures below, the NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U system (referred to in the remainder of this manual
as “the system”) is configured by a single Inter-node Switch (ISW) and a maximum of four Local Nodes (LNs).
The ISW and LNs are connected via the Fusion link, with Ether and physical PCM cables connected each other.
This figure provides an overall image of system configuration.
As illustrated, a two-module ISW and maximum four (4) Local Nodes compose a
single network system via the FCCS link.

LN0
......

......

......

LN1
......

......

......

......

......

ISW
......

LN2
......

LN0

LN1

LN2

......

......

LN3
......

......

......

......

......

LN3

ISW

Ether

PCM Cable

LN0/1/2/3
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

ISW

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

TOPU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

ISWM

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

LPM

TSWM0

TSWM1

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

FRONT VIEW
ISW:
Inter-node Switch
LN:
Local Node
TOPU: Top Unit

FRONT VIEW
LPM:
Local Processor Module
TSWM: Time Division Switch Module
ISWM:
Inter-node Switch Module

PIM:
Port Interface Module
FANU:
Fan Unit
BASEU: Base Unit

Figure 2-4 System Configuration

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 15
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

[ Details on PCM Cable Connections between ISW and LNs ]
LN0
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG-UMG

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

LN0
......

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

......

......

LN1
......

......

......

......

......

......

......

ISW
......

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LN3

LN2
......

......

......

......

......

......

LPM TSWM0 TSWM1 DUMMY
BASEU BASEU BASEU BASEU

< TSWM1 Backplane >
< TSWM0 Backplane >

ISW

TSW
TSW
(No. 1 System) (No. 0 System)

TOPU

(19)(18)(17)(16)(15)(14)(13)(12)

TSW
TSW
(No. 1 System) (No. 0 System)

ISWM

(19)(18)(17)(16)(15)(14)(13)(12)

LPM
BASEU

< ISWM Backplane >
To MUX
(IMG2/3)

To MUX
(IMG0/1)

TSW
(No. 1 System)
(17)(16)(15)(14)

TSW
(No. 0 System)
(07)(06)(05)(04)

To MUX
(IMG2/3)

For TSWM1

To MUX
(IMG0/1)

For TSWM0

PCM (ISW-LN TSW-CA-n) Cables

To LN3
To LN2
To LN1

To LN3
To LN2
To LN1

LN: Local Node

ISW: Inter-node Switch

Note 1: For actual cable runnings, see NAP-200-010 in Chapter 3.
Note 2: The maximum distance of these PCM connections must be within 32 feet (10m).
Figure 2-5 Details on PCM Cable Connections between ISW and LNs

CHAPTER 2
Page 16
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

[Details on Ether Cable Connections]

ISW and each LN can achieve a Fusion link by physically connecting themselves via the 10 BASE-T cables. This
figure shows an example where the CPR-accommodated LANI cards (internal LANI: PCI slot 00) are mutually connected
via HUB0/HUB1 (PA-M96) cards in PIM0 of LN0, IMG0 (HUB0 for CPU0 of all nodes, HUB1 for CPU1 of all nodes).
IMG0 (LN0)
Note

Note
HUB1

HUB0

ISW / IMG0 (LN1/2/3)

PIM0
From
From
From
From

LN3
LN2
LN1
ISW

From LN3
From LN2
From LN1
From ISW

LANI

LANI

00

00

CPU1

CPU1
00

CPU0

Note:

To HUB1
in LN0

00

LPM

LPM

CPU0

To HUB0
in LN0

HUB card can be mounted in any
universal slot of PIM.

ISW

LN0

LN1

LN2

LN3

CPU1
LI

CPU1
LI

CPU1
LI

CPU1

CPU1
LI

LI

Note 1
10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

10 BASE-T
Cables
(Cross)
Note 1

HUB1

HUB0

PIM0 of LN0, IMG0
Note 1
10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)
Note 2
Maximum 328 ft (100m)

LI

LI

LI

LI

LI

CPU0

CPU0

CPU0

CPU0

CPU0

ISW

LN0

LN1

LN2

LN3

ISW: Inter-node Switch

LN: Local Node

LI: LANI (PZ-PC19)

HUB: PA-M96

: 10 BASE-T connector

Note 1: For actual 10 BASE-T connections, see NAP-200-010 in CHAPTER 3.
Note 2: The mutual 10 BASE-T (Ether) connections must be within 328 feet (100m) in their distance. If the distance is
longer (e.g., FCCS link is provided also with other distant IPX and/or IMX node(s)), use FCH (PA-FCHA) card
as a protocol converter for the Fusion-link data. For more details, refer to the “Fusion Network System Manual.”
Figure 2-6 Details on Ether Cable Connections (Establishment of Fusion Link) (1/2)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 17
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

[Details on Ether Cable Connections: When Dual LANIs are used for each CPU]
When dual LANIs are used for each CPU, the whole second LANIs (external LANI: PCI slot 03) must also be
connected in addition to the first LANIs explained on the previous page. This figure shows an example where
the second LANIs are connected to the additional HUB2/HUB3 (PA-M96) cards in PIM0 of LN2, IMG0
(HUB2 for CPU0 of all nodes, HUB3 for CPU1 of all nodes).
IMG0 (LN2)

IMG0 (LN0)

HUB0

ISW / IMG0 (LN1/3)

03

CPU1

LPM

00

03

CPU0

HUB3

PIM0

PIM0

Second LANI
00

HUB2

HUB1

To HUB3
in LN2
To HUB1
in LN0
To HUB2
in LN2
To HUB0
in LN0

ISW
CPU1
LI LI

From LN3
From LN2
From LN1
From ISW

Second LANI
00

To HUB3
in LN2
00

03

CPU0

CPU0

To HUB2
in LN2

03

00

03

To HUB1
in LN0

LPM
To HUB0
in LN0

LN2
CPU1
LI LI

LN3
CPU1
LI LI

Note 1
10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

10 BASE-T
Cables
(Cross)

00

CPU1

LPM

LN1
CPU1
LI LI

From LN3
From LN1
From LN0
From ISW

Second LANI

03

CPU1

LN0
CPU1
LI LI

From LN3
From LN1
From LN0
From ISW

From LN3
From LN2
From LN1
From ISW

HUB1

HUB0
LN0

10 BASE-T
Cables
(Cross)
Note 1

HUB3

HUB2

PIM0 of LN2, IMG0
Note 1
10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

Note 2
Maximum 328 ft (100m)

LI LI

LI LI

LI LI

LI LI

LI LI

CPU0
ISW

CPU0
LN0

CPU0
LN1

CPU0
LN2

CPU0
LN3

ISW: Inter-node Switch

LN: Local Node

LI: LANI (PZ-PC19)

HUB: PA-M96

: 10 BASE-T connector

Note 1: For actual 10 BASE-T connections, see NAP-200-010 in Chapter 3.
Note 2: The mutual 10 BASE-T (Ether) connections must be within 328 feet (100m) in their distance. If the distance is
longer (e.g., FCCS link is provided also with other distant IPX and/or IMX node(s)), use FCH (PA-FCHA) card as
a protocol converter for the FCCS-link data. For more details, refer to the “Fusion Network System Manual.”
Figure 2-6 Details on Ether Cable Connections (Establishment of Fusion Link) (2/2)
CHAPTER 2
Page 18
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

[Details on Ether Cable Connections: When using MAT via Ethernet]
The IPX-U system can use both the IOC (PH-IO24) card or the CPR-accommodated LANI (PZ-PC19) card as
an interface for the connection to a MAT. This example shows a MAT connected via the LANI card in PCI slot
01 of each LN/ISW.
ISW

LN0

LN1

LN2

LN3

Fusion Link
Ether for MAT

MAT

This figure is an example where a MAT is connected to LN1 via the 10 BASE-T cables
(Ethernet). As seen from this, the MAT, a single terminal connected to the Ether, can control
the whole system status, thus capable of a single-point entry to each LN and ISW.
LN1
IMG0 (LN1)
Note 1

IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

Note 1

HUB

HUB

PIM0
To LANI0 of LN3
To LANI0 of LN2
To LANI0 of LN0
To LANI0 of ISW

To LANI1 of LN3
To LANI1 of LN2
To LANI1 of LN0
To LANI1 of ISW

10 BASE-T Cable
(Cross)

Note 2

Note 2

00 01

CPU1
10 BASE-T Cable
(Straight)

00 01

CPU0

LANI

LPM

MAT

10 BASE-T Cable
(Straight)

ISW : Inter-node Switch
LN : Local Node
LANI : PZ-PC19
HUB : PA-M96
: 10 BASE-T connector

Note 1: When connecting the MAT this way, be sure to use dedicated HUB (PA-M96) card(s) for this
connection.
Note 2: Because ISW has no universal slot for external HUB cards, connect the 10 BASE-T cables (from
the ISW) to MAT-dedicated HUB card in any of the LNs (LN0 - LN3). In this example, the cables
are connected to HUB in LN1.
Note 1: For details on the MAT installation procedure, refer to NAP-200-016 in Chapter 3.
Note 2: The LANI card for MAT connection is accommodated in PCI slot No. 01 of each CPR.
Figure 2-7 Details on Ether Cable Connections (Using MAT via Ethernet)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 19
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Table 2-3 Condition for Configuration
UNIT NAME

FANU
(Fan Unit)

2nd NFILU
(Noise
Filter)

CONDITIONS

REMARKS

ISW

Mounted in TOPU

LN IMG0, 1, 2, 3
(Two PIMs or less)

Mounted in TOPU

LN IMG0, 1, 2, 3
(Three PIMs or less)

Mounted between the 2nd PIM and the 3rd PIM

ISW

Mounted in BASEU

LN IMG0, 1, 2, 3
(Two PIMs of less)

Not required

LN IMG0, 1, 2, 3
Mounted in BASEU
(Three or more PIMs)
TOPU
(Top Unit)

ISW

Equipped with PZ-DK227 (Key) and PZ-DK223 (DSP) Cards

LN IMG0, 1, 2, 3

Equipped with PZ-DK222 (Key) and PZ-DK223 (DSP) Cards

Time Slots are allocated as follows for a PIM.
Slot No.

00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

PWR

PWR

Number
of
Time Slots

192 TS

192 TS

16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32

16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32

16

16

(16) (16)
16

16

16

16

Group Numbers are allocated as follows for a PIM.
Slot No.

00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
01 03 05 07 09 11

Group No.

15 19 23

01 03 05 07 09 11

14 18 22

14 18 22

13 17 21
00 02 04 06 08 10

00 02 04 06 08 10
(24) (25)

Extended
Group No.

Note:

15 19 23

12 16 20

PIM

13 17 21
12 16 20

27

29

31

27

29

31

26

28

30

26

28

30

Extended Group No. can be used by FCH (PA-FCHA) card. For more detailed information, see the
“Fusion Network System Manual.”
Figure 2-8 Time Slot, Group Number Assignment

CHAPTER 2
Page 20
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

ISW
TOPU

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
HSW11 (PU-SW01)(RES)
HSW10 (PU-SW01)
TSW13 (PU-SW00)
TSW12 (PU-SW00)
TSW11 (PU-SW00)
TSW10 (PU-SW00)
(PH-CK16-A/17-A)

PLO1

LANI (PZ-PC19)

LANI (PZ-PC19)

LANI (PZ-PC19)

ISAGT (PZ-GT13) ISAGT (PZ-GT13)

LANI (PZ-PC19)
LANI (PZ-PC19)

Note

IOC (PH-IO24)

EMA (PH-PC40)

LANI (PZ-PC19)

00 01 02 03 04

CHAPTER 2
Page 21
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

DSP
PWR FDD/HDD

IOGT1 (PH-GT10)
IOGT0 (PH-GT10)

(PH-CK16-A/17-A)

PLO0

TSW03 (PU-SW00)
TSW02 (PU-SW00)

TSW00 (PU-SW00)

TSW01 (PU-SW00)

HSW01 (PU-SW01)
HSW00 (PU-SW01) (RES)

MMC (PH-M22)

The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.
Note:

PWRSW1 (PH-PW14)

LPM

PWRSW0 (PH-PW14)
ISWM

BASEU

Figure 2-9 Face Layout of ISW

INSTALLATION DESIGN

IMG0 (Local Node)

TOPU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 0

00 01 02 03 04

PH-PC40 (EMA)
PH-IO24 (IOC)
Note

PH-M22 (MMC)

LPM

BASEU

Note:

The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.
Figure 2-10 Face Layout of IMG0 (Local Node)

CHAPTER 2
Page 22
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

IMG1 (Local Node)
TOPU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO1

PLO0

TSW13
TSW12

TSW11
TSW10
TSW03
TSW02

TSW01
TSW00
GT1
GT0
DLKC1
DLKC0
MISC
MISC

MISC
MISC
MISC

PWRSW1
PWRSW0

TSWM0

(RES)

(RES)

BASEU

Note:

No circuit card is mounted in Slot 02 of TSWM0.
Figure 2-11 Face Layout of IMG1 (Local Node)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 23
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

IMG2 (Local Node)
TOPU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
CLK1

CLK0

TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
GT1
GT0

MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC

PWRSW1
PWRSW0

TSWM1

(RES)

(RES)

BASEU

Note:

No circuit card is mounted in Slot 02, 08, 09 of TSWM1.
Figure 2-12 Face Layout of IMG2 (Local Node)

CHAPTER 2
Page 24
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

IMG3 (Local Node)
TOPU
00 01 02 03 04 0506 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM 0

DUMMY

BASEU

Figure 2-13 Face Layout of IMG3 (Local Node)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 25
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

9.2 Circuit Card Locations

This section explains the main function of controlling circuit cards on a module basis. For more detailed
information on each card, please refer to the “Circuit Card Manual”.
00 01 02 03 04
PH-PC40 (EMA)
PH-IO24 (IOC)
PH-IO24 (IOC) Note

PH-M22 (MMC)

LPM

PWR FDD/HDD DSP

Note:

PCI slot
CPR

This IOC card is optional.
Figure 2-14 Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM (ISW)
Table 2-4 Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM (ISW)

Slot No. Circuit Card

00

PH-M22

Symbol

Function, Mounting Conditions

MMC

This circuit card offers the function of detecting MJ/MN alarm
messages in the system and sending out the information to EMA. In
addition, this card has the function to collect the information on TOP
KEY.

(02), 03 PH-IO24

IOC
(Input/Output
Controller)

This circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface, which
conforms to RS-232C, between the ISW and external equipment such
as the MAT, SMDR, and MCI.
One card is equipped with four I/O ports.

04

EMA
This card detects various kinds of alarms which might occur in the
(Emergency
system, and sends out the information of the detected alarm to the
Alarm Controller) circuits concerned. In addition, this card has the following functions:
• Active/stand-by changeover function

PH-PC40

CPR
(Central Processor Rack)

CHAPTER 2
Page 26
Revision 1.0

CPR consists of the following components.
• CPU Board: Includes the Main Processor Unit (MPU), flash ROM,
200 Mhz (clock), and 256 MB Random Access Memory (RAM).
In addition, the board is equipped with ISAGT (PZ-GT13) card,
and LANI (PZ-PC19) cards.
• DSP: Equipped with switches and 7-seg. LEDs on the panel.
• FDD/HDD: Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
• PWR: Supplies the operation power to the LPM

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
PU-SW01 (HSW11)

PU-SW01 (HSW10)

PU-SW00 (TSW13)
PU-SW00 (TSW12)
PU-SW00 (TSW11)
PU-SW00 (TSW10)
PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1)

PH-GT10 (IOGT1)

PH-GT10 (IOGT0)

PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0)

PU-SW00 (TSW03)
PU-SW00 (TSW02)

PU-SW00 (TSW01)

PU-SW00 (TSW00)

PU-SW01 (HSW01)

PU-SW01 (HSW00)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

Figure 2-15 Controlling Circuit Cards in ISWM
Table 2-5 Controlling Circuit Cards in ISWM
Slot No. Circuit Card

Symbol

Function, Mounting Conditions

00, 01

PH-PW14

PWRSW

This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards
accommodated in the ISWM.

02, 03
18, 19

PU-SW01

HSW

This circuit card provides the function of Space Division Switch
between HW in 3-step time division switching. CPU controls the
function via GT.

04-07,
14-17

PU-SW00

TSW

This circuit card supplies the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT
function for the system. The card replaces the time slot PCM signal
from LN. The combination of maximum 4-card TSW and 2-card
HSW provides 32, 768ch switching for the system.

09, 13

PH-CK16-A PLO

This circuit card, used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets
up network synchronization with the network concerned. With this
circuit card, the IPX-U system can be a clock subordinate office of the
digital network.

09, 13

PH-CK17-A PLO

This circuit card, used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets
up network synchronization with the network concerned. Since this
circuit card provides high precision base clock oscillator, the IPX-U
system can be a clock source office of the digital network.

10, 11

PH-GT10

This circuit card functions as a connection to ISAGT and each
package in ISW. And it transfers the order from CPU board to each
TSW I/O bus or packages.

IOGT

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 27
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

00 01 02 03 04

PH-PC40 (EMA)

PH-IO24 (IOC)

PH-IO24 (IOC) Note

PH-M22 (MMC)

LPM

PWR FDD/HDD DSP

PCI Slot
CPR

Note: This IOC card is optional.
Figure 2-16 Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM (LN)
Table 2-6 Controlling Circuit Cards in LPM (LN)
Slot No. Circuit Card

00

PH-M22

Symbol

Function, Mounting Conditions

MMC

This circuit card offers the function of detecting MJ/MN alarm
messages in the system and sending out the information to EMA.
In addition, this card has the function to collect the information on
TOP KEY.

(02), 03 PH-IO24

IOC
(Input/Output
Controller)

This circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface, which
conforms to RS-232C, between the node external equipment such as
the MAT, SMDR, and MCI.
One card is equipped with eight I/O ports.

04

EMA
This card detects various kinds of alarms which might occur in the
(Emergency
system, and sends out the information of the detected alarm to the
Alarm Controller) circuits concerned. In addition, this card has the following functions:
• Active/stand-by changeover function

PH-PC40

CPR
(Central Processor Rack)

CHAPTER 2
Page 28
Revision 1.0

CPR consists of the following components.
• CPU Board: Includes the Main Processor Unit (MPU), flash
ROM, 200 Mhz (clock), and 256 MB-Random
Access Memory (RAM). In addition, the board is
equipped with ISAGT (PZ-GT13 for TSWM0 and
PZ-GT20 for TSWM1) cards, and LANI (PZ-PC19)
cards.
• DSP:
Equipped with switches and 7-seg LEDs on the
panel.
• FDD/HDD: Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive
(HDD)
• PWR:
Supplies the operating power to the LPM.

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PIM

Figure 2-17 Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM
Table 2-7 Controlling Circuit Cards in PIM
Slot No.

Circuit Card

Symbol

Functions, Mounting Conditions

01

PA-PW55-A

PWR

This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated
in the PIM.

03

PA-PW54-A

DPWR

This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated
in the PIM.

13, 14

PH-PC36

MUX

This circuit card is an interface card for mounting line circuits and/or
trunks. Between the CPR and the Port Microprocessor (PM) of the line/
trunk circuit, this card provides an interface for multiplexing/demultiplexing of voice Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) information and
digital data information.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 29
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-CK16-A (PLO1)

PH-CK16-A (PLO0)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)
PH-SW12 (TSW10)
PH-SW12 (TSW03)
PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)
PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)
PH-PC20 (DLKC1)
PH-PC20 (DLKC0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

TSWM0

Figure 2-18 Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM0
Table 2-8 Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM0
Slot No.

Circuit Card

Symbol

Functions, Mounting Conditions

00, 01

PH-PW14

PWRSW

This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated
in the TSWM.

08, 09

PH-PC20

DLKC

This circuit card provides the Attendant Consoles (ATTs) with
information such as ATT call termination/answer/release (abandoned
call) via the Data Link which is established in the TSW card. In addition,
station idle/busy information is sent to the ATTs via the same Data Link.

10, 11

PH-GT09

GT

This circuit card permits the CPU to directly control the TSW, PLO,
DLKC, and MISC circuit cards via TSW I/O Bus and MISC I/O Bus.

12-19

PH-SW12

TSW

This circuit card supplies the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT
function for the system. The TSW capacity is 8192 × 2048 TS (time slots)
for each card, while performing the switching under the following
conditions:
• TSW00 (or 10) for MUX in IMG0
• TSW01 (or 11) for MUX in IMG1
• TSW02 (or 12) for connections between TSW00 (or 10) and ISW
• TSW03 (or 13) for connections between TSW01 (or 11) and ISW

21, 23

PH-CK16-A

PLO

This circuit card, used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up
network synchronization with the network concerned. With this circuit
card, the belonging Local Node can be a clock subordinate office of the
digital network.

CHAPTER 2
Page 30
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-CK18 (CLK1)

PH-CK18 (CLK0)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)
PH-SW12 (TSW10)
PH-SW12 (TSW03)
PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)
PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

TSWM1

Figure 2-19 Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM1
Table 2-9 Controlling Circuit Cards in TSWM1
Slot No.

Circuit Card

Symbol

Functions, Mounting Conditions

00, 01

PH-PW14

PWRSW

This circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated
in the TSWM.

10, 11

PH-GT09

GT

This circuit card permits the CPU to directly control the TSW, PLO,
DLKC, and MISC circuit cards via TSW I/O Bus and MISC I/O Bus.

12-19

PH-SW12

TSW

This circuit card supplies the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT
function for the system. The TSW capacity is 8192 × 2048 TS (time slots)
for each card, while performing the switching under the following
conditions:
• TSW00 (or 10) for MUX in IMG2
• TSW01 (or 11) for MUX in IMG3
• TSW02 (or 12) for connections between TSW00 (or 10) and ISW
• TSW03 (or 13) for connections between TSW01 (or 11) and ISW

21, 23

PH-CK18

CLK

This circuit card functions as a relay to 32MHz clock, 8KHz FH and
Holding on Music provided by the PLO package mounted in TSWM0, to
TSW cards mounted in TSWM1.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 31
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

9.3 Assignment of Network Control Node

The IPX-U system can be in service by dialing a telephone number assigned for each station at a Network
Control Node (NCN). Because these network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned via the MAT dedicated to
the NCN only, designate any of the following nodes as this network data manager (NCN):
•

One of the Local Nodes (LN), excepting for the ISW, within the IPX-U system

•

One of the belonging Fusion nodes outside the IPX-U system

For more details, refer to the figures on the next pages.
Note 1: Within the IPX-U system, the NCN can be designated only from the Local Nodes (LN0-LN3). The ISW cannot be
assigned as the NCN.
Note 2: On a FCCS network, assign only one NCN. Multiple nodes cannot be assigned as the NCN.

CHAPTER 2
Page 32
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Because the Fusion link can be established either independently within the system (IPX-U) or jointly with other
outside IPX and/or IMX series, the assignment of NCN can differ, depending on the network configuration.
[Pattern 1] When the system has a FCCS link independent of other systems
If the system has a FCCS link only within the system (i.e. no FCCS link is established with other IPX and/or IMX
series), an NCN must be assigned from any of the existing Local Nodes, excepting the ISW. In this example, LN0
is assigned as the NCN.

Station A
TELN: 41000

(FPC=16)
LN0

Network Data Memory
-System Data
ASYDN, AFMU, ALRTN....

Network Control Node

Note 1

-Number Planning Data
ANPDN, ASPAN....

DM
LDM
NDM

(FPC=17)
LN1

ND

-Station Numbering
ALGNN, ALGSN....

M

Station B
TELN: 42005

Da

......

ta
Co
py

Assignment of NDM Data
via Centralized MAT

Note 2
(FPC=15)
ISW

(FPC=18)
LN2
NDM

NDM

(FPC=19)
LN3

Station C
TELN: 43002
NDM

NDM

Station D
TELN: 45007

< IPX-U System >

ISW : Inter-node Switch
LN : Local Node
NCN: Network Control Node

DM : Data Memory
LDM: Local Data Memory
NDM: Network Data Memory

FPC : Fusion Point Code
TELN: Telephone Number
MAT : Maintenance Administration Terminal

Note 1: The network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned only at the NCN. However, other node-level data (LDM data)
must also be assigned at each node (including ISW), depending on the requirements. For more details, refer to NAP200-020 in Chapter 4 or the “Fusion Network System Manual.”
Note 2: When the system is operated, the function to be performed by the ISW is only to provide the PCM time slot switching
between each Local Node (LN0 - LN3). However, a Fusion Point Code (FPC) must be assigned for the ISW as well
as for other Local Nodes, using the ASYDL command.
Figure 2-20 Example of NCN Assignment (1/3)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 33
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

[Pattern 2] When the system has a FCCS link with other IPX and/or IMX series and an NCN exists within
the system
If the system has a FCCS link with other IPX and/or IMX series (i.e. the FCCS nodes also exist outside the system),
an NCN can be assigned from either Local Nodes outside the system or the Local Nodes inside the system. In this
example, LN0 of the IPX-U system is designated as the NCN.

Station A
TELN: 41000

(FPC=16)
LN0

Network Data Memory
-System Data
ASYDN, AFMU, ALRTN....

Network Control Node

Note 1

-Number Planning Data
ANPDN, ASPAN....

DM
LDM
NDM

(FPC=17)
LN1

N

-Station Numbering
ALGNN, ALGSN....

M
D

Station B
TELN: 42005

Da

......

ta
y
op
C

Assignment of NDM Data
via Centralized MAT

Note 2
(FPC=15)
ISW

(FPC=18)
LN2
NDM

NDM

(FPC=19)
LN3

Station C
TELN: 43002
Station D
TELN: 45007

NDM

NDM

(FPC=3)
LN-C

IPX-U
System

Station G
TELN: 49012
(FPC=2)
LN-B

(FPC=1)
LN-A
NDM
Station E
TELN: 47001

Station F
TELN: 48003
Fusion Link

NDM
NDM

ISW : Inter-node Switch
LN : Local Node
NCN : Network Control Node

DM : Data Memory
LDM : Local Data Memory
NDM : Network Data Memory

FPC : Fusion Point Code
TELN : Telephone Number
MAT : Maintenance Administration Terminal

Note 1: The network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned only at the NCN. However, other node-level data (LDM
data) must also be assigned at each node (including ISW), depending on the requirements. For more details,
refer to NAP-200-020 in Chapter 4 or the “Fusion Network System Manual.”
Note 2: When the system is operated, the function to be performed by the ISW is only to provide the PCM time slot
switching between each Local Node (LN0 - LN3). However, a Fusion Point Code (FPC) must be assigned for
Figure 2-20 Example of NCN Assignment (2/3)
CHAPTER 2
Page 34
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

[Pattern 3] When the system has a FCCS link with other IPX and/or IMX series and an NCN exists outside
the system
If the system has a FCCS link with other IPX and/or IMX series (i.e. the FCCS nodes also exist outside the system),
an NCN can be assigned from either the Local Nodes outside the system or Local Nodes inside the system. In this
example, LN-A (NEAX2400 IPX series, 4-IMG type) outside the system is designated as the NCN.
(FPC=1)
LN-A
Network Control Node
Station E
TELN: 47001
Network Data Memory
-System Data
ASYDN, AFMU, ALRTN....

Note 1

-Number Planning Data
ANPDN, ASPAN....

DM
LDM

NDM Data Copy

NDM

-Station Numbering
ALGNN, ALGSN....
......

Assignment of NDM Data
via Centralized MAT
(FPC=2)

LN-B
Station F
TELN: 48003

(FPC=3)

LN-C
NDM

IPX-U
System

Station G
TELN: 49012

Fusion Link
NDM

(FPC=16)

(FPC=17)

LN0

LN1
Station B
TELN: 42005

Station A
TELN: 41000
Note 2
(FPC=15)

NDM

NDM

ISW
(FPC=18)

(FPC=19)

LN2

LN3
NDM

TELN: 43002
Station C

NDM

NDM

ISW : Inter-node Switch
LN : Local Node
NCN: Network Control Node

DM : Data Memory
LDM: Local Data Memory
NDM: Network Data Memory

Station D
TELN: 45007

FPC : Fusion Point Code
TELN: Telephone Number
MAT : Maintenance Administration Terminal

Note 1: The network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned only at the NCN. However, other node-level data (LDM data)
must also be assigned at each node (including ISW), depending on the requirements. For more details, refer to NAP200-020 in Chapter 4 or the “Fusion Network System Manual.”
Note 2: When the system is operated, the function to be performed by the ISW is only to provide the PCM time slot switching
between each Local Node (LN0 - LN3). However, a Fusion Point Code (FPC) must be assigned for the ISW along
with other Local Nodes, by using the ASYDL command.
Figure 2-20 Example of NCN Assignment (3/3)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 35
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

9.4 Preparation of Trunking Diagram

Prepare the trunking diagram according to the customer’s specifications. Since there are different kinds of
switching offices such as a single office, network offices, etc. are involved, the trunking diagram must be
prepared as per the customer’s specifications.
9.5 Preparation of Module Group Face Layout and Port Accommodation Diagram

When mounting of various circuit cards in the PBX have been finalized, the installation company concerned
should prepare the module group face layout and port accommodation diagram.
9.6 Preparation of Circuit Card Switch Setting Sheets

With respect to the circuit cards to be mounted in the PBX, prepare the circuit card switch setting sheets. Some
of the circuit cards may not properly operate by the initial switch settings arranged at the factory before shipping
or may not meet the customer’s specifications. By referring to the Circuit Card Manual denote the switch
settings in the Switch Setting Sheets provided in the explanations of each of the circuit cards. Make the switch
setting entries with respect to all the circuit cards.
It should be remembered that use of a circuit card varies with the switch setting on that card.
10. INSTALLATION CABLES
The following installation cables are required for the PBX:

• DC Power Cable:

For connections between the Rectifier and battery and between
the Rectifier and the PBX

• AC Power Cable:

For supplying AC source power to the Rectifier

• Ground Cable:

Communication, Security and Line Protector grounding

• 25P Shielded Cable with CHAMP
(Amphenol) connector at one end:

For connections between the MDF and the PBX

• 25P Shielded Cable with CHAMP
(Amphenol) connector at both ends:

For connections between the MAT and the PBX, and between
peripheral equipment and the PBX.

• House Cable:

For connections between terminals (telephone sets, etc.) and the
MDF

• Cables for C.O. lines and Tie Lines
• Others:

CHAPTER 2
Page 36
Revision 1.0

For connections between Alarm Indicators and the MDF

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN
10.1 AC Input, DC Power, and Ground Cables

1.

For AC input cable, VCT (Polyvinyl Chloride Cabtyre Cable) should be used. However, if shielding is
necessary, as is the case when the AC input cable is to be installed in parallel with a low-voltage power
cable, etc., be sure to use VCT-S (Shielded Polyvinyl Chloride Cabtyre Cable).

2.

For the power receiving terminals of the PBX, -48 V and G terminals are provided in dual (A side and B
side). For two PIMs or less, the DC main power cable is connected only to A side terminals. For three PIMs
or more, the cable is branched out. A side supplies power to LPM/TSWM/ISWM, PIM0 and PIM1, and B
side to PIM2 and PIM3.

3.

For the main ground cable, an IV or CV cable of more than 14mm 2 (6 AWG) is to be used. (See Figure 221).
As the security ground cable for the MAT and externally installed equipment, IV cable of 2mm2 (14 AWG)
is to be used. For the ground cable for the line protector of the MDF, an IV cable of 14mm2 (6 AWG) is to
be used.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 37
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

ISW
-48V GND
A B A B FE

BRANCH CABLES

IMG 0

IMG 1

IMG 2

IMG 3

-48V GND
-48V GND
-48V GND
-48V GND
A B A B FE A B A B FE A B A B FE A B A B FE

LN0

MAIN CABLES
IMG 0

DC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD

IMG 1

IMG 2

IMG 3

-48V GND
-48V GND
-48V GND
-48V GND
A B A B FE A B A B FE A B A B FE A B A B FE

IMG 0

IMG 1

IMG 2

LN1

IMG 3

-48V GND
-48V GND
-48V GND
-48V GND
A B A B FE A B A B FE A B A B FE A B A B FE

LN2

NFB

IMG 0
BATTERY RECTIFIER
CABLES

IMG 1

IMG 2

IMG 3

-48V GND
-48V GND
-48V GND
-48V GND
A B A B FE A B A B FE A B A B FE A B A B FE

LN3

BATTERY
IV(BL)
IV(R)

-48V
G
-48V
G

VCT
AC POWER
CABLES
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD

E
FE

MAIN GROUND CABLES
MAT

AC SERVICE
OUTLET
IV(G)

IV(G)

(ex.14AWG)
Earth Bar
G

IV(G)
(ex.6AWG)

MDF
GROUND
TERMINAL

Note 1: Do not make a multiple connection across “A” terminal and “B” terminal of -48V.
Likewise, do not make a multiple connection across “A” terminal and “B” terminal of GND.
Note 2: It is recommended that each -48 V lead from the PBX be connected to a separate circuit breaker at the rectifier.
Figure 2-21 DC Main Power Cable and Main Ground Cable
CHAPTER 2
Page 38
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Table 2-10 Clamp Terminal Shape and Purpose
TYPE

SHAPE

PURPOSE

REMARKS

End terminal
A

Branching or extension of power
cable
T

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 39
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

Table 2-11 Selectionof T-Type Clamp Terminal
14 AWG/
2 mm2

12 AWG/
3.5 mm2

10 AWG/
5.5 mm2

8 AWG/
8 mm2

6 AWG/
14 mm2

10 AWG

*T-20

*T-20

*T-20

-

-

51A

8 AWG

*T-20

*T-20

*T-20

T-20

-

63 A

6 AWG

T-20

T-20

T-20

T-26

T-44

90 A

3 AWG

T-26

T-26

T-44

T-44

T-44

115A

2 AWG

*T-44

T-44

T-44

T-44

T-44

139A

1 AWG

*T-44

*T-44

T-44

T-66

T-60

162A

1ø

*T-60

T-60

T-60

T-60

T-76

190A

2ø

*T-76

T-76

T-76

T-76

T-76

217A

3ø

*T-98

*T-98

*T-98

T-98

T-98

257A

4ø

*T-122

*T-122

*T-122

*T-122

T-122

298A

250 mcm

*T-154

*T-154

*T-154

T-154

T-154

344A

300 mcm

*T-154

*T-190

*T-190

*T-190

T-190

395A

400 mcm

*T-240

*T-240

*T-240

*T-240

T-240

439A

BRANCH
MAIN

Note:

CURRENT REMARKS

Selection of T-Type Clamp Terminal
The asterisk (*) in Table 2-11 indicates that an auxiliary conductor is needed when using a main power wire and a
branch power wire of a thinner diameter, and the clamp terminal of the type indicated in the selected columns.

Table 2-12 Clamping Tool
*TOOL TYPE

APPLICABLE CROSS
SECTION OF WIRE (mm2)

No. 1

0.25 ~ 6.64

No. 2

6.64 ~ 10.25

No. 9

6.64 ~ 42.42

Convex die 2 pieces

No. 10

6.64 ~ 117.02

Convex die 4
Convex die 8

No. 11

Same as above

Same as above

No. 12

117.02 ~ 325

Convex die 4
Convex die 4

No. 13

ACCESSORIES

REMARKS

Manual type For A and C type terminal
Handle type hydraulic tool For A, C,
D, type terminal
Pedal type hydraulic tool
For all terminal types

Rubber hose

No. 11 and No. 12 tool are used with
No. 13.

No. 15

14 ~ 122

Convex die 7 pairs

Handle type hydraulic tool For T type
terminal

No. 16

123 ~ 365

Convex die 5 pairs

Use with No. 13 for T type terminal

CHAPTER 2
Page 40
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION DESIGN

BATTERY

PBX

RECTIFIER

IV1M1
S=

I2M2
0.018x(I1M1+I2M2)
V

where,
S : Sectional area required (mm2)
I1 : Maximum current passing between battery and rectifier
M1 : Two-way cable length between battery and rectifier
I2 : Maximum current passing between rectifier and PBX
M2 : Two-way cable length between rectifier and PBX
V : Voltage drop

Figure 2-22 Calculation Method for Sectional Area

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 41
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

10.2 Cables between the PBX and MDF

With respect to lines, trunks, and NCU (PFT), 25P shielded the PBX and the MDF are connected using cables
with a CHAMP (Amphenol) connector at one end.
Table 2-13 shows the procedure for calculating the required number of cables. Figure 2-23 also shows an outline
of cable connections from the Module Group to the outside.
Table 2-13 Calculating the Number of Cables
CABLE NAME

CALCULATION

LT Cable

Number of PIMs × 12

NCU Cable

Number of PFT Circuit Cards × 2

68PH EXMISC CA

One cable

ODT Cable

Number of TLT circuit cards × 1
TOTAL

CHAPTER 2
Page 42
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SUB TOTAL

INSTALLATION DESIGN

CONNECTOR
DESIGNATION

CONNECTOR LEAD
DESIGNATION DESIGNATION

LEAD
DESIGNATION

MDF

PBX

MDF

LT-X Axx
LT-X Bxx

LT-X Axx
COT

LC

LT-X Bxx
LT-X Axx

INST.
CABLE

TO C.O.
OR
DISTANT
PABX

LT-X Bxx
TLT

LT-X Exx
LT-X Mxx

SWITCHING
FACILITIES

INST.
CABLE

INST.
CABLE

INST.
CABLE
LT-X Axx
LT-X Bxx

COT

LC

NCU-X-AOx
NCU-X-BOx
NCU-X-Alx
NCU-X-Blx

LT-X Axx
LT-X Bxx

NCU-X ROx
NCU-X TOx
NCU-X Rlx
NCU-X Tlx
PFT

ALM MJ
ALM MN

TO ALARM
INDICATOR

ALM E
INST.
CABLE

16PH EXALMCA/
20FLT EXALMCA

Note 1:

Legend
: Male CONNECTOR
: Female CONNECTOR
or
in the above drawing indicates the CONNECTOR ended
Note 2:
cable to be connected between module connector and MDF.
Figure 2-23 Outline of Cables from Module Group to the Outside

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 2
Page 43
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION DESIGN

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 2
Page 44
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. GENERAL
This chapter explains the procedures for installing the PBX, the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT),
Desk Consoles, and various types of terminal equipment (single line telephones, Dterms, Data Modules, etc.).
The procedures explained in this chapter are shown in Figure 3-1.
Before beginning the installation, thoroughly read Section 2., “PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING
INSTALLATION” and observe the precautions while performing the installation.

Installation of Peripheral
Equipment (NAP-200-014)

Installation Preparation-Basic Procedures
(NAP-200-001,002,003)

C.O./Tie Line
Single-line TEL

Assembly and Installation of the Module
Group
(NAP-200-004,005)

Digital Interface
Cable Termination
(NAP-200-013)
Paging/Announcement
ALM IND./TAS IND./Extemal
Key Box

CHAMP Connector
Cable Running
(NAP-200-012)

Installation of MDF
(NAP-200-007)
Desk Console

Circuit Card
Related
Procedures

(NAP-200-015)
Maintenance
Administration
Terminal

(NAP-200-009)
(NAP-200-016)

SMDR Interface
(NAP-200-017)
Power & Ground Cabling
(NAP-200-008)

RECT/
BATT
Cabling within the Module Group
(NAP-200-010)
Mounting of Covers and
Post-Installation Procedures
Refer to Chapter 6.

Power Equipment Installation
(NAP-200-006)

Note: Work procedures are explained in detail in each NAP. Refer to the procedures by number (NAP-

200-XXX).
Figure 3-1 Scope of Installation Procedure

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 45
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION
Outline

1.

Before beginning the installation, check to see if the installation requirements (grounding, the quantity and
kind of installation cables, etc.) are all present by referring to Chapter 2 of this manual.

2.

For a standard installation, the system is installed on a free-access floor, so no explanations are provided
pertaining to cable racks and cable ducts.

3.

The PBX is connected to the MDF by use of 25-pair shielded cables as the installation cables. Each of these
installation cables is grounded at the cable support assembly of the BASEU as shown below. By this
arrangement, noise radiation from each cable is prevented.
For the installation method, refer to NAP-200-012: “Cable Running from the PBX to MDF, ATTCON,
MAT and SMDR”.

INST CABLE (25P AC-BUS CABLE)
LTX

LTX

PIM

BASEU

E

To MDF

To MDF

CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
: CHAMP Connector

CHAPTER 3
Page 46
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

4.

As the cable to be run between the PBX and the Rectifier, use a CV cable (600 V Crosslinked Polyethylene
Insulated PVC Sheathed Cable) as the circumstance permits. Compared with an ordinary IV cable (600 V
PVC Insulated Cable) the CV cable is stronger because of its thicker cover. Thus, it is suitable to run along
the free-access floor where it is difficult to protect the cable from damage.
Also, for easy identification of different cables, use cables of different colors as follows:

Note:

• –48 V:

Blue (White)

• GND:

Red (Black)

• E:

Green

The color shown in ( ) is applicable to the UL Specification.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 47
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
The flowchart in Figure 3-2 shows the steps of the installation procedure. Each step is assigned a NAP number.
NAP-200-001 through NAP-200-017 follow Figure 3-2. These NAPs should be followed sequentially when
performing the installation. Individual steps, such as installation of SMDR, can be performed independently by
referring to the corresponding NAP.

START
(NAP-200-001)

Installation Preparation
(NAP-200-002)

Marking, Leviling, and Drilling
(NAP-200-003)

Unpacking and Inspection

(NAP-200-007)

Installation of the MDF

(NAP-200-006)

Installation of Power Equipment

(NAP-200-004)

Installation of Base Unit
(NAP-200-005)

Mounting of Units and Modules

(NAP-200-012)

(NAP-200-008)

Connection of Power and Ground
Cables from the Power Equipment

Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT, and SMDR

(NAP-200-009)
(NAP-200-013)

Termination of Cables on MDF(Wire
Accommodation of Each Cable)
(NAP-200-014)

Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to
Peripheral Equipment, C.O. Lines,
and Tie Lines

(NAP-200-015)

Installation of the DESK
CONSOLE and Cable
Connections
(NAP-200-016)

Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT)
and Cable Connections
(NAP-200-017)

Connections of SMDR

Cleaning and Visual Check

END
Figure 3-2 Installation Procedure
CHAPTER 3
Page 48
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

Setting of Switch Positions and
Mounting of the Circuit Cards
(NAP-200-010)

Cable Connections
(NAP-200-011)

Front Cable Connections
between Circuit Cards

NAP-200-001
Sheet 1/2
Installation Preparation

This NAP explains the following work items:
•

Confirmation of Equipment Locations

•

Confirmation of Floor Layout

•

Confirmation of Power and Ground Supply

•

Check of Quantity of Equipment Packages

Note 1: Confirmation procedures are discussed in Chapter 2 of this manual.
Note 2: Be sure to correct any abnormal conditions encountered during installation preparation (missing hard-

ware, floor not level, etc.) before proceeding to the next step.

START
Confirmation of Equipment
Locations

Environmental
Floor Space

Confirmation of temperature
and humidity.

Floor Load
Equipment Room

Floor surface
Wall
Ceiling
Lighting facilities

According to the floor layout,
confirm that the equipment
locations are appropriate.
Note 2

B
A

Improper Locations:
• An open aisle or place where sprinklers are provided.
• A place where there is a water pipeline.
• A place where there is a pipeline generating heat and an
exhaust for such heat.
• A location near an exhaust port for corrosive fumes or gas
generated from a facility machine.
• A location near a copying machine or apparatus which
dissipates heat.
• A location where the switch will be exposed to direct
sunlight.
• A location near a kitchen facility, etc., from which vapor is
generated.
• A high EMI environment; for example, a location near an
elevator motor or X-ray equipment.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 49
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-001
Sheet 2/2
Installation Preparation

A

B
Proper Locations:
• A dry and clean place.
• A place that is well ventilated.
• A sufficiently illuminated room. (200 lux at floor level).
• A location around which there are no obstructing objects,
thus allowing easy maintenance.
• A place where C.O. lines can be brought in, or local cables
can be brought up to the MDF easily.
• A place where communication and security ground can be
obtained as required
Confirmation of Power and
Ground Supply

Confirm AC voltage and current capacity.
Confirm that a Circuit Breaker (NFB) is provided exclusively
for the system.
Confirm that ground terminals are provided separately from
those of the power supply system.

Check the Quantity of
Packages

Check the quantity of packages to see if there is a discrepancy
with the Packing List.
If any equipment is missing, report it to the supplier
immediately.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 50
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-002
Sheet 1/7
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

This NAP explains the procedures for marking, drilling and other necessary work when the PBX is to be installed
on a free-access floor by either one of the following three methods.
•

Securing the PBX directly onto the floor

•

Securing the PBX with the special stand

•

Securing the PBX with the floor elevation

This NAP also explains the procedures for marking, leveling and drilling for MDF, Power Equipment, and Peripheral
Equipment (See Section 4).
Note:

Kinds of Anchor Bolts
Various types of anchor bolts are available; the type of bolt to be used depends on the application. Sleeve
expansion-type anchor bolts are generally preferred for the PBX installation. Table 002-1 shows anchor
bolt specifications.
Table 002-1 Specification of Anchor Bolts-Sleeve Expansion Type

SCREW SLEEVE

M10

Ø17.3

BOLT
LENGTH

SLEEVE
LENGTH

DRILL
DIA.

DRILLING
DEPTH
mm

inch

MAXIMUM
THICKNESS
OF ITEM TO BE
FIXED

APPLICATION

mm

inch

mm

inch

50

2

38

1.5

Ø17.5 50

70

2.8

58

2.3

70

2.8

Concrete +
Mortar
(20 mm/0.8 in
thick)

80

3.1

68

2.7

80

3.1

Concrete +
Mortar
(30 mm/1.2 in
thick)

2

15 mm/0.6 in

For concrete

COMPONENTS

Bolts,
Washers,
Nuts

* Pull out Strength = 1,900 Kg (4185 lb.)
[Concrete Strength = more than 20,580,000 Pa (2,984 lb./sq. in.) ]

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 51
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-002
Sheet 2/7
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

1. WHEN SECURING THE PBX DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR

START
Marking

While referring to Figure 002-1, mark the holes for the
anchor bolts of the base unit.

Drilling

Drill holes at the locations marked for the base unit.

Cutting of Free-Access Floor

Referring to Figure 002-2, cut the free-access floor at the
marked cable locations by using a jigsaw.

Leveling

Measure the level of the surface of the free-access floor.
When it is not level, adjust the support of the freeaccess floor until it is level.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 52
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-002
Sheet 3/7
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

ISW

IMG0

IMG1

520
(1'8.47")
600
(1'11.62")

520
(1'8.47")
600
(1'11.62")

IMG2

IMG3

520
(1'8.47")
600
(1'11.62")

520
(1'8.47")
600
(1'11.62")

55(2.17")

550
410(1'4.14")
(1'9.65")

85(3.35")
40
(1.57")

520
(1'8.47")
600
(1'11.62")

120
(4.72")

120
(4.72")

120
(4.72")

120
(4.72")

40(1.57")

Unit: mm(inch)

Figure 002-1 Locations of Base Unit Securing Holes

FRONT

550

PBX

(1'9.65")
REAR
100 (3.94")
115 (4.53")

370

115 (4.53")

(1'2.57")
600
(1'11.62")
CABLE HOLE
FREE-ACCESS FLOOR
Unit: mm (inch)

Figure 002-2 Cable Hole on a Free-Access or Computer Floor

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 53
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-002
Sheet 4/7
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

2. WHEN SECURING THE PBX WITH THE SPECIAL STAND

START
Marking and Drilling of Special
Stand

Drill the Special Stand for securing the PBX.
(See Figure 002-3.)

Marking, Drilling and Cutting of
Free-Access Floor

Mark, drill, and cut the free-access floor according to the
size of the special stand to be used.

Installing the Special Stand

Secure the special stand onto the floor.
(See Figure 002-4.)

Level Check

Check the level of the special stand.
If necessary, adjust the level by inserting spacers beneath
the stand.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 54
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-002
Sheet 5/7
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

HOLE FOR SECURING
BASE UNIT

520
(1'8.47")
55
(2.17")
550
(1'9.65")

410
(1'4.14")

40
(1.57")
85
(3.35")

Unit: mm (inch)

Figure 002-3 Example of Special Stand

PBX

TOPU
PIM

LPM

FRONT
FREE-ACCESS
OR COMPUTER FLOOR

SPECIAL STAND
ANCHOR BOLT

Figure 002-4 Special Stand Installation Method

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 55
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-002
Sheet 6/7
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

3. WHEN SECURING THE PBX WITH FLOOR ELEVATIONS

START
Installing the Floor Elevation

Secure the Floor Elevation to the concrete floor. (See Figure
002-5.)

Marking

Mark the locations of the anchor bolt holes for the Base
Unit. (See Figure 002-1.)

Drilling

Drill holes in the marked locations.

Cutting of Free-Access Floor

Cut the Free-Access Floor with a jigsaw. (See Figure 002-2.)

END

HOLE FOR SECURING
BASEU

CONCRETE FLOOR
520
(1’8.47”)
410
(1’4.14”)

ANCHOR BOLT

ELEVATION

Figure 002-5 Example of Elevation

CHAPTER 3
Page 56
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-002
Sheet 7/7
Marking, Leveling, and Drilling

4. MARKING, LEVELING AND DRILLING FOR MDF, POWER EQUIPMENT, AND
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

START
Leveling

Measure the level of floor surface and determine the reference
level.

ROOM
HIGHEST LEVEL
WALL

REFERENCE LEVEL

FLOOR

Marking

Mark the holes for securing
equipment.

Power Equipment
MDF
Peripheral Equipment

Drilling

Drill holes locations marked for power equipment, MDF, and
peripheral equipment.
Secure the anchor bolts to the floor.
(Embed nuts and sleeves)
Remove the anchor bolts temporarily.
(Remove anchor bolts and washers)

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 57
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-003

CAUTION:

Sheet 1/2

Equipment may be damaged
if not handled properly during
unpacking and inspection.

Unpacking and Inspection
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

This NAP explains the procedure for unpacking and inspection.
Note 1: If any equipment is missing or damaged, report it to the supplier immediately.
Note 2: Save all packing materials and boxes so that they can be used to return damaged equipment to the supplier.

1. UNPACKING
START
Quantity check

Check the quantity of packages received against the Packing
List.

Check for external damage

Check the packaging for external damage.

Carry-In

Carry the packages containing the Module Group into the
switching equipment room.

Unpacking Note 2

Module Group, Modules, and Units
Covers
Circuit Cards
Desk Console
Cables

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 58
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-003

CAUTION:

Sheet 2/2

Equipment may be damaged
if not handled properly during
unpacking and inspection.

Unpacking and Inspection

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

2. INSPECTION

START
Visually Inspect Modules and Units

Overall distortion.
Scratches or dents on the surface.
Distortion of shelves.
Cracks to connectors on the backplane.
Broken or bent pins on the backplane.

Circuit Cards
Provide protection from
static electricity.

Scratches and cracks.
Loose wires and parts.
Damage to card puller tabs.

Desk Console and MAT

Scratches and dents on the body.
Damaged to keys and lamps.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 59
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-004
Sheet 1/3
Installation of the Base Unit

This NAP explains the procedure for securing the Base Unit onto the floor directly, or using special stand.
1. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT DIRECTLY ONTO THE FLOOR

START
Securing the Base Unit

Secure the Base Unit onto the floor as per Figures 004-1
and 004-2.
When the floor elevation is in use, secure the Base Unit by
referring to Figures 004-1 and 004-3.

Level Check

Check the level of the Base Unit. If necessary, adjust the
level by inserting spacers beneath the Base Unit.

END

BASE
UNIT

BOLT
LOCK WASHER
PLAIN WASHER

Figure 004-1 Mounting the Base Unit on an Ordinary Floor
CHAPTER 3
Page 60
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-004
Sheet 2/3
Installation of the Base Unit

BOLT

BASE UNIT
FREE-ACCESS
FLOOR
FLAT WASHER
COMPRESSED PIPE

FLAT WASHER

CONCRETE
FLOOR
ANCHOR BOLT

Figure 004-2 Mounting the Base Unit on a Free-Access or Computer Floor

Example: The floor elevation is higher
than 150 mm (5.9 inches).

FLOOR ELEVATION

BASE UNIT
FREE-ACCESS
FLOOR

Figure 004-3 Mounting the Base Unit on a Free-Access or Computer Floor via Elevation

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 61
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-004
Sheet 3/3
Installation of the Base Unit

2. INSTALLING THE BASE UNIT USING A SPECIAL STAND

START
Securing the Base Unit

Secure the Base Unit onto the special stand per Figure
004-4.

Level Check

Check the level of the Base Unit. If necessary, adjust the
level by inserting spacers beneath the Base Unit.

END

BASE-U

BOLT
SPRING WASHER
PLAIN WASHER

SPECIAL STAND

Figure 004-4 Setting the BASEU via Special Stand

CHAPTER 3
Page 62
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-005
Sheet 1/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

1. MOUNTING OF UNITS AND MODULES
START
Mounting of Modules, FANU, and TOPU.

Mount modules, FAN BOX and TOPU for each
cabinet referring to Figure 005-1.

END

(TOPU)

Note

Tighten these screws.
Do the same at the rear
side, too.

(PIM3)
Tighten these screws.
Do the same at the rear
side, too.

(PIM2)
Tighten these screws.
Do the same at the rear
side, too.
(FAN BOX)

Note

Tighten these screws.
Do the same at the rear
side, too.

(PIM1)
Tighten these screws.
Do the same at the rear
side, too.

(LPM/TSWM/DUMMY and PIM0)

Note:

(BASEU)

Fan Unit (FANU) is mounted either on
the TOPU or inside the FAN BOX. For
detailed procedures, refer to Section 2 of
this NAP.

Figure 005-1 Procedure for Mounting Units and Modules
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 63
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-005
Sheet 2/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

2. INSTALLATION OF FANU
Location of FANU (PZ-M369 and three electronic FANs) is shown in Figure 005-2. Depending on your system
configuration, mount the FANU in the proper position.
The mounting location of FANU differs, depending on the module configuration of each cabinet. When the
cabinet consists of a total of two PIMs or less, the FANU is mounted on the TOPU. Otherwise, the FANU is
housed in the dedicated FAN BOX in the center of the cabinet.
NEC

TOPU

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

TOPU

FAN BOX

NEAX 2400 IMS

FANU is
located here.

FRONT VIEW

////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////




Figure 005-2 Locations of FANU

CHAPTER 3
Page 64
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-005
Sheet 3/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

[Procedure for FANU on the TOPU]
When any IMG is configured by two PIMs or less, the FANU is mounted as shown in Figure 005-3. Because the
FANU is already mounted on the TOPU of the cabinet, perform Step 4 through Step 7 only, excepting a special case
(Step 1 through Step 3 are not required in the normal cases).
STEP 1 :

Referring to Figure 005-3, mount the three FANs onto the FAN Mounting Plate. Then, fasten every four
screws.

STEP 2 :

Accommodate the FAN Mounting Plate (tipped with three FANs) onto the TOPU.
Then, tighten the four screws (refer to Figure 005-3).

STEP 3 :

Mount the PZ-M369 onto the TOPU. Then, fasten the two screws (also refer to Figure 005-3).

FAN Mounting Plate

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PZ-M369

REAR

TOPU

FRON
T

(TALM)

Figure 005-3 Mounting of FANU (on TOPU)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 65
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-005
Sheet 4/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

STEP 4 :

Fix a FAN fuse (5.0 A) onto the PZ-M369.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

TH0

TH1

TH2

FAN

Note
PWR SW

FC0

FC1

FC2

TALM0TALM1

ON
OFF
Auto

PZ-M369

Fasten a FAN fuse (5.0 A) here.

Heat run test of the FANU is shown in Chapter 4: “SYSTEM STARTUP”. Therefore, keep the PWR SW
key to the center position (=OFF), still at this time.

Note:

Figure 005-4 Attachment of FAN Fuse (PZ-M369)

STEP 5 :

Connect the FAN cables as shown in Figures 005-5 and 005-6.

STEP 6 :

Lastly, attach the Top Cover onto the TOPU of the cabinet. Then, fasten the four screws (refer to Figure
005-7).

Note:

The procedures, Step 4 through Step 6, must be performed at each PBX cabinet adopting 1-PIM or 2-PIM
configuration.

CHAPTER 3
Page 66
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-005
Sheet 5/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

TOPU

PBX
.. .. ..
NEC

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

NEAX 2400 IMS

FAN
Note 1

PZ-M369
TH0 TH1 TH2 FAN

FC0 FC1 FC2 TALM0

FANU

THM

Note 2
TALM

TOPU (Top View)

Note 1: For details on the FAN connecor (PIM backplane), refer to Figure 005-6.
Note 2: For details on the TALM connector (TOPU panel), refer to Figure 005-3.
Figure 005-5 Cable Connections for FANU on TOPU
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 67
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-005
Sheet 6/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PZ-M369

TH0

TH1

FAN

TH2

Note
PWR SW

FC0

FC1

TALM0 TALM1

FC2

ON
OFF
Auto

TOPU

(FAN)

PIM

BW

B
(FAN)

RE A R

PBX

Figure 005-6 Connection of “FAN” Connector Cable (TOPU-PIM)

CHAPTER 3
Page 68
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-005
Sheet 7/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

Mount the Top Cover onto the TOPU.
Then, fasten the four screws using
the Phillips screwdriver.

Top Cover

TOPU

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

PIM

Figure 005-7 Attachment of the Top Cover

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 69
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-005
Sheet 8/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

[Procedure for FANU in the FAN BOX]
When any IMG is configured by three or four PIMs, the FANU must be accommodated within the FAN BOX in the
center of the cabinet. Because the FANU is originally mounted on the TOPU as shown in Figure 005-3, relocate the
FANU into the dedicated FAN BOX per the Steps below:
STEP 7 :

Referring to Figure 005-3, remove the FANU from the TOPU.
- Remove the two screws fastening the PZ-M369. Then, lift away the PZ-M369.
- Remove the four screws fastening the FAN Mounting Plate (tipped with three FANs).
Then, lift away the FAN Mounting Plate.

Note:

Retain the removed screws.

STEP 8 :

Fasten the PZ-M369 and FAN Mounting Plate onto the FAN BOX connection bar (refer to Figure 0058). Use two screws (for the PZ-M369) and four screws (for the FAN Mounting Plate) retained in Step 1.

STEP 9 :

Connect the FAN cables for “FC0,” “FC1” and “FC2” connectors on the PZ-M369. Refer to Figure 0059.

STEP 10 : Insert the FANU, prepared in Step 1 through Step 3, into the FAN BOX. Then, secure the FANU with
the two screws (refer to Figure 005-8).

CHAPTER 3
Page 70
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-005
Sheet 9/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

Screws for FAN Mounting Plate
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

FAN BOX connection bar

FAN BOX connection bar

Screws for PZ-M369

Note

FRON
T

Note:

Before inserting the FANU into the FAN BOX, connect the FAN cables for “FC0”, “FC1” and “FC2”
connectors on the PZ-M369. Refer to Figure 005-9 on the next page.
Figure 005-8 Relocation of FANU and Insertion into FAN BOX

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 71
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-005
Sheet 10/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

Before installing the FANU into the FAN BOX, connect FAN cables as shown below.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

FAN0

FAN1

FAN2

FC0 FC1 FC2

PZ-M369

Figure 005-9 FAN Cable Connections for FC0/FC1/FC2 Connectors

CHAPTER 3
Page 72
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-005
Sheet 11/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

STEP 11 : Fix a FAN fuse (5.0 A) onto the PZ-M369 by referring to Figure 005-4.
STEP 12 : Connect the remaining FAN cables per Figures 005-10 and 005-11.
STEP 13 : Lastly, attach the Top Cover onto the TOPU of the cabinet. Then, fasten the four screws (refer to Figure
005-7).
Note:

The procedures, STEP 1 through STEP 7, must be performed at each PBX cabinet adopting 3-PIM or 4PIM configuration.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 73
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-005
Sheet 12/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

(
) (

T T
H H
2 2
T T
H H
1 1

ATTENTION

) (

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

)

T T
H H
0 0

TOPU

..

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

THM

Note 2
TALM
T
A
L
M
0

T
A
L
M

TOPU (Top View)

PBX

TH0 TH1 TH2 FAN

TALM0

PZ-M369

Note 1
PZ-M369 (Front View)

FAN BOX

Note 1: For details on the FAN connector (PIM backplane), refer to Figure 005-11.
Note 2: For details on the TALM connector (TOPU panel), refer to Figure 005-3.
Figure 005-10 Cable Connections for FANU in FAN BOX
CHAPTER 3
Page 74
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-005
Sheet 13/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PBX

FAN power cable

(FAN)

FRO
NT

FAN BOX

FAN BOX

FAN power cable

(FAN)

REAR

TH0

TH1 TH2

FAN

FC0

FC1

FC2

TALM0TALM1

ON
OFF
Auto

PZ-M369

Figure 005-11 Connection of “FAN” Connector Cable (FAN BOX-PIM)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 75
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-005
Sheet 14/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

3. ATTACHING THE ADDITIONAL NOISE FILTER UNIT (NFILU) TO THE BASEU
The following flowchart shows the procedure to attach the Additional Noise Filter Unit (NFILU) to the BASEU
of the PBX. This work should be performed in each IMG stack of all Local Nodes when they contain 3 or 4
PIMs.
START
Referring to Figures 005-12 and 005-13, insert the NFILU to the BASEU and attach the NFILU with
two screws.
Referring to Figure 005-14, connect the cables equipped with the NFILU to the terminals on the
BASEU.
END

CHAPTER 3
Page 76
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-005
Sheet 15/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

SCREW

BASE-U

NOISE FILTER UNIT (NFILU)

Figure 005-12 Insertion of NFILU

SCREW
SCREWS

BASE-U

Figure 005-13 Attaching of NFILU

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 77
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-005
Sheet 16/16
Mounting of Units and Modules

BASEU

(GB1)

(—48VB)

(GB0)

(3)

(PZ-M371)

(4)

Already Attached
Noise Filter Unit
(1)
(PZ-M377)

(2)

(G)
(1)

(2)

(—48V)

FRONT

Figure 005-14 Cabling Diagram of NFILU

CHAPTER 3
Page 78
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

Additional
Noise Filter
Unit (NFILU)

NAP-200-006
Sheet 1/1
Installation of Power Equipment

This NAP explains the procedures for installing the power equipment.
Note:

The Circuit Breaker (NFB) for the Rectifier's DC output must remain OFF.

START
Install the power equipment at the predetermined location using anchor bolts, etc. Install the framework
for the batteries to be used for backup. Secure the framework using anchor bolts, etc.
Check the cabling at the primary and secondary sides of the power equipment, and the cabling to the
batteries.
Confirm that the specifications of the customer-installed AC PDB (NFB capacity, voltage, phase, etc.)
conform to the specifications of the Rectifier.
Confirm that the proper communication ground is available.
Connect the input power cable and grounding cable to the rectifier.
Supply electrolyte to each battery as per the specifications of the battery.
Charge the batteries after verifying that the rectifier is operating normally.
END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 79
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-007
Sheet 1/1
Installation of the MDF

This NAP explains the procedures for installing the MDF.
START
Install the MDF at the predetermined location on the floor or wall.
Be sure to check the quantity of accessory items such as arresters, block terminals, etc.
Install the MDF, taking into consideration the locations of lead-in holes for Local Cable, C.O. lines, Tie
Lines, and Cable Running Routes.
MDF Line Protector Ground must be separated from the Communication Ground connected to the
rectifier.
END

CHAPTER 3
Page 80
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-008
Sheet 1/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

This NAP explains the following work items.
•

Connection of Power and Ground Cables

•

Connection of DC-DC Converter for Telephone sets equipped with Message Waiting Lamps

•

End Jointing of Power and Ground Cables

•

Branching of Power Cables

1. CONNECTION OF THE POWER AND GROUND CABLES
CAUTION: Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment.

Never operate telecommunication equipment with grounding conductor disconnected.

START
Cable Running

Run the power and ground cables per Figures
008-1/008-2.

Running of power and ground cables up to
the Power Receiving Terminals in the
BASEU

An example of cable running on a free access or
computer floor is shown in Figure 008-1.

Confirm that the Circuit Breaker (NFB) of the Rectifier is OFF.
Connection of the power and ground cables

Connect the power and ground cables to the
Power Receiving Terminals on the BASEU per
Figure 008-2.
Connect the power and ground cables to the
output terminals of the Rectifier.

Check after cable connections

Using a continuity tester, confirm that the -48 V
power cable is not shorting to the G power cable
or FE ground cable.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 81
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-008
Sheet 2/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

IMG3
IMG2
POWER RECEIVING
TERMINAL

IMG1
IMG0

REAR DUMMY

ISW

REAR TSWM1
REAR TSWM0
REAR LPM

REARLPM

T-BR
ANCH
CON
NEC
TION
POW
ER A
ND G
ROU
ND C
ABLE
S

MAIN
CAB
LE

Figure 008-1 Detail of Cable Running

CHAPTER 3
Page 82
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-008
Sheet 3/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

+80V:Terminal
-48V:B Terminal
G:B Terminal

Note 1

-48V:A Terminal
G:A Terminal
POWER AND GROUND CABLES

FE Terminal

PIM0
LPM/TSWM/DUMMY

POWER RECEIVING TERMINAL
BASE-U
REAR VIEW

Note 1: For 1/2 PIM configuration, connect the cable only to the A terminal.
Note 2: An example of End Jointing (using A Type-Clamp terminal) is explained in Section 3 of thisNAP.
Figure 008-2 Connection of Power and Ground Cables to Power Receiving Terminal

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 83
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-008
Sheet 4/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

2. CONNECTION OF DC-DC
MESSAGE WAITING LAMPS

CONVERTER

FOR

TELEPHONE

SETS

EQUIPPED

WITH

START
Cable Running

Referring to Figure 008-3, run the power and ground
cables.

Removal of shorting piece and cable
connection

Referring to Figure 008-4, remove the shorting piece
from the +80 V connector of PZ-M371 card, then
connect the cable provided on the +80 V Power
Receiving Terminal Block to the +80 V connector.

Confirm that the Circuit Breaker (NFB) of the Rectifier is OFF.
Connection of Power and Ground
Cables

Referring to Figures 008-3 and 008-4, connect the
power and ground cable to each terminal of the
equipment.

Check after cable connections

Using a continuity tester, confirm that the –48 V and
+80 V power cable are not short-circuiting with the
G power cable or FE ground cables.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 84
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-008
Sheet 5/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

PBX

+80V

IV(WHITE)

DC-DC
CONVERTER

+80V

F
G G

–48V

G

OUTPUT

INPUT

IV(BL)

TO RECTIFIER

IV(R)
IV(G)

Note:

The current capacity of the DC-DC Converter is calculated by multiplying the (current capacity of the
message waiting lamp) by the number of telephone sets.
Figure 008-3 Example Connection Diagram-DC-DC Converter for Message Waiting Lamps

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 85
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-008
Sheet 6/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

Power Receiving Terminal Block

Power Cable
PZ-M371
+80V

+80V

BASEU

Remove the shorting piece

Connect the Cable to the +80V Connector of PZ-M371 card

Figure 008-4 Removal of Shorting Piece and Cable Connection

CHAPTER 3
Page 86
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-008
Sheet 7/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

3. END JOINTING OF POWER AND GROUND CABLES

START
Stripping of Insulation Sheath

Strip the wire to exceed the length of the terminal body
by 1 - 2 mm (1/8 inch).
WIRE SHEATH
CONDUCTOR

1 - 2 mm
CLAMP TERMINAL

Clamping

Referring to Figure 008-5, place the terminal body on
the die with the soldered part facing upward.
Referring to Figure 008-6, insert the stripped wire into
the terminal body up to the insulation-sheath edge, and
clamp the terminal.
Wipe the terminal with a dry cloth.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 87
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-008
Sheet 8/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

CONVEX DIE

SOLDERED PART
TERMINAL

CONCAVE DIE

Figure 008-5 Placing the Clamp Terminal on the Die

CONVEX DIE
INSULATION SHEATH
1/8 inch (1 - 2mm)

TERMINAL
CONCAVE DIE
SOLDERED PART
A

A'

CLAMPED PORTION
CLAMPED PORTION

A-A'

CONDUCTOR

Figure 008-6 Clamping Method
CHAPTER 3
Page 88
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-008
Sheet 9/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

4. BRANCHING OF POWER CABLES

START
Stripping Main and Branch Cable

Referring to Figure 008-7, strip insulation coating with
an electrician’s knife. Avoid damage to the conductor
during the stripping process.

Inserting of Cables into Terminal

Insert the stripped main wire and branch wire into the
terminal as shown in Figure 008-8.

Clamping for Branch Jointing

Place T-Type terminal on the die of the clamping tool,
T-20 - T-44 terminals should be placed on the center of
the die.
T-60 - T-365 terminals should be placed on the die in
such a way that the terminal will be pressed on the part
marked with the roulette.

NO ROULETTE
T-20-T-44

2 ROULETTES
T-60-T-122

3 ROULETTES
T-154-T-365

Proceed with the operation of the clamping tool by
referring to Figure 008-9.
Clean the terminal with a dry cloth.
Taping and Covering

Referring to Figures 008-10 and 008-11, put an
installation cover over the clamped portion, after taping
with installation tape.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 89
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-008
Sheet 10/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

Table 008-1 Stripped Length
APPLICABLE TERMINAL

STRIPPED MAIN-WIRE LENGTH I1
[inch (mm)]

STRIPPED MAIN-WIRE LENGTH I2
[inch (mm)]

T-20

Approx. 1.2 (28)

Approx. 1.0 (24)

T-26

1.3 (32)

1.2 (28)

T-44

1.5 (37)

1.3 (33)

T-60

1.6 (40)

1.5 (36)

T-76

1.7 (42)

1.6 (39)

T-98

1.8 (44)

1.7 (41)

T-122

1.7–1.9 (43–46)

1.6–1.7 (40–43)

T-154

2.0 (49)

1.9 (46)

T-190

2.3 (57)

2.2 (54)

T-240

2.5 (63)

2.4 (60)

T-288

2.8 (69)

2.6 (66)

T-365

3.0 (75)

2.9 (72)

T-98
Sum of the cross sections of the main and branching, or the main and extension cables.
Type of clamp terminal (T type)

MAIN CABLE
I1

T TYPE
CLAMPTERMINAL

CONDUCTOR
BRANCH CABLE

I2

Figure 008-7 Stripped Length of Main and Branch Cable

CHAPTER 3
Page 90
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-008
Sheet 11/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

T TYPE
TERMINAL

MAIN CABLE

BRANCH
CABLE
1/8 inch (1 - 2 mm)
BEND PRIOR TO INSERTION

Figure 008-8 Inserting of Cables into Terminal

CLAMPED PORTION

T TYPE
TERMINAL

DIE

CONDUCTOR
(MAIN AND
BRANCH CABLE)

Note:

• Prevent the wires from slipping out of the clamp terminal by holding them firmly.
• Check the indication of the pressure regulator.
• Operate the pressure release lever to release the wires
from the die.
Figure 008-9 Clamping for Branch Jointing

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 91
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-008
Sheet 12/12
Connection of Power and Ground Cables
from the Power Equipment

INSULATION TAPE

0.4- 1.2 in.
(10 - 30 mm)

Note:

ABOVE 0.4 in. (10 mm)

Taping should be done in two rounds with the tape
overlapping half the tape width.
Figure 008-10 Taping

INSULATION COVER

Figure 008-11 Covering

CHAPTER 3
Page 92
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-009
Sheet 1/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

This NAP explains the following work items:
•

Extraction of Mounted Circuit Cards

•

Mounting of Circuit Cards

•

Setting of Switch Positions on Circuit Cards

•

Installation of CPR

1. PRECAUTIONS
1.1 Protection Against Static Electricity
When setting switches on circuit cards, use a Portable Field Service Grounding Kit to prevent damage to staticsensitive components.
Example:

3M Model 8012, consists of:

•

2 × 2 VELOSTAT ® Work Mat

•

15 ft. Ground Cord

•

CHARGE-GUARD ® Wrist Strap with alligator clip

Before handling any circuit cards, first spread out the work mat, then connect the ground cord to the frame or
other ground source.
If a CHARGE-GUARD wrist strap is to be used, connect the wrist strap to the frame or other ground using the
provided cable.
1.2 Handling Circuit Cards
Whenever possible, do not handle circuit cards with bare hands.
The only portion of the card that can be touched is its edge. Do not touch the surface or the mounted components.
Doing so may damage the card.
Handle circuit cards with care. Never bang or drop them.
1.3 Mounting or Removing Circuit Cards When the System Is in Operation
Never mount or remove a circuit card without first setting its MBR and/or MB switch to the UP position.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 93
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-009
Sheet 2/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

2. EXTRACTION OF MOUNTED CIRCUIT CARDS

START
Remove the Card Stopper

Referring to Figure 009-1, remove the card stopper from
the module.

Extract Circuit Cards

Referring to Figure 009-2, pull the card puller tabs in the
direction indicated by the arrow. The card will release
from the connector and can then be removed.
Pull the card out about 50 mm (2 inches) from the edge
of the module so that it does not contact the backplane
connector.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 94
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-009
Sheet 3/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PAN HEAD SCREW (M3,8mm length)
SPRING WASHER (M3)
PLAIN WASHER (M3)
(PL-C.P.l. MSx3x8x15BF)

Remove the card stopper from the
module using a Phillips-head screwdriver.

CARD STOPPER

Figure 009-1 Removal of Card Stopper

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 95
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-009
Sheet 4/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

3. MOUNTING OF CIRCUIT CARDS

START
Unpacking the Circuit Cards

Unpack each circuit card and remove it from its
polyethylene bag.

Clean the connector portion of the
Circuit Cards

Wipe the connector portion clean using a soft cloth
moistened with pure trichloroethylene or methanol
(medical alcohol). Make sure that no lint or dust
remains on the connector after cleaning.
Circuit cards which are already mounted should be
extracted and cleaned as per the above instructions.

Confirm the mounting positions of
the Circuit Cards

Confirm the mounting position of each circuit card by
referring to the Module Face Layout.
Confirm that the color code of the card puller tab
coincides with that of the card mounting slot.
Confirm the Slot No. on the Module. Slot numbers are
indicated at the bottom of each module, and range from
00 to 23.

Insert the cards into the Module

Partially insert the circuit card into the module, making
sure that it is correctly aligned at the top and bottom.
The card should extend about two inches from the
module, and must not contact the backplane connector
(see Figure 009-3).

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 96
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-009
Sheet 5/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

4. SETTING OF SWITCH POSITIONS ON CIRCUIT CARDS

START
Extracting the Circuit Cards from the
Module

Extract one circuit card requiring switch setting from
the module.
Place the extracted card onto the anti-static sheet.

Perform switch setting

Set the required switches according to the Switch
Setting Sheets in the Circuit Card Manual.

Mounting of Circuit Cards

After the switches have been set, partially insert the
card in the module. The card should extend about 50
mm (2 inches) from the module, and must not contact
the backplane connector. Refer to Figure 009-3.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 97
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-009
Sheet 6/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

CIRCUIT
CARDS
About 50 mm
(2 inches)
CARD
PULLER
TAB

About 50 mm
(2 inches)

Figure 009-2 Extraction of Circuit Cards

CHAPTER 3
Page 98
Revision 1.0

Figure 009-3 Circuit Card Mounting (Partial Insertion)

NDA-24306

NAP-200-009
Sheet 7/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

5. INSTALLATION OF CPR
This section explains the procedure to install the CPR into the LPM of each Local Node (LN) and ISW. Perform
the following for all the CPR (CPR0/1) of each LN and ISW.
1.

Using the Phillips Screwdriver, remove the four + eight screws. Then, detach the front panel and top cover
from the CPR. (Refer to Figure 009-4.)

As shown in the figure below, detach the front panel of the CPR by removing the four screws.
Then, also lift away the top cover by removing the eight screws.

Top Cover

Front Panel
CPR

Figure 009-4 Removing Front Panel and Top Cover from CPR
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 99
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-009
Sheet 8/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

2.

Note:

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Depending on the system configuration, insert the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20) and LANI (PZ-PC19)
cards into the following slots of the CPR (refer to Figure 009-5):
ISAGT (PZ-GT13) → slot 6 (ISA) (Fixed)
ISAGT (PZ-GT20) → slot 5 (ISA) (When the LN has 3 or 4 IMGs) Note
LANI
→ Slot 0 (PCI) (For Fusion link)
LANI
→ Slot 1 (PCI) (When connecting MAT via 10-BASE T and PCI buses)
LANI
→ Slot 3 (PCI) (When LANI for Fusion link is in dual configuration)
This card is mounted in LN only.

This figure (example) shows how to insert the ISAGT and LANI cards into CPR slots 5 and 6 (ISA), 0, 1 and 3
(PCI), respectively.
ISAGT
LANI

Slot 6 (ISA)
Slot 5 (ISA)
Slot 3 (PCI)
Slot 1 (PCI)
Slot 0 (PCI)

CPR

Note 1: Actual accommodation of the LANI/ISAGT cards may differ, depending on your system configuration.
Figure 009-5 Inserting ISAGT and LANI Cards into CPR Slots

CHAPTER 3
Page 100
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-009
Sheet 9/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

3.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Attach the top cover and front panel again by fastening the removed screws. (Refer to Figure 009-6.)

After mounting the ISAGT/LANI cards, reattach the top cover by tightening the eight screws.
Then, also attach the Front Panel by fastening the four screws.

Top Cover

Front Panel
CPR

Figure 009-6 Reattaching CPR Top Cover and Front Panel

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 101
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-009
Sheet 10/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

4.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

After turning “ON” the MBR key on the DSP of the new CPR, insert the new CPR into the LPM. Then,
fasten the four screws. (Refer to Figure 009-7.)

As shown in the figure below, insert the new CPR into the LPM. Then, fasten the four screws.

LPM

CPR

Figure 009-7 Accommodating New CPR into LPM

CHAPTER 3
Page 102
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-009
Sheet 11/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

5.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Insert the new HFD (PZ-IO27/28) into the CPR. Then, fasten the two screws. (Refer to Figure 009-8.)

Using the two screws, fasten the new HFD onto the CPR.

LPM

HFD (PZ-IO27)

Figure 009-8 Insertion of New HFD into CPR

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 103
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-009
Sheet 12/12
Setting of Switch Positions and Mounting
of the Circuit Cards

6.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Lastly, make sure that Switch 8 of “SYSTEM SELECT 1” (DIP Switch) on each CPU Front Panel (for all
LNs and ISW) is set to “ON.” (Refer to Figure 009-9.)

LANI (PZ-PC19)

ISAGT (PZ-GT13)

FRONT VIEW

00

01

02

03

04

SW
ON

HDD MB
MBR

FDD

CPUOPE WDT IMG0
IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0
ON

STATUS

12 3 4

OFF

5A

SYSTEM SELECT1
ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

SENSE

OUT PWR
OFF

CPR1

ON

EMA (PH-PC40)

IOC (PH-IO24)

* MISC / IOC

* MISC

MMC (PH-M22)

LPM

SYSTEM SELECT2
ON
IN PWR

1 23 4 5 67 8

CPURST

OFF

OFF

SLOT No. 0

SW

HDD MB

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

CPUOPE WDT IMG0
MBR

FDD

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0

STATUS

1 2 34
OFF

5A

SYSTEM SELECT1
ON

OUT PWR

CPR0

1 23 4 5 67 8

SENSE

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT2
ON 1 2

ON
IN PWR

3

4 56 7 8

CPURST

OFF

OFF

SLOT No.

0

SYSTEM SELECT 1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

OFF

Figure 009-9 Switch Setting on the CPU Front Panel

CHAPTER 3
Page 104
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 1/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

This NAP explains the procedure for connecting cables. Connect all the necessary cables (internal, inter-frame,
node-to-node cables) in the following order.
Note 1: All the figures in this NAP assume that the system adopts the fully expanded configuration. According to

your system configuration, connect the whole necessary cables per each figure/table provided.
Note 2: The cable connections in Section 2 are common to all the LNs (LN0-3).

According to each LN configuration, perform necessary cable connections.

START
Internal Cable Connections for ISW/LN —— Section 1
IMG0
TOPU

IMG1
TOPU

IMG2
TOPU

IMG3
TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2
FANU

PIM2
FANU

PIM2
FANU

PIM2
FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

LPM

TSWM0

TSWM1

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

b.

c.

d.

e.

ISW
TOPU
ISWM

a.

a. Internal Power/Bus Cables for ISW
(See Figure 010-9 and 010-13.)
b. Internal Power/Bus Cables for IMG0
c. Internal Power/Bus Cables for IMG1
d. Internal Power/Bus Cables for IMG2
e. Internal Power/Bus Cables for IMG3

Note:

“Quick Reference Table for LN Cable
Connection (Table 010-1)" shows
which figures and tables are to be used
for your system type.

Inter-frame Cable Connections for LN —— Section 2
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

TSWM0

TSWM1

LPM

g.
f.

A

j.

DUMMY
k.

f. Inter-frame ISA/Alarm Bus Cables for IMG0-IMG1
g. Inter-frame Bus Cables for IMG0-IMG1
h. Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cables for IMG0-IMG2
i. Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cables for IMG0-IMG3
j. Inter-frame ISA/Alarm Bus Cables for IMG1-IMG2
k. Inter-frame Bus Cables for IMG2-IMG3

Note:

h.

"Quick Reference Table for LN Cable Connection (Table 010-1)" shows which figures
and tables are to be used for your system type.

i.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 105
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 2/73
Cable Connections
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
PCM and Alarm Bus Cable Connection between ISW and each LN —— Section 3

LN0

LN1

LPM TSWM0TSWM1

LPM TSWM0TSWM1

o.
l.

m.

p.

n.

q.

ISWM

LPM
r.

s.

t.

LPM TSWM0TSWM1

LN2

u.

v.

w.

LPM TSWM0TSWM1

LN3

B

CHAPTER 3
Page 106
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

l. Inter-frame Cables for ISW-LN0, IMG0
(Refer to Figure 010-26.)
m. Inter-frame Bus Cables for ISW-LN0, IMG1
(Refer to Figure 010-30 and Table 010-14.)
n. Inter-frame Bus Cables for ISW-LN0, IMG2
(Refer to Figure 010-31 and Table 010-15.)
o. Inter-frame Cables for ISW-LN1, IMG0
(Refer to Figure 010-27.)
p. Inter-frame Bus Cables for ISW-LN1, IMG1
(Refer to Figure 010-32 and Table 010-16.)
q. Inter-frame Bus Cables for ISW-LN1, IMG2
(Refer to Figure 010-33 and Table 010-17.)
r. Inter-frame Cables for ISW-LN2, IMG0
(Refer to Figure 010-28.)
s. Inter-frame Bus Cables for ISW-LN2, IMG1
(Refer to Figure 010-34 and Table 010-18.)
t. Inter-frame Bus Cables for ISW-LN2, IMG2
(Refer to Figure 010-35 and Table 010-19.)
u. Inter-frame Cables for ISW-LN3, IMG0
(Refer to Figure 010-29.)
v. Inter-frame Bus Cables for ISW-LN3, IMG1
(Refer to Figure 010-36 and Table 010-20.)
w. Inter-frame Bus Cables for ISW-LN3, IMG2
(Refer to Figure 010-37 and Table 010-21.)

NAP-200-010
Sheet 3/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

B
Ether Cable Connection —— Section 4
LN1

LN0

Fusio
n Lin

k

ISW

n Lin
Fusio

k

ISWM
LPM

F us

ion L

ink

F us

ion L

LN2

LN0

ink

LN3

LN2

LN1

LN3

ISWM
LPM

LPM TSWM0TSWM1

LPM

TSWM0 TSWM1

LPM TSWM0TSWM1

LPM TSWM0TSWM1

HUB
(PA-M96)

Refer to Figures 010-38 and 010-39 for details on Ether cable connection.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 107
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 4/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table for LN Cable Connection (1/5)
SYSTEM TYPE

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

IMG0
IMG1
IMG0
IMG1
IMG0
IMG1

010-10
010-7
010-10
010-11
010-14
010-15
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-10
010-8
010-10
010-11
010-14
010-15
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-10
010-9
010-10
010-11
010-14
010-15
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-20

–
–
010-3
010-4
010-7
010-8
010-10
010-11
010-12
–
–
010-3
010-4
010-7
010-8
010-10
010-11
010-12
–
–
010-3
010-4
010-7
010-8
010-10
010-11
010-12
010-12

FANU Cable

IMG0
TOPU

PIM3

Internal Power Cable

PIM2
FANU

PIM1

IMG1

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM1

BASEU

BASEU

TOPU

5-PIM System

Internal Bus Cable
Inter-frame Bus Cable
FANU Cable

IMG0
TOPU

PIM3
PIM2

Internal Power Cable
IMG1

FANU

TOPU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM0

BASEU

BASEU

6-PIM System

Internal Bus Cable
Inter-frame Bus Cable
FANU Cable

IMG0
TOPU

PIM3

IMG1

PIM2

PIM2

TOPU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM0

BASEU

BASEU

7-PIM System

CHAPTER 3
Page 108
Revision 1.0

Internal Power Cable
Internal Bus Cable

Inter-frame Bus Cable

NDA-24306

IMG0-IMG1
IMG0
IMG1
IMG0
IMG1
IMG0
IMG1
IMG0-IMG1
IMG0
IMG1
IMG0
IMG1
IMG0
IMG1
IMG0-IMG1

NAP-200-010
Sheet 5/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table for LN Cable Connection (2/5)
SYSTEM TYPE
IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM0

BASEU

BASEU

8-PIM System

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

FANU Cable

IMG0/1
IMG0
IMG1
IMG0
IMG1

010-10
010-10
010-11
010-14
010-15
010-18
010-19
010-10
010-7
010-10
010-11
010-14
010-15
010-16
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-21
010-22
010-24
010-10
010-8
010-10
010-11
010-14
010-15
010-16
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-21
010-22
010-24

–
010-3
010-4
010-7
010-8
010-10
010-11
–
–
010-3
010-4
010-7
010-8
010-9
010-10
010-11
010-12
–
–
–
–
–
010-3
010-4
010-7
010-8
010-9
010-10
010-11
010-12
–
–
–

Internal Power Cable
Internal Bus Cable
Inter-frame Bus Cable
FANU Cable

IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

Internal Power Cable
Internal Bus Cable

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

IMG2

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

TOPU

LPM
BASEU

IMG0/1
IMG2
IMG0
IMG1/2
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2
IMG0-IMG1

TSWM0 TSWM1
BASEU

IMG0-IMG1

BASEU

9-PIM System

Inter-frame Bus Cable
IMG0-IMG2

FANU Cable
IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

Internal Power Cable

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

TOPU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM
BASEU

IMG2

Internal Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

TSWM0 TSWM1
BASEU

IMG1-IMG2
IMG0/IMG1
IMG2
IMG0
IMG1/2
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2

BASEU

10-PIM System

Inter-frame Bus Cable
IMG0-IMG2
IMG1-IMG2

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 109
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 6/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table for LN Cable Connection (3/5)
SYSTEM TYPE

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

IMG0/1
IMG2
IMG0
IMG1/2
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2

010-10
010-9
010-10
010-11
010-14
010-15
010-16
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-21
010-22
010-24
010-10
010-10
010-11
010-14
010-15
010-16
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-21
010-22
010-24

–
–
010-3
010-4
010-7
010-8
010-9
010-10
010-11
010-12
–
–
–
–
010-3
010-4
010-7
010-8
010-9
010-10
010-11
010-12
–
–
–

FANU Cable
IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

Internal Power Cable

PIM3

PIM3

IMG2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM
BASEU

TOPU

Internal Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

TSWM0 TSWM1
BASEU

BASEU

11-PIM System

Inter-frame Bus Cable
IMG0-IMG2
FANU Cable
Internal Power Cable

IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM
BASEU

IMG2

Internal Bus Cable

IMG1-IMG-2
IMG0/1/2
IMG0
IMG1/2
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2
IMG0-IMG1

TSWM0 TSWM1
BASEU

BASEU

12-PIM System

Inter-frame Bus Cable
IMG0-IMG2
IMG1-IMG2

CHAPTER 3
Page 110
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 7/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table for LN Cable Connection (4/5)
SYSTEM TYPE

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

IMG0/1/2
IMG3
IMG0
IMG1/2
IMG3
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2
IMG3

010-10
010-7
010-10
010-11
010-12
010-14
010-15
010-16
010-17
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-21
010-22
010-23
010-24
010-25
010-10
010-8
010-10
010-11
010-12
010-14
010-15
010-16
010-17
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-21
010-22
010-23
010-24
010-25

–
–
010-3
010-4
010-5
010-7
010-8
010-9
–
010-10
010-11
010-12
–
–
–
–
010-13
–
–
010-3
010-4
010-5
010-7
010-8
010-9
–
010-10
010-11
010-12
–
–
–
–
010-13

FANU Cable
Internal Power Cable
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

IMG3

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

Internal Bus Cable
TOPU

LPM
BASEU

IMG0-IMG1

TSWM0 TSWM1 DUMMY
BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

13-PIM System

Inter-frame Bus Cable

FANU Cable
Internal Power Cable
IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

TOPU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0
LPM
BASEU

IMG2

Internal Bus Cable
IMG3

BASEU

IMG0-IMG3
IMG1-IMG2
IMG2-IMG3
IMG0/1/2
IMG3
IMG0
IMG1/2
IMG3
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2
IMG3
IMG0-IMG1

TSWM0 TSWM1 DUMMY
BASEU

IMG0-IMG2

BASEU

14-PIM System

Inter-frame Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG2
IMG0-IMG3
IMG1-IMG2
IMG2-IMG3

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 111
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 8/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-1 Quick Reference Table for LN Cable Connection (5/5)
SYSTEM TYPE

KIND OF CABLE

FRAME NAME

FIGURE

TABLE

IMG0/1/2
IMG3
IMG0
IMG1/2
IMG3
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2
IMG3

010-10
010-9
010-10
010-11
010-12
010-14
010-15
010-16
010-17
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-21
010-22
010-23
010-24
010-25
010-10
010-10
010-11
010-12
010-14
010-15
010-16
010-17
010-18
010-19
010-20
010-21
010-22
010-23
010-24
010-25

–
–
010-3
010-4
010-5
010-7
010-8
010-9
–
010-10
010-11
010-12
–
–
–
–
010-13
–
010-3
010-4
010-5
010-7
010-8
010-9
–
010-10
010-11
010-12
–
–
–
–
010-13

FANU Cable
Internal Power Cable
IMG0

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

IMG2
TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

IMG3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

TOPU

LPM
BASEU

Internal Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG1

TSWM0 TSWM1 DUMMY
BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

15-PIM System

Inter-frame Bus Cable

FANU Cable
Internal Power Cable
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0
LPM
BASEU

Internal Bus Cable

BASEU

IMG0-IMG3
IMG1-IMG2
IMG2-IMG3
IMG0/1/2/3
IMG0
IMG1/2
IMG3
IMG0
IMG1
IMG2
IMG3
IMG0-IMG1

TSWM0 TSWM1 DUMMY
BASEU

IMG0-IMG2

BASEU

16-PIM System

Inter-frame Bus Cable

IMG0-IMG2
IMG0-IMG3
IMG1-IMG2
IMG2-IMG3

CHAPTER 3
Page 112
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 9/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

1. INTERNAL CABLE CONNECTIONS FOR ISW/LN
This section explains how to run the internal cables for ISW and LN.
START
Confirm connector locations

Referring to Figure 010-1 through 010-8, confirm the
locations of the connectors into which the cables are inserted.

Connection of Internal Power
Cables for ISW

Referring to Figure 010-9, connect internal power cables for
ISW.

Connection of Internal Power
Cables for LN

Referring to Figure 010-10 through 010-12, connect internal
power cables for all the LNs.

Connection of Internal Bus Cables
for ISW

Referring to Figure 010-13, connect internal bus cables for
ISW.

Connection of Internal Bus Cables
for LN

Referring to Figure 010-14 through 010-17, connect internal
bus cables for all the LNs.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 113
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 10/73

FAN

IOP1

IOP0
CLK1F

CLK0D

CLK09

CLK08

Note

CLK0A

CLK0B

CLK0C

IORES0

Note

CLK18

CLK19

IORES1

CLK1A

CLK1B

CLK1C

11F 11E 11D 11C 11B 11A 119 118

10F 10E 10D 10C 10B 10A 109 108

EXCLK1

CLK1E

CLK1D

EXCLK0

CLK0E

CLK0F

03F 03E 03D 03C 03B 03A 039 038

02F 02E 02D 02C 02B 02A 029 028

01F 01E 01D 01C 01B 01A 019 018

00F 00E 00D 00C 00B 00A 009 008

PWRB

12F 12E 12D 12C 12B 12A 129 128

007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000

017 016 015 014 013 012 011 010

027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020

CLK05

CLK00

CLK01

EMAFH

CLK02

CLK03

037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030
CLK07

CLK04

CLK10

CLK11

CLK12

CLK13

CLK14

CLK15

CLK06

CLK17

CLK16

107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100

117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110

127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120

ALMA

Figure 010-1 Location of Connectors on the ISWM Backplane

FALM
137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 114
Revision 1.0

Note
TIORES0
Note
TIORES0

PWRA
13F 13E 13D 13C 13B 13A 139 138

Terminal Registers are to be fastened onto these connectors. Details are on the next page.
Note:

ATTENTION

Cable Connections

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

ALMB

NAP-200-010
Sheet 11/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Referring to the figure below, fasten the Terminal Registers securely onto the relevant connectors on the ISWM
backplane.
Slot 10
Slot 11

Slot 02

Slot 19

PZ-M513

TRM-R34F-B

TRM-R34F-B

PZ-M513

Note

Note

ISW
TOPU
(11)(10)
(02)
TIORES0

IORES0

TIORES1

ISWM

IORES1

(19)

ISWM Backplane

TRM-R34F-B

PZ-M513
Note
: Terminal Register for No. 0 System

LPM

: Terminal Register for No. 1 System
BASEU
REAR VIEW

Note:

When attaching the Terminal Registers, PZ-M513, be sure to apply the supportive metal fittings, too, referring to Figure 010-3 on the next page.
Figure 010-2 Location of Terminal Registers on the ISWM Backplane

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 115
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 12/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

When attaching the Terminal Register, PZ-M513, also fasten the following metal fittings onto the ISWM backplane using the seven screws.
(05) (04) (03) (02)

(19) (18) (17) (16) (15) (14)

PZ-M513

PZ-M513

Supportive Metal Fitting

Supportive Metal Fitting

ISWM Backplane

Figure 010-3 Details on Fastening PZ-M513 by Metal Fittings (ISWM Backplane)

CHAPTER 3
Page 116
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 13/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PWRA1 PWRA0
EMA

MISC

MISC

MISC

LED3

EBUS1

IOC

PWRB1 PWRB0

MISC0B

MISC1B

MISC2B

MISC3B

LED2
LED1

PALM1 PALM0

ALM3
BUS1 BUS0

MUSIC

EBUS0

MISC0A

MISC1A

MISC2A

MISC3A

ALM2
ALM1
EXALM

FALM

DSP
ALM

FAN
KEY

BZ-C21

Figure 010-4 Location of Connectors on the LPM Backplane

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 117
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 14/73

MIO31
IOP1
IOP0

MISC2B

MISC1B

MISC3A

MISC2A

MISC1A

MUX112

MUX102

MUX032

MUX022

MUX012

MUX002

MUX121

MUX111

MUX101

MUX031

MUX021

MUX011

MUX001

Note

EMAFH

MUX130

MUX120

MUX110

MUX100

MUX030

MUX020

MUX010

MUX000

MIO1

MIO0

MIORES0 Note

MISC3B
MISC4A

Note

MISC4B
MISC5A

MUX122

MUX131

MIO30

MUX132

MIO21

MISC5B

MIO20

FALM
TIORES0

Figure 010-5 Location of Connectors on the TSWM Backplane

MIORES1

MUX003
MUX013
MUX023
MUX033
MUX103
MUX113
MUX123
MUX133

PLOCLK0
Note

EMA
ALM

PWRB
TIORES1

PLOCLK1

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 118
Revision 1.0

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

Terminal Registers (PZ-M497) are to be fastened onto these connectors. Details are on the next page.
Note:

ATTENTION

Cable Connections

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PWRA

NAP-200-010
Sheet 15/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Referring to the figure below, fasten the Terminal Registers securely onto the relevant connectors on the TSWM0
and TSWM1 backplanes of each Local Node.
Slot 22

Slot 02

PZ-M497

PZ-M497

PZ-M497

PZ-M497

IMG1/IMG2
TSWM0/1 Backplane

TOPU

PIM

(22)

(02)

TIORES1

MIORES1

TIORES0

MIORES0

: Terminal Register for No. 0 System

TSWM0/1

PZ-M497

: Terminal Register for No. 1 System

BASEU
REAR VIEW

Note:

Perform this procedure for all the existing Local Nodes, both TSWM0 and TSWM1.
Figure 010-6 Attachment of Terminal Registers for TSWM Backplane (LN)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 119
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 16/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
B

ALMB
10 ATI1 01
25

LT8

01

A
B
25

A
10

01

B
01

10

ATI0 01

01

25

LT6
25

50

26

2550

26

01

01

CONN10

CONN00
PLO0

26

PLO1

LT11
50

PLO

26

50

LT3
50
25

2601

50

26

LT2
FAN
1
2
3
4

LT10
50
25

26
01

50

26

CONN01
CONN03 CONN02

01

CONN13 CONN12

25

PWRB

25

01

50
25

26
01

50

26

01

25

LT1
50
25

26
01

LT0

01
26

10

ALMA01

B

A
B

50
20

BUS1A

01

26
A
B

Figure 010-7 Location of Connectors on the PIM Backplane

CHAPTER 3
Page 120
Revision 1.0

1
2
3
4

LT4
A

50

PWRA

1
2
3
4

LT9
25

1
2
3

LT5

LT7

-48V0

1
2
3

MUSIC0

CONN11 MUSIC1

-48V1

NDA-24306

20

BUS0A

01

NAP-200-010
Sheet 17/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PIM

LPM

BASE-U

POWER DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BOARD

REAR VIEW

PA0

PB0

PA1

PB1

PA2

GA0
-48VA

PB2

PA3

+80A

GA1

-48VB

PB3

PA4

PB4

GB0
GB1

PZ-M371

DETAIL OF BOARD

Figure 010-8 Location of Connectors on the Power Distribution Terminal Board (PZ-M371)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 121
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 18/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Run the internal power cables for ISW and each IMG of LN, referring to Figure 3-46 through 3-49.
Connect the internal power cables for ISW as shown in the figure below. Note that the dotted lines indicate power
cables for a dual-system.

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

TOPU

TOPU
PWRA
PWRB

ISWM

ISWM
(4)

(3)

PWRA0 PWRB0

LPM

PWRA1 PWRB1

(6)

(5)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

PZ-PW92

OUT
PWR

CPU1

INPWR
00 01 02 03 04 05 06

PZ-PW92

OUT
PWR

LPM

CPU0

INPWR

PA1

PB1

PB0

PZ-M371

PA0

BASEU

BASEU

(1)

(2)

Figure 010-9 Internal Power Cable Connection for ISW

CHAPTER 3
Page 122
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 19/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-2 Internal Power Cable Connection for ISW
TO
No.

FROM

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

(1)

BASEU
(PZ-M371)

PA0

LPM PWR0

IN PWR

4P-2P PWR CA-A

(2)

BASEU
(PZ-M371)

PB0

LPM PWR1

IN PWR

4P-2P PWR CA-B

(3)

BASEU
(PZ-M371)

PA1

ISWM

PWRA

4P PWR CA-C

(4)

BASEU
(PZ-M371)

PB1

ISWM

PWRB

4P PWR CA-D

(5) LPM PWR0

OUT PWR

LPM

PWRA0/B0

6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A

(6) LPM PWR1

OUT PWR

LPM

PWRA1/B1

6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B

NDA-24306

REMARKS

For dual
configuration

For dual
configuration
For dual
configuration

CHAPTER 3
Page 123
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 20/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the internal power cables for IMG0 of each LN as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate power
cables for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

TOPU

TOPU
00 01 02 03

(22)
-48v1

-48v0

-48v0 PWRA

-48v1 PWRB

PIM 3

PIM 3

(21)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(20)
-48v1

-48v0

-48v1 PWRB

-48v0 PWRA

PIM 2

PIM 2

(19)
PWR PWR
FANU

FANU
00 01 02 03
-48v1

-48v0

-48v1 PWRB

-48v0 PWRA

PIM 1

PWR PWR
(16)

-48v1

-48v0

-48v1 PWRB

-48v0 PWRA

PIM 0

(15)
PWR PWR
PALM

PWRA1 PWRB1

(14)
(13)

PWRA0 PWRB0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

OUT
PWR
IN PWR

(12)

PALM

PALM0

PALM1

LPM

PIM 1

(17)
00 01 02 03

PIM 0

(18)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

LPM

OUT
PWR

(11)

IN PWR

PZ-M371
PA3

PB3

PB2

PB1

PA2

PA1

PB0
PA0

BASEU

(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

BASEU

(6)

(10)
(9)
(8)
(7)

Figure 010-10 Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG0
CHAPTER 3
Page 124
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 21/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-3 Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG0
TO

FROM

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

(1)

LPM

INPWR

BASEU

PA0

4P-2P PWR CA-A

For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist

(2)

LPM

INPWR

BASEU

PB0

4P-2P PWR CA-B

(3)

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWRA

4P PWR CA-C

For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist

(4)

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWRB

4P PWR CA-D

(5)

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWRA

4P PWR CA-E

(6)

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWRB

4P PWR CA-F

(7)

BASEU

PA3

PIM2

PWRA

4P PWR CA-G

(8)

BASEU

PB3

PIM2

PWRB

4P PWR CA-H

(9)

BASEU

PA4

PIM3

PWRA

4P PWR CA-I

(10)

BASEU

PB4

PIM3

PWRB

4P PWR CA-J

(11)

LPM

PALM

LPM

10AL-(110) FLT CA

(12)

LPM

OUTPWR

LPM

6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B

For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist

(13)

LPM

OUTPWR

LPM

PALM0
PWR A1/
PWR B1
PWR A0/
PWR B0

For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist

(14)

LPM

PALM

LPM

PALM1

10AL-(130) FLT CA

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V IN CONN

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V IN CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V IN CONN

PIM2

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

-48V IN CONN

PIM3

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

-48V IN CONN

PIM3

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)

PIM0
(PWR)
PIM0
(PWR)
PIM1
(PWR)
PIM1
(PWR)
PIM2
(PWR)
PIM2
(PWR)
PIM3
(PWR)
PIM3
(PWR)

NDA-24306

6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A

For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist

For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist
For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3 exist

CHAPTER 3
Page 125
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 22/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the internal power cables for IMG1 and IMG2 of each LN as shown below. Note that the dotted lines
indicate power cables for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

TOPU

TOPU
00 01 02 03

(18)
PIM 3

-48V1

-48V0

-48V1 PWR B

-48V0 PWR A

PIM 3

(17)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(16)
PIM 2

-48V1

-48V0

-48V1 PWR B

-48V0 PWR A

PIM 2

(15)
PWR PWR
FANU

FANU
00 01 02 03

PIM 1

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 1

(14)

(13)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(12)
-48V1

-48V0

(11)
PWR PWR
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)

TSWM0/
TSWM1

PIM 0

PWR A PWR B

MICRES1
TIORES1

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 0

MICRES0

TIORES0
MUX010

MUX110

TSWM0/
TSWM1

00 01 02 03 10 11 12 13
PZ-M371
PA 4

BASEU

PB 4

PA 3

PB 3

PA 2

PB 2

PA 1

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

BASEU

(10)
(9)
(8)
(7)
(6)
(2)
(1)

(4)

(5)

(3)

Figure 010-11 Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG1/2
CHAPTER 3
Page 126
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 23/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-4 Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG1/2
TO

FROM

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

(1)

BASEU

PA0

TSWM0/1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-A

When IMG1/2 exists in LNn

(2)

BASEU

PB0

TSWM0/1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-B

(3)

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

For dual configuration
When IMG1/2 exists in LNn
When IMG1/2 exists in LNn

(4)

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

(5)

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

(6)

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

(7)

BASEU

PA3

PIM2

PWR A

4P PWR CA-G

(8)

BASEU

PB3

PIM2

PWR B

4P PWR CA-H

(9)

BASEU

PB4

PIM3

PWR A

4P PWR CA-I

(10)

BASEU

PB4

PIM3

PWR B

4P PWR CA-J

PIM0
(PWR)
PIM0
(PWR)
PIM1
(PWR)
PIM1
(PWR)
PIM2
(PWR)
PIM2
(PWR)
PIM3
(PWR)
PIM3
(PWR)

-48V IN
CONN
-48V IN
CONN
-48V IN
CONN
-48V IN
CONN
-48V IN
CONN
-48V IN
CONN
-48V IN
CONN
-48V IN
CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

For dual configuration
When IMG1/2 exists in LNn

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

When PIM1 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

PIM2

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

PIM2

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

PIM3

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

PIM3

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)

NDA-24306

For dual configuration
When IMG1/2 exists in LNn
When PIM1 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn
When PIM2 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn
When PIM3 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn
When IMG1/2 exists in LNn

For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn
When PIM2 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn
When PIM3 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in IMG1/2
of LNn

CHAPTER 3
Page 127
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 24/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the internal power cables for IMG3 of each LN as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate power
cables for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW
TOPU

TOPU
00 01 02 03

(16)
PIM 2

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 3

(15)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(14)
PIM 2

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 2

(13)
PWR PWR
FANU

FANU
00 01 02 03

(11)
PWR PWR
00 01 02 03

(10)

-48V1

-48V0

-48V1 PWR B

-48V0 PWR A

PIM 0

PIM 1

-48V1

-48V0

-48V0 PWR A

-48V1 PWR B

PIM 1

(12)

PIM 0

(9)
PWR PWR

APM

APM

BASEU

PZ-M371
PA 4

PB 4

PA 3

PB 3

PA 2

PB 2

PA 1

PB 1

PA 0

PB 0

BASEU

(8)
(7)
(6)

(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

(5)

Figure 010-12 Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG3
CHAPTER 3
Page 128
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 25/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-5 Internal Power Cable Connection for IMG3
TO

FROM

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

(1)

BASEU

PA1

PIM0

PWR A

4P PWR CA-C

When IMG3 exists in LNn

(2)

BASEU

PB1

PIM0

PWR B

4P PWR CA-D

For dual configuration
When IMG3 exists in LNn

(3)

BASEU

PA2

PIM1

PWR A

4P PWR CA-E

When PIM1 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(4)

BASEU

PB2

PIM1

PWR B

4P PWR CA-F

For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(5)

BASEU

PA3

PIM2

PWR A

4P PWR CA-G

When PIM2 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(6)

BASEU

PB3

PIM2

PWR B

4P PWR CA-H

For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(7)

BASEU

PA4

PIM3

PWR A

4P PWR CA-I

When PIM3 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(8)

BASEU

PB4

PIM3

PWR B

4P PWR CA-J

For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in IMG3
of LNn

PIM0
(PWR)
PIM0
(PWR)
PIM1
(PWR)

-48V IN
CONN
-48V IN
CONN
-48V IN
CONN

PIM0

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

PIM0

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

For dual configuration
When IMG3 exists in LNn

PIM1

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

When PIM1 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(12)

PIM1
(PWR)

-48V IN
CONN

PIM1

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(13)

PIM2
(PWR)

-48V IN
CONN

PIM2

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

When PIM2 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(14)

PIM2
(PWR)

-48V IN
CONN

PIM2

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(15)

PIM3
(PWR)

-48V IN
CONN

PIM3

-48V0

3P PWR CA-A

When PIM3 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(16)

PIM3
(PWR)

-48V IN
CONN

PIM3

-48V1

3P PWR CA-B

For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in IMG3
of LNn

(9)
(10)
(11)

NDA-24306

When IMG3 exists in LNn

CHAPTER 3
Page 129
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 26/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Run the internal bus cables for ISW and each IMG of LN, referring to Figures 010-13 through 010-17.
Connect the internal bus cables for ISW as shown in the figure below. Note that the dotted lines indicate bus
cables for a dual-system.

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

(10)

(9)

(5)

KEY

TOPU

PZ-DK223

PZ-DK227

DSPL

TOPU

11 10 09

TIORES1

IOP1 IORES0

ISWM

IOP0 IORES1

19

02
(3)

TIORES0

ISWM

(4)
EMAFH

ALMA

00

04

00

06
CPU 1

PZ-GT13

PALM

MISC0B

(8)

PZ-PW92

M T
CN
CN

DSP

BASEU

CPU 0

M T
CN
CN

ALM

LPM

06
PZ-GT13

KEY

(11)

PZ-PW92
PALM

ALM1
EXALM

(1)

BUS0

PALM1 BUS1

MUSIC

PALM0

LPM

KEY

(2)

BASEU

(6)

(7)

Figure 010-13 Internal Bus Cable Connection for ISW

CHAPTER 3
Page 130
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 27/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-6 Internal Bus Cable Connection for ISW
TO

FROM

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

(1)
(2)

LPM
LPM

PALM
PALM

LPM
LPM

10AL-(110) FLT CA
10AL-(130) FLT CA

For dual configuration

(3)

LPM

KEY

TOPU

(4)

LPM

ALM1

ISWM

(5)

LPM

DSP

TOPU

PALM0
PALM1
KEY
(PZ-DK227)
ALMA
DSPL
(PZ-DK223)

CN-M

LPM

BUS0

EXGT BUS CA-A

CN-M

LPM

BUS1

EXGT BUS CA-A

MUSIC

ISWM

16PH STD CA-A

CN-T

ISWM

CN-T

ISWM

MISC0B/KEY

LPM

EMAFH
IOP0
(slot 11)
IOP1
(slot 10)
EXALM

(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)

LPM
(ISAGT0)
LPM
(ISAGT1)
LPM
LPM
(ISAGT0)
LPM
(ISAGT1)
LPM

NDA-24306

10AL-(400) FLT CA
16PH ALM CA-A
20AL-(270) FLT CA

For dual configuration

34PH 50AL CA-A
34PH 50AL CA-A

For dual configuration

68PH KEY CA

CHAPTER 3
Page 131
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 28/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the internal bus cables for IMG0 of all the LN as shown below. Note that the dotted line indicates the
bus cable for a dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONTVIEW

TOPU

KEY

PZ-DK222

PZ-DK223

TOPU

DSPL

PIM3

PIM3
(9)

ALMA
ALMB

(8)

PIM2

PIM2
ALMA

FANU

FANU
ALMB

(7)
PIM1

PIM1
ALMA

(6)

ALMB

PIM0

PIM0

ALMA

CN
CN
CN

BASEU

MT
CN
CN
CN

KEY

(2)
(4)

(3)
(1)

Figure 010-14 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG0
CHAPTER 3
Page 132
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

LPM

PZ-PC13

FAN

PZ-PC20

PZ-PC19 CN

KEY

ALM

MT

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

EXALM
DSP

PZ-PC13

BUS0

BUS1

(5)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06
PZ-PC20

MISC0B

LPM

00

PZ-PC19 CN

00

PH-M22(MMC)

04

BASEU

NAP-200-010
Sheet 29/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-7 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG0
TO
No.

(1)
(2)

UNIT/
MODULE

LPM
(ISAGT0)
LPM
(ISAGT1)

FROM

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

CN-M

LPM

BUS0

EXGT BUS CA-A

For LN0/1 and if LN2/3
exist

CN-M

LPM

BUS1

EXGT BUS CA-A

(3)

MMC

KEY

TOPU

KEY

10AL-(400) FLT CA

(4)

LPM

MISC0B/KEY

LPM

EXALM

68PH KEY CA

(5)

LPM

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

(6)

PIM0

ALMB

PIM1

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

(7)

PIM1

ALMB

PIM2

ALMA

20AL-(20) FLT CA

(8)

PIM2

ALMB

PIM3

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

(9)

LPM

DSP

TOPU

DSPL
(PZ-DK223)

20AL-(270) FLT CA

NDA-24306

For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3
exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3
exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3
exist
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3
exist
When PIM1 exists in
IMG0 of LNn
When PIM2 exists in
IMG0 of LNn
When PIM3 exists in
IMG0 of LNn

CHAPTER 3
Page 133
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 30/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the internal bus cables for IMG1 of each LN as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate bus
cables for a dual-system.
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW

DSPM

TOPU

TOPU
13 14

PIM 3

PIM 3
MUX

MUX

ALMA
ALMB

13 14

(12)

PIM 2

PIM 2

(8)
MUX

MUX

(9)
ALMA

FANU

FANU

(11)
13 14

ALMB

PIM 1

PIM 1

(6)

MUX

MUX

(7)

ALMA
ALMB

13 14

(10)

PIM 0

PIM 0

(5)

MUX

MUX

(4)
ALMA

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
(TSW 11)

MUX 111

MUX 011
MUX 010

MUX 110

(3)

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 012

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 013

MUX 112

TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)
TSW(PH-SW12)

TSWM0

TSW(PH-SW12)

MUX 113

(TSW 01)

TSWM0

00 01 02 03 10 11 12 13

(2)
ALM

BASEU

BASEU

(1)

Figure 010-15 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1
CHAPTER 3
Page 134
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 31/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-8 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG1
TO

FROM

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

(1)

TSWM0

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

For LN0/1 and if LN2/3
exist.

(2)

TSWM0

MUX010

PIM0

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

For LN0/1 and if LN2/3
exist.

(3)

TSWM0

MUX110

PIM0

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

For dual configuration
For LN0/1 and if LN2/3
exist.

(4)

TSWM0

MUX011

PIM1

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E

When PIM1 exists in
IMG1 of LNn

(5)

TSWM0

MUX111

PIM1

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E

For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG1 of LNn

(6)

TSWM0

MUX012

PIM2

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

When PIM2 exists in
IMG1 of LNn

(7)

TSWM0

MUX112

PIM2

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG1 of LNn

(8)

TSWM0

MUX013

PIM3

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

When PIM3 exists in
IMG1 of LNn

(9)

TSWM0

MUX113

PIM3

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG1 of LNn

(10)

PIM0

ALMB

PIM1

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

When PIM1 exists in
IMG1 of LNn

(11)

PIM1

ALMB

PIM2

ALMA

20AL-(20) FLT CA

When PIM2 exists in
IMG1 of LNn

(12)

PIM2

ALMB

PIM3

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

When PIM3 exists in
IMG1 of LNn

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 135
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 32/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the internal bus cables for IMG2 of all the LN as shown below. The dotted lines indicate bus cables for a
dual-system.
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

TOPU

TOPU
13 14

PIM3

MUX

MUX

PIM3
ALMA

13 14

ALMB

(12)
PIM2

PIM2

MUX

MUX

(8)
ALMA

FANU

FANU
13 14

ALMB

(11)
MUX

(7)

PIM1

MUX

PIM1
ALMA

13 14

ALMB

(10)

MUX

(6)

PIM0

MUX

PIM0
ALMA
(TSW10)
MUX103
MUX102

TSWM1

MUX101

(TSW00)
MUX003

(5)
(4)

MUX002

(3)

MUX001

TSWM1

(2)

MUX000
MUX100

(1)
ALM

BASEU

BASEU

(9)

Figure 010-16 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG2

CHAPTER 3
Page 136
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 33/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-9 Internal Bus Cables for IMG2
TO

FROM

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

(1)

TSWM1

MUX000

PIM0

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

When IMG2 exists in
LNn

(2)

TSWM1

MUX001

PIM1

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E

When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LNn

(3)

TSWM1

MUX002

PIM2

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LNn

(4)

TSWM1

MUX003

PIM3

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LNn

(5)

TSWM1

MUX100

PIM0

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D

When PIM0 exists in
IMG2 of LNn
For dual configuration

(6)

TSWM1

MUX101

PIM1

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E

When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LNn
For dual configuration

(7)

TSWM1

MUX102

PIM2

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LNn
For dual configuration

(8)

TSWM1

MUX103

PIM3

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LNn
For dual configuration

(9)

TSWM1

ALM

PIM0

ALMA

20AL-(60) FLT CA

When PIM0 exists in
IMG2 of LNn

(10)

PIM0

ALMB

PIM1

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LNn

(11)

PIM1

ALMB

PIM2

ALMA

20AL-(20) FLT CA

When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LNn

(12)

PIM2

ALMB

PIM3

ALMA

20AL-(10) FLT CA

When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LNn

CONNECTOR
NAME

NDA-24306

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

CHAPTER 3
Page 137
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 34/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the internal bus cables for IMG3 of all LN as shown below.
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW

DSPM

TOPU

TOPU
13 14

PIM 3

PIM 3
MUX

MUX

Note

ALMA
ALMB

20AL-(10)FLT CA

To IMG 2

13 14

PIM 2

PIM 2
MUX

MUX

Note

ALMA

FANU

20AL-(20)FLT CA

To IMG 2
FANU

13 14

ALMB

PIM 1

PIM 1
MUX

MUX

Note

To IMG 2

ALMA
ALMB

20AL-(10)FLT CA

13 14

PIM 0

PIM 0
MUX

MUX

Note

To IMG 2

ALMA

To IMG 0

Note
DUMMY

DUMMY

BASEU

Note:

BASEU

For these cable runnings, refer to Section 2: “Inter-frame Cable Connections.”
Figure 010-17 Internal Bus Cable Connection for IMG3

CHAPTER 3
Page 138
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 35/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

2. INTER-FRAME CABLE CONNECTION FOR LN
This section explains how to run the frame-to-frame cables for LN. Perform this procedure for all the LNs.
START
Confirm connector locations

Referring to Figure 010-4, Figure 010-5 and 010-7,
confirm the locations of the connectors into which
the cables are inserted.

Connection of inter-frame bus cables for
LN

Referring to Figure 010-18 through 010-25,
connect the inter-frame Bus cables.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 139
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 36/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame ISA bus cables as shown below. Note that the dotted line indicates the bus cable for
a dual system.
IMG 1

IMG 0

TOPU

TOPU

PZPW02 CPU1

(GT1) (GT0)
IOP0

IOP1

G
T
13

MT

(2)

TSWM0

06

C C
N N

LPM

06
(1)

PZPW02 CPU0

G
T
13

MT
C C
N N

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 010-18 Inter-frame ISA Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
Table 010-10 Inter-frame ISA Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
FROM
No.

(1)
(2)

UNIT/
MODULE

LPM
(ISAGT0)
LPM
(ISAGT1)

CHAPTER 3
Page 140
Revision 1.0

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

CN-T

TSWM0

IOP0 (slot 11)

34PH 50AL CA-A

GT1

CN-T

TSWM0

IOP1 (slot 10)

34PH 50AL CA-A

GT0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 37/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG0 and IMG1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines indicate
bus cables for a dual-system.
IMG 0

TOPU
13 14

(7)
(8)

PIM 3
MUX

MUX

13 14

(5)

(6)
MUX

MUX

PIM 2

FANU
13 14

MUX

MUX

IMG 1

PIM 1

(4)
TOPU
(3)

13 14

(2)
MUX

MUX

PIM 0

(TSW10) (TSW00)
MUX103
MUX102

TSWM

BASEU

MUX003

(1)

MUX002

MUX101

MUX001

MUX100

MUX000

LPM

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

BASEU

Figure 010-19 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 141
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 38/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-11 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
TO

FROM

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

(1)

TSWM0

MUX000

(2)

TSWM0

MUX100

(3)

TSWM0

MUX001

(4)

TSWM0

MUX101

(5)

TSWM0

MUX002

(6)

TSWM0

MUX102

(7)

TSWM0

MUX003

(8)

TSWM0

MUX103

CHAPTER 3
Page 142
Revision 1.0

UNIT/
MODULE

PIM0
(IMG0)
PIM0
(IMG0)
PIM1
(IMG0)
PIM1
(IMG0)
PIM2
(IMG0)
PIM2
(IMG0)
PIM3
(IMG0)
PIM3
(IMG0)

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F
MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

For dual configuration

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E
MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E

For dual configuration

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H
MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

For dual configuration

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H
MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

NDA-24306

For dual configuration

NAP-200-010
Sheet 39/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

IMG 0

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cables between
IMG0 and IMG1 as shown below.

TOPU

PIM 3

PIM 2

IMG 1

FANU
TOPU

PZ-DK223

DSP

PIM 1

(1)

PIM 0

PIM 0

LED1

(3)

TSWM0

LPM

MUSIC
ALM1
EMAFH
EMA

(2)

Note
FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

Note:

Also to EMA connector in TSWM1 of IMG2.
Figure 010-20 Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 143
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 40/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-12 Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG1
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

(1)

LPM

LED1

(2)

LPM

ALM1

TOPU
(IMG1)
TSWM0

(3)

LPM

MUSIC

TSWM0

CHAPTER 3
Page 144
Revision 1.0

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

DSPM

16PH LED CA-A

EMA

SP ALM CA

EMAFH

16PH STD CA-F

NDA-24306

REMARKS

NAP-200-010
Sheet 41/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame ISA bus cables between IMG0 and IMG2 as shown below. Note that the dotted line indicates the bus cable for a dual system.

IMG2

IMG0
TOPU

TOPU

34PH 50AL CA-B

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

IOP0

IOP1

PZ-GT20

(GT1) (GT0)
CPU1

CN

TSWM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06
PZ-GT20

CPU0

LPM

CN

BASEU

BASEU
34PH 50AL CA-B
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 010-21 Inter-frame ISA Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG2

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 145
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 42/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame Alarm bus cables between IMG0 and IMG2 as shown below.
IMG2

IMG0

DSPM PZ-DK223

TOPU

TOPU

16PH LED CA-B

LED2

SP ALM CA

TSWM1

LPM
ALM2

EMA
Note

REAR VIEW

Note:

REAR VIEW

Also to EMA connector in TSWM0 of IMG1.
Figure 010-22 Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG2

CHAPTER 3
Page 146
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 43/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame Alarm bus cables between IMG0 and IMG3 of LN as shown below.

IMG0

IMG3

TOPU

DSPM PZ-DK223

TOPU

16PH LED CA-B
PIM0

ALMA

LED3

LPM

DUMMY
ALM3
16PH ALM CA-B

REAR VIEW

REAR VIEW

Figure 010-23 Inter-frame Alarm Bus Cable Connection for IMG0-IMG3

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 147
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 44/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG1 and IMG2 of LN as shown below. The dotted line indicates
the bus cable connection for a dual-system.
IMG2

IMG1

TOPU

TOPU

PLO-CLK CA-A

23

PLOCLK1

23

21

PLOCLK0

PLOCLK1

21

PLOCLK0

TSWM0

TSWM1
SP ALM CA
EMA

EMA

Note

REAR VIEW

REAR VIEW

Note:

Also to ALM2 connector in LPM of IMG0.
Figure 010-24 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG1-IMG2

CHAPTER 3
Page 148
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 45/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between IMG2 and IMG3 of LN as shown below. Note that the dotted lines
indicate the bus cable connection for a dual-system.
IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU
13 14

(8)

MUX

MUX

PIM3

PIM3

13 14

MUX

MUX

PIM2

PIM2

(7)
FANU

FANU
13 14

MUX

(6)

TSWM1

(TSW01)

MUX

(TSW11)

PIM1

13 14

MUX

PIM0

MUX

PIM1

PIM0

(5)

MUX113

MUX013

(4)

MUX112

MUX012

(3)

MUX111

MUX011

(2)

MUX110

MUX010

DUMMY

(1)

BASEU

BASEU
REAR VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Figure 010-25 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG2-IMG3
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 149
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 46/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-13 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for IMG2-IMG3
FROM

TO

No.

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

(1)

TSWM

MUX010

(2)

TSWM

MUX011

(3)

TSWM

MUX012

(4)

TSWM

MUX013

(5)

TSWM

MUX110

(6)

TSWM

MUX111

PIM1
(IMG3)

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

(7)

TSWM

MUX112

PIM2
(IMG3)

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

(8)

TSWM

MUX113

PIM3
(IMG3)

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

CHAPTER 3
Page 150
Revision 1.0

UNIT/
MODULE

PIM0
(IMG3)
PIM1
(IMG3)
PIM2
(IMG3)
PIM3
(IMG3)
PIM0
(IMG3)

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

When IMG3 exists in
LNn

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

When PIM1 exists in
IMG3 of LNn

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G

When PIM2 exists in
IMG3 of LNn

MUX (slot 13) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

When PIM3 exists in
IMG3 of LNn

MUX (slot 14) 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

NDA-24306

For dual configuration
When IMG3 exists in
LNn
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG3 of LNn
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG3 of LNn
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG3 of LNn

NAP-200-010
Sheet 47/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

3. PCM AND ALARM CABLE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN ISW AND EACH LN
This section explains how to run the frame-to-frame PCM and alarm bus cables between ISW and LN.
According to your system configuration, connect all the necessary cables as shown below:
START
Confirm connector locations

Referring to Figures 010-2 and 010-4, confirm the
locations of the connectors into which the cables are
inserted.

Connection of Inter-frame alarm bus
cables between ISW and LN

Referring to Figures 010-26 through 010-29, connect
the inter-frame alarm bus cables between ISW and
LN.

Connection of inter-frame PCM cables
between ISW and LN

Referring to Figures 010-30 through 010-37, connect
the inter-frame PCM cables between ISW and LN.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 151
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 48/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cable between ISW and IMG0 of LN0 as shown below.
LN0/IMG0
TOPU

ISW
TOPU

PIM0
ISWM

PH-M22(MMC)

00
PZ-PW92

00

PH-M22(MMC)

LPM

00

CPU0

00

CN0

CN0

PZ-PW92

CPU1

BASEU

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

MT24 MISC CA-C

FRONT VIEW

Figure 010-26 Inter-frame Cable Connection for ISW-LN0, IMG0

CHAPTER 3
Page 152
Revision 1.0

LPM

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 49/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cable between ISW and IMG0 of LN1 as shown below.
LN1/IMG0
TOPU

ISW
TOPU

ISWM

PIM0

CPU1

00

CN1

CN0

PZ-PW92

PH-M22 (MMC)

00
PZ-PW92

00

PH-M22 (MMC)

LPM

00

LPM

CPU0

BASEU

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

MT24 MISC CA-D

FRONT VIEW

Figure 010-27 Inter-frame Cable Connection for ISW-LN1, IMG0

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 153
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 50/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cable between ISW and IMG0 of LN2 as shown below.
LN2/IMG0
TOPU

ISW
TOPU

ISWM

PH-M22 (MMC)

00
PZ-PW92

00

PH-M22 (MMC)

LPM

00

CPU1

00
PZ-PW92

CN2

CN0

CPU0

BASEU

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

Note:

LPM

MT24 MISC CA-D

FRONT VIEW

This cable connection is required if LN2 exists in your system.
Figure 010-28 Inter-frame Cable Connection for ISW-LN2, IMG0

CHAPTER 3
Page 154
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 51/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame alarm bus cable between ISW and IMG0 of LN3 as shown below.
LN3/IMG0
TOPU

ISW
TOPU

PIM0
ISWM

00

00
PZ-PW92

PH-M22(MMC)

PH-M22(MMC)

LPM

CPU1

LPM
PZ-PW92

CN0

CN3

CPU0

BASEU

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

Note:

MT24 MISC CA-F

FRONT VIEW

This cable connection is required if LN3 exists in your system.
Figure 010-29 Inter-frame Cable Connection for ISW-LN3, IMG0
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 155
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 52/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between ISW and IMG1 of LN0 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines
indicate the bus cable connection for a dual-system.
LN0/IMG1
TOPU

(18)

ISW

(17)

14

19 18

15 14

MUX133

MUX033

TSW007

TSW106

TSW006

TSW105

TSW005

TSW104

TSW004

TSW103

TSW003

TSW102

TSW002

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSW100

MUX131

MUX031

CLK00

LPM

MUX030

MUX120

MUX020

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

REAR VIEW

Figure 010-30 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN0, IMG1
CHAPTER 3
Page 156
Revision 1.0

TSW000

(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

MUX021

MUX121
MUX130

ISWM

TSW001
CLK10

(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)

MUX022

MUX122

TSWM0

TOPU

04

TSW107

MUX032

MUX132

08

TSW101

MUX023

MUX123

12

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 53/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-14 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN0, IMG1
FROM
No.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)

UNIT/
MODULE

ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 14)
ISWM
(slot 14)
ISWM
(slot 14)
ISWM
(slot 14)
ISWM
(slot 14)
ISWM
(slot 14)
ISWM
(slot 14)
ISWM
(slot 14)
ISWM
(slot 08)
ISWM
(slot 12)

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

TSW000
TSW001
TSW002
TSW003
TSW004
TSW005
TSW006
TSW007
TSW100
TSW101
TSW102
TSW103
TSW104
TSW105
TSW106
TSW107
CLK00
CLK10

UNIT/
MODULE

TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 21)
TSWM0
(slot 23)

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

MUX020

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX021

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX022

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX023

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX030

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX031

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX032

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX033

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX120

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX121

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX122

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX123

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX130

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX131

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX132

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

MUX133

ISW-LN TSW-CA-A

EXCLK0

ISW-LN PLO CA-A

EXCLK1

ISW-LN PLO CA-A

NDA-24306

REMARKS

For dual configuration
For dual configuration
For dual configuration
For dual configuration
For dual configuration
For dual configuration
For dual configuration

For dual configuration

For dual configuration

CHAPTER 3
Page 157
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 54/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between ISW and IMG2 of LN0 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines
indicate the bus cable connection for a dual-system.
LN0/IMG2
TOPU

ISW

14
TSW10F
TSW10E

TSW00F
TSW00E
TSW00D

TSW10D
TSW10C

TSW00C

TSW10B

19 18

TSW00B
TSW00A

TSW10A
TSW109

15 14

TSW108

MUX023

MUX123
MUX132

MUX032

MUX031

MUX131

MUX021

MUX121
MUX130

(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)

MUX022

MUX122

LPM

MUX030

MUX120

MUX020

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

REAR VIEW

Figure 010-31 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN0, IMG2
CHAPTER 3
Page 158
Revision 1.0

ISWM

TSW009
TSW008

MUX033

MUX133

TSWM1

TOPU

04

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 55/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-15 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN0, IMG2
FROM
No.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

UNIT/
MODULE

ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 04)
ISWM
(slot 14)

CONNECTOR
NAME

TSW008
TSW009
TSW00A
TSW00B
TSW00C
TSW00D
TSW00E
TSW00F
TSW108

TO
UNIT/
MODULE

TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 18)

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

MUX020

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

When IMG2 exists in
LN0

MUX021

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LN0

MUX022

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LN0

MUX023

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LN0

MUX030

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

When IMG3 exists in
LN0

MUX031

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

When PIM1 exists in
IMG3 of LN0

MUX032

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

When PIM2 exists in
IMG3 of LN0

MUX033

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

When PIM3 exists in
IMG3 of LN0

MUX120

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

(10)

ISWM
(slot 14)

TSW109

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX121

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

(11)

ISWM
(slot 14)

TSW10A

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX122

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

(12)

ISWM
(slot 14)

TSW10B

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX123

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

(13)

ISWM
(slot 14)

TSW10C

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX130

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

(14)

ISWM
(slot 14)

TSW10D

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX131

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

(15)

ISWM
(slot 14)

TSW10E

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX132

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

(16)

ISWM
(slot 14)

TSW10F

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX133

ISW-LN TSW-CA-B

NDA-24306

REMARKS

When IMG2 exists in
LN0
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LN0
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LN0
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LN0
For dual configuration
When IMG3 exists in
LN0
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG3 of LN0
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG3 of LN0
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG3 of LN0
For dual configuration

CHAPTER 3
Page 159
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 56/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between ISW and IMG1 of LN1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines
indicate the bus cable connection for a dual-system.
LN1/IMG1
TOPU

(18)

ISW

(17)
15

19 18
MUX133

15 14
MUX033

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

MUX023

MUX123

12

08

TSW117
TSW116
TSW115
TSW114

TSW017
TSW016
TSW015
TSW014

TSW113
TSW112
TSW111
TSW110

TSW013
TSW012
TSW011
TSW010

CLK11 CLK01

MUX032

MUX132

MUX031

MUX131

TSWM0
MUX021

MUX121
MUX130

MUX030

MUX120

MUX020

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

REAR VIEW

Figure 010-32 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN1, IMG1
CHAPTER 3
Page 160
Revision 1.0

ISWM

(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2) LPM
(1)

(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)

MUX022

MUX122

TOPU

05

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 57/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-16 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN1, IMG1
FROM
No.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)

UNIT/
MODULE

ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 15)
ISWM
(slot 15)
ISWM
(slot 15)
ISWM
(slot 15)
ISWM
(slot 15)
ISWM
(slot 15)
ISWM
(slot 15)
ISWM
(slot 15)
ISWM
(slot 08)
ISWM
(slot 12)

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

TSW010
TSW011
TSW012
TSW013
TSW014
TSW015
TSW016
TSW017
TSW110
TSW111
TSW112
TSW113
TSW114
TSW115
TSW116
TSW117
CLK01
CLK11

UNIT/
MODULE

TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 21)
TSWM0
(slot 23)

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

MUX020

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX021

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX022

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX023

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX030

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX031

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

When PIM1 exists in
IMG1 of LN1

MUX032

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

When PIM2 exists in
IMG1 of LN1

MUX033

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

When PIM3 exists in
IMG1 of LN1

MUX120

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX121

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX122

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX123

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX130

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX131

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX132

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

MUX133

ISW-LN TSW-CA-G

EXCLK0

ISW-LN PLO CA-D

EXCLK1

ISW-LN PLO CA-D

NDA-24306

REMARKS

For dual configuration
For dual configuration
For dual configuration
For dual configuration
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG1 of LN1
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG1 of LN1
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG1 of LN1
For dual configuration

For dual configuration

CHAPTER 3
Page 161
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 58/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between ISW and IMG2 of LN1 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines
indicate the bus cable connection for a dual-system.
LN1/IMG2
TOPU

ISW
TOPU
15

19 18

15 14

MUX133

05
TSW11F
TSW11E
TSW11D
TSW11C

TSW01F
TSW01E
TSW01D
TSW01C

TSW11B
TSW11A
TSW119
TSW118

TSW01B
TSW01A
TSW019
TSW018

ISWM

MUX033
MUX023

MUX123
MUX132

MUX032

(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)

MUX022

MUX122
MUX131

MUX031

SWM1

(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

MUX021

MUX121
MUX130

(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)

LPM

MUX030

MUX120

MUX020

BASEU

REAR VIEW

(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

REAR VIEW

Figure 010-33 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN1, IMG2

CHAPTER 3
Page 162
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 59/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-17 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN1, IMG2
FROM
No.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

UNIT/
MODULE

ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 05)
ISWM
(slot 15)

CONNECTOR
NAME

TSW018
TSW019
TSW01A
TSW01B
TSW01C
TSW01D
TSW01E
TSW01F
TSW118

TO
UNIT/
MODULE

TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 18)

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

MUX020

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When IMG2 exists in
LN1

MUX021

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LN1

MUX022

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LN1

MUX023

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LN1

MUX030

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When IMG3 exists in
LN1

MUX031

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM1 exists in
IMG3 of LN1

MUX032

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM2 exists in
IMG3 of LN1

MUX033

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM3 exists in
IMG3 of LN1

MUX120

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(10)

ISWM
(slot 15)

TSW119

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX121

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(11)

ISWM
(slot 15)

TSW11A

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX122

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(12)

ISWM
(slot 15)

TSW11B

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX123

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(13)

ISWM
(slot 15)

TSW11C

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX130

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(14)

ISWM
(slot 15)

TSW11D

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX131

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(15)

ISWM
(slot 15)

TSW11E

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX132

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(16)

ISWM
(slot 15)

TSW11F

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX133

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

NDA-24306

REMARKS

When IMG2 exists in
LN1
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LN1
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LN1
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LN1
For dual configuration
When IMG3 exists in
LN1
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG3 of LN1
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG3 of LN1
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG3 of LN1
For dual configuration

CHAPTER 3
Page 163
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 60/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between ISW and IMG1 of LN2 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines
indicate the bus cable connection for a dual-system.
LN2/IMG1
TOPU

(17)

ISW

(18)

TOPU

16

19 18

EXCLK1

EXCLK0

TSW123
TSW122
TSW121
TSW120

MUX033
MUX023

MUX123

08

TSW127
TSW126
TSW125
TSW124

15 14

MUX133

12

TSW027
TSW026
TSW025
TSW024
CLK12 CLK02

MUX032

MUX132

(11)

MUX022

MUX122

(10)

MUX031

(9)

TSWM0
MUX021

MUX121
MUX130

ISWM

TSW023
TSW022
TSW021
TSW020
(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

(12)

MUX131

06

LPM

MUX030

MUX120

MUX020

BASEU

REAR VIEW

(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

REAR VIEW

Figure 010-34 Inter-Frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN2, IMG1
CHAPTER 3
Page 164
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 61/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-18 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN2, IMG1
FROM
No.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)

UNIT/
MODULE

ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 16)
ISWM
(slot 16)
ISWM
(slot 16)
ISWM
(slot 16)
ISWM
(slot 16)
ISWM
(slot 16)
ISWM
(slot 16)
ISWM
(slot 16)
ISWM
(slot 08)
ISWM
(slot 12)

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

TSW020
TSW021
TSW022
TSW023
TSW024
TSW025
TSW026
TSW027
TSW120
TSW121
TSW122
TSW123
TSW124
TSW125
TSW126
TSW127
CLK02
CLK12

UNIT/
MODULE

TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 21)
TSWM0
(slot 23)

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

MUX020

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

MUX021

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

MUX022

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

MUX023

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

MUX030

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

MUX031

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM1 exists in
IMG1 of LN2

MUX032

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM2 exists in
IMG1 of LN2

MUX033

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM3 exists in
IMG1 of LN2

MUX120

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When LN2 exists
For dual configuration

MUX121

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When LN2 exists
For dual configuration

MUX122

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When LN2 exists
For dual configuration

MUX123

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When LN2 exists
For dual configuration

MUX130

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When LN2 exists
For dual configuration

MUX131

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

MUX132

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

MUX133

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

EXCLK0

ISW-LN PLO CA-D

EXCLK1

ISW-LN PLO CA-D

NDA-24306

REMARKS
When LN2 exists
When LN2 exists
When LN2 exists
When LN2 exists
When LN2 exists

When PIM1 exists in
IMG1 of LN2
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG1 of LN2
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG1 of LN2
For dual configuration

For dual configuration

CHAPTER 3
Page 165
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 62/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between ISW and IMG2 of LN2 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines
indicate the cable connection for a dual-system.
LN2/IMG2
TOPU

ISW
16

19 18

15 14

MUX133

TSW12F
TSW12E
TSW12D
TSW12C

TSW02F
TSW02E
TSW02D
TSW02C

TSW12B
TSW12A
TSW129
TSW128

TSW02B
TSW02A
TSW029
TSW028

MUX023

MUX123
MUX032

MUX031

MUX021

MUX121
MUX130

(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)

MUX022

MUX122
MUX131

MUX030

MUX120

LPM

MUX020

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

REAR VIEW

Figure 010-35 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN2, IMG2
CHAPTER 3
Page 166
Revision 1.0

ISWM

MUX033

MUX132

TSWM1

TOPU

06

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 63/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-19 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN2, IMG2
FROM
No.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

UNIT/
MODULE

ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 06)
ISWM
(slot 16)

CONNECTOR
NAME

TSW028
TSW029
TSW02A
TSW02B
TSW02C
TSW02D
TSW02E
TSW02F
TSW128

TO
UNIT/
MODULE

TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 18)

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

MUX020

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When IMG2 exists in
LN2

MUX021

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LN2

MUX022

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LN2

MUX023

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LN2

MUX030

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When IMG3 exists in
LN2

MUX031

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM1 exists in
IMG3 of LN2

MUX032

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM2 exists in
IMG3 of LN2

MUX033

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

When PIM3 exists in
IMG3 of LN2

MUX120

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(10)

ISWM
(slot 16)

TSW129

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX121

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(11)

ISWM
(slot 16)

TSW12A

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX122

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(12)

ISWM
(slot 16)

TSW12B

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX123

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(13)

ISWM
(slot 16)

TSW12C

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX130

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(14)

ISWM
(slot 16)

TSW12D

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX131

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(15)

ISWM
(slot 16)

TSW12E

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX132

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

(16)

ISWM
(slot 16)

TSW12F

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX133

ISW-LN TSW-CA-H

NDA-24306

REMARKS

When IMG2 exists in
LN2
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LN2
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LN2
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LN2
For dual configuration
When IMG3 exists in
LN2
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG3 of LN2
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG3 of LN2
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG3 of LN2
For dual configuration

CHAPTER 3
Page 167
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 64/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between ISW and IMG1 of LN3 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines
indicate the bus cable connection for a dual-system.
LN3/IMG1
TOPU

ISW

(18)

(17)

19 18
MUX133

17

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

MUX023

MUX131

TSW037
TSW036
TSW035
TSW034
CLK13
CLK03

ISWM

TSW033
TSW032
TSW031
TSW030

MUX022

MUX121

(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)

MUX031

MUX130

MUX021

LPM

MUX030

MUX120

MUX020

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

REAR VIEW

Figure 010-36 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN3, IMG1
CHAPTER 3
Page 168
Revision 1.0

TOPU

07

MUX032

MUX122

TSWM0

TSW133
TSW132
TSW131
TSW130

MUX033

MUX123

08

TSW137
TSW136
TSW135
TSW134

15 14

MUX132

12

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 65/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-20 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN3, IMG1
FROM
No.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)

UNIT/
MODULE

ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 17)
ISWM
(slot 17)
ISWM
(slot 17)
ISWM
(slot 17)
ISWM
(slot 17)
ISWM
(slot 17)
ISWM
(slot 17)
ISWM
(slot 17)
ISWM
(slot 08)
ISWM
(slot 12)

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

TSW030
TSW031
TSW032
TSW033
TSW034
TSW035
TSW036
TSW037
TSW130
TSW131
TSW132
TSW133
TSW134
TSW135
TSW136
TSW137
CLK03
CLK13

UNIT/
MODULE

TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 14)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 15)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 18)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 19)
TSWM0
(slot 21)
TSWM0
(slot 23)

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

MUX020

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

MUX021

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

MUX022

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

MUX023

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

MUX030

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

MUX031

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

When PIM1 exists in
IMG1 of LN3

MUX032

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

When PIM2 exists in
IMG1 of LN3

MUX033

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

When PIM3 exists in
IMG1 of LN3

MUX120

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

When LN3 exists
For dual configuration

MUX121

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

When LN3 exists
For dual configuration

MUX122

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

When LN3 exists
For dual configuration

MUX123

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

When LN3 exists
For dual configuration

MUX130

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

When LN3 exists
For dual configuration

MUX131

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

MUX132

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

MUX133

ISW-LN TSW-CA-I

EXCLK0

ISW-LN PLO CA-I

EXCLK1

ISW-LN PLO CA-I

NDA-24306

REMARKS
When LN3 exists
When LN3 exists
When LN3 exists
When LN3 exists
When LN3 exists

When PIM1 exists in
IMG1 of LN3
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG1 of LN3
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG1 of LN3
For dual configuration

For dual configuration

CHAPTER 3
Page 169
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 66/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the inter-frame bus cables between ISW and IMG2 of LN3 as shown below. Note that the dotted lines
indicate the bus cable connection for a dual-system.
LN3/IMG2
TOPU

ISW
TOPU
17

19 18

15 14

MUX133

TSW13F
TSW13E
TSW13D
TSW13C

TSW03F
TSW03E
TSW03D
TSW03C

TSW13B
TSW13A
TSW139
TSW138

TSW03B
TSW03A
TSW039
TSW038

MUX023

MUX123
MUX032

MUX031

MUX021

MUX121
MUX130

(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)

MUX022

MUX122
MUX131

LPM

MUX030

MUX120

MUX020

BASEU

BASEU

REAR VIEW

(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

REAR VIEW

Figure 010-37 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN3, IMG2
CHAPTER 3
Page 170
Revision 1.0

ISWM

MUX033

MUX132

TSWM1

07

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 67/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-21 Inter-frame Bus Cable Connection for ISW-LN3, IMG2
FROM
No.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

UNIT/
MODULE

ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 07)
ISWM
(slot 17)

CONNECTOR
NAME

TSW038
TSW039
TSW03A
TSW03B
TSW03C
TSW03D
TSW03E
TSW03F
TSW138

TO
UNIT/
MODULE

TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 14)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 15)
TSWM1
(slot 18)

CONNECTOR
NAME

CABLE NAME

MUX020

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

When IMG2 exists in
LN3

MUX021

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LN3

MUX022

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LN3

MUX023

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LN3

MUX030

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

When IMG3 exists in
LN3

MUX031

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

When PIM1 exists in
IMG3 of LN3

MUX032

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

When PIM2 exists in
IMG3 of LN3

MUX033

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

When PIM3 exists in
IMG3 of LN3

MUX120

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

(10)

ISWM
(slot 17)

TSW139

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX121

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

(11)

ISWM
(slot 17)

TSW13A

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX122

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

(12)

ISWM
(slot 17)

TSW13B

TSWM1
(slot 18)

MUX123

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

(13)

ISWM
(slot 17)

TSW13C

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX130

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

(14)

ISWM
(slot 17)

TSW13D

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX131

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

(15)

ISWM
(slot 17)

TSW13E

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX132

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

(16)

ISWM
(slot 17)

TSW13F

TSWM1
(slot 19)

MUX133

ISW-LN TSW-CA-J

NDA-24306

REMARKS

When IMG2 exists in
LN3
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG2 of LN3
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG2 of LN3
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG2 of LN3
For dual configuration
When IMG3 exists in
LN3
For dual configuration
When PIM1 exists in
IMG3 of LN3
For dual configuration
When PIM2 exists in
IMG3 of LN3
For dual configuration
When PIM3 exists in
IMG3 of LN3
For dual configuration

CHAPTER 3
Page 171
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 68/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

4. ETHER CABLE CONNECTIONS
This section covers how to connect the Ether (10 BASE-T) cables to each LN and ISW. Because the terminal
HUB (PA-M96) card (maximum 8 ports per card) can be mounted wherever in a PIM of any LNs (LN0-LN3),
use the required number of HUB card(s), then perform unique Ether connection depending on your system configuration.
The flowchart below provides a summary of procedures using two examples:
•

Figure 010-38 for basic Ether connection

•

Figure 010-39 for secondary Ether connection (option) Note

Note:

Secondary Ether connection is available when your system uses dual LANIs for each CPR (i.e. second
LANI cards are accommodated in PCI Slot 03 of all the CPR in ISW and each LN.)


START
Connection of Basic 10 BASE-T
cables (straight)
* Example: Figure 010-38

Using the following cables, connect the LANI (PZPC19) cards in PCI slot 00 of ISW/each LN and the
relevant HUB (PA-M96) card(s).
• When LANI and HUB cards are in the same IMG:
“UTP CTG5 ST CA-O” Note
• When LANI and HUB cards are in different IMGs
in the same LN: “UTP CTG5 ST CA-X”
• When LANI and HUB cards are in different LNs:
“UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0”
Note:

A

CHAPTER 3
Page 172
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

When connecting the LANI of ISW to the HUB
card in PIM0 of IMG0, LN0, use “UTP CTG5
CA-O” cable unconditionally.

NAP-200-010
Sheet 69/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Connection of 10 BASE-T cables
(cross)
* Example: Figure 010-38

If multiple HUB (PA-M96) cards are used in the step
above, cascade each HUB card via the following
physical cables:
• When HUB cards are cascaded within the same
PIM: “UTP CTG5 CRS CA-F”
• When HUB cards are cascaded within the same
IMG: “UTP CTG5 CRS CA-O”
• When HUB cards are cascaded across different
IMGs in the same LN: “UTP CTG5 CRS CA-X”
• When HUB cards are cascaded across different
LNs: “UTP CTG5 CRS CA-A0”

Connection of additional 10 BASE-T
cables (straight)
* Example: Figure 010-39

If your system uses second LANIs in PCI slot 03 of
each CPR, also connect the whole second LANIs by
using any of the following cables:
• When LANI (PZ-PC19) and HUB cards are in the
same IMG: “UTP CTG5 ST CA-O”
• When LANI and HUB cards are in different IMGs
in the same LN: “UTP CTG5 ST CA-X”
• When LANI and HUB cards are in the different
LNs: “UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0”

Connection of 10 BASE-T cables
(cross)
* Example: Figure 010-39

If multiple HUB (PA-M96) cards are used in the step
above, cascade each HUB card via the following
physical cables:
• When HUB cards are cascaded within the same
PIM: “UTP CTG5 CRS CA-F”
• When HUB cards are cascaded within the same
IMG: “UTP CTG5 CRS CA-O”
• When HUB cards are cascaded across different
IMGs in the same LN: “UTP CTG5 CRS CA-X”
• When HUB cards are cascaded across different
LNs: “UTP CTG5 CRS CA-A0”

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 173
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 70/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

This figure shows an example where each LANI (PZ-PC19) card (PCI slot 00) in ISW/LN is connected to the two
HUB (PA-M96) cards (HUB0/HUB1) in PIM0 of IMG0, LN0.
LN1

LN2

LPM TSWM0 TSWM1

LPM TSWM0 TSWM1

PZ-PC19

00

PWR CPU1

LN3

PZ-PC19

LPM TSWM0 TSWM1

PWR

CPU1

PWR

CPU1

CN

CN
CPU0

CPU0

00

00

CN

CN

CN

PWR

PWR

LPM

00

PZ-PC19

CN

00

CPU0
PWR

00

LPM

LPM

Cable (1-10): 10 BASE-T straight
Cable (11) : 10 BASE-T cross
: 10 BASE-T connector

(10)

CN

TOPU

(9)
(8)
HUB1

HUB0

CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN

(3)

CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN

(7)

(5)

(11)
(6)

PIM0

(2)

00

CN

CPU0

LPM

BASEU

CN

PWR

(1)

00

CPU0

00

(4)

PZ-PC19 CN

00

CPU1

PZ-PW92

PWR

PZ-PC19 CN

PZ-PW92

PZ-PC19

CPU1

LPM
IMG0

ISW
ISWM

PIM0

LPM

Note:

LN0

FRONT VIEW

LPM TSWM0TSWM1

HUB (PA-M96) card can be mounted in any universal slot (slot 04 - 12, 15 - 23) of a PIM.
Figure 010-38 Ether Cable Connection for ISW and LN (Example)

CHAPTER 3
Page 174
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 71/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-22 Ether Cable Connections (Example)
FROM
No.

UNIT/
MODULE

(1)

LPM (LN0)

(2)

LPM (LN0)

(3)

LPM (ISW)

(4)

LPM (ISW)

(5)

LPM (LN1)

(6)

LPM (LN1)

(7)

TO
CABLE NAME

REMARKS

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU0)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU1)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU0)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU1)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU0)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU1)

PIM0
(LN0, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN0, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN0, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN0, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN0, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN0, IMG0)

TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB0)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB1)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB0)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB1)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB0)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB1)

LPM (LN2)

CN
PIM0
(PZ-PC19, CPU0) (LN0, IMG0)

TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB0)

UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0

When LN2 exists in
your
system

(8)

LPM (LN2)

CN
PIM0
(PZ-PC19, CPU1) (LN0, IMG0)

TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB1)

UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0

For dual configuration
When LN2 exists in
your system

(9)

LPM (LN3)

CN
PIM0
(PZ-PC19, CPU0) (LN0, IMG0)

TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB0)

UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0

When LN3 exists in
your system

(10)

LPM (LN3)

CN
PIM0
(PZ-PC19, CPU1) (LN0, IMG0)

TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB1)

UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0

For dual configuration
When LN3 exists in
your system

(11)

PIM0
(LN0, IMG0)

TPn-X
PIM0
(PA-M96, HUB0) (LN0, IMG0)

TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB1)

UTP CTG5 CRS CA-F

Note:

UTP CTG5 ST CA-O
UTP CTG5 ST CA-O

For dual configuration

UTP CTG5 ST CA-O
UTP CTG5 ST CA-O

For dual configuration

UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0
UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0

For dual configuration

This table is only an example when the Ether cable connection is provided as shown in Figure 010-38. Actual cables to be used may differ, depending on your system configuration. See details in the flowchart on
the previous page (Sheet 70/73 and 71/73 in this NAP).

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 175
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-010
Sheet 72/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

If your system uses dual LANIs for each CPR, also connect the whole second LANIs (PCI slot 03) to another set
of HUB (PA-M96) card(s) in addition to the first LANIs (connected in Figure 010-38). In this example, the second
LANIs are connected to HUB2/HUB3/ in PIM0 of IMG0, LN2/
LN0

LN1

ISW
ISWM
LPM

LPM

PWR

CPU1

LPM

TSWM0 TSWM1

03

PWR

CPU1

03

PWR

03

CPU0

03

CPU0

03

PWR

CN

CN

CN

PWR

LPM

03
CN

CN

CN
CPU0
PWR

CPU1

PZ-PC19

PZ-PC19

PZ-PC19

TSWM0 TSWM1

LPM

LPM

(8)

(7)

TOPU

(6)

(5)
HUB3

HUB2

CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN

CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN

(3)

(11)

PIM0
(10)
(4)

(9)

00

CPU1

PZ-PC19 CN

PZ-PW92

(1)

03

03

CN

LPM
IMG0

PIM0
LPM

TSWM0 TSWM1

LN2

Note:

CPU0

CN

FRONT VIEW

03

PWR

BASEU
Cable (1-10): 10 BASE-T straight
Cable (11) : 10 BASE-T cross
: 10 BASE-T connector

CPU1

PZ-PC19

(2)

PZ-PC19 CN

PZ-PW92

CPU0

PWR

LPM

LPM

TSWM0 TSWM1

LN3

PA-M96 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot (Slot No. 04-12, 15-23) of a PIM.
Figure 010-39 Additional Ether Cable Connection When Second LANIs Are Used (Example)

CHAPTER 3
Page 176
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-010
Sheet 73/73
Cable Connections

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 010-23 Ether Cable Connections for Second LANI (Example)
FROM
No.

UNIT/
MODULE

(1)

LPM (LN2)

(2)

LPM (LN2)

(3)

LPM (ISW)

(4)

LPM (ISW)

(5)

LPM (LN0)

(6)

LPM (LN0)

(7)

LPM (LN1)

(8)

LPM (LN1)

(9)

LPM (LN3)

(10)

LPM (LN3)

(11)
Note:

TO

CONNECTOR
NAME

UNIT/
MODULE

CONNECTOR
NAME

CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU0)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU1)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU0)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU1)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU0)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU1)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU0)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU1)
CN
(PZ-PC19, CPU0)

PIM0
(LN2, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN2, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN2, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN2, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN2, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN2, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN2, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN2, IMG0)
PIM0
(LN2, IMG0)

TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB2)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB3)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB2)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB3)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB2)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB3)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB2)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB3)
TPn-X
(PA-M96, HUB2)

CABLE NAME

REMARKS

UTP CTG5 ST CA-O
UTP CTG5 ST CA-O

For dual configuration

UTP CTG5 ST CA-O
UTP CTG5 ST CA-O

For dual configuration

UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0
UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0

For dual configuration

UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0
UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0

For dual configuration

UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0

When LN3 exists in
your system

CN
PIM0
TPn-X
(PZ-PC19, CPU1) (LN2, IMG0) (PA-M96, HUB3)

UTP CTG5 ST CA-A0

For dual configuration
When LN3 exists in
your system

PIM0
TPn-X
PIM0
TPn-X
(LN2, IMG0) (PA-M96, HUB2) (LN2, IMG0) (PA-M96, HUB3)

UTP CTG5 CRS CA-F

This table is only an example when the Ether cable connection is provided as shown in Figure 010-39.
Actual cables to be used may differ, depending on your system configuration. See details in the flowchart
on the previous page (Sheet 70/73 and 71/73 in this NAP).

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 177
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-011
Sheet 1/1
Front Cable Connections between Circuit
Cards

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

This NAP describes front cable connections between circuit cards.
Note:

Protection against static electricity:
A Portable Field Service Grounding Kit must be used to protect system components from static discharge.

START
When CCH/DCH and DTI cards are mounted in PIM (For CCIS/ISDN), connect the front cable between
CCH/DCH and DTI cards by referring to Figure 011-1
END

CCH
/DCH

DTI

TRK
CN2

DCH/CCH

Connecting Cable Specification
Cable Name : 10AL-(10)FLT CA
: NR-510247-001
Desig. No.
: White
Color Label
: 10/4 (cm/inch)
Length

(PIM)

FRONT VIEW

Figure 011-1 Front Cable Connections between Circuit Cards for CCIS/ISDN

CHAPTER 3
Page 178
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-012
Sheet 1/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

This NAP explains the following work items:
•

Cable Running from the PBX to the MDF and ATTCON (Desk Console)

•

Cable Running from the PBX to the MAT and SMDR

•

Connections at the PBX Side

•

Cable Tying at the Equipment Frame

Note:

Compliance with EMI
To comply with EMI, Shielded cables with CHAMP connector should be used for the following installation
cables:
• Cable from the PBX to the MDF
• Cable from the PBX to Attendant Console
• Cable from the PBX to alarm indicating equipment
• Cable from the PBX to the external music-on-hold source
• Cable for line test (connected to TEST connection)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 179
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-012
Sheet 2/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

1. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MDF AND ATTCON

START
Cables (25P) for LT Connectors

At the PBX side, verify the names of the connectors on
the PIM backplane, then bring each LT cable up to the
corresponding connector position.

Cables for Desk Console Connectors

Referring to Figures 015-1 through 015-13 in NAP200-015, run the installation cables for the Desk
Console to the relevant connector positions.

Cables (25P) for MISC0A Connector
(ISW)

At the PBX side, confirm the name of the connectors on
the LPM backplane, then bring the 68PH EXMISC CA
and installation cable up to the connector position.

Cables (25P) for NCU Connectors

At the PBX side, bring each NCU cable up to the
connector on the front of the PFT cards to be mounted
in the PIM. Refer to Figure 014-4.
At the MDF side, confirm the location of the Terminal
Block to which the cable is to be terminated, then bring
the cable up to the terminal block.

A

CHAPTER 3
Page 180
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-012
Sheet 3/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

A
Cables for ODT Connectors

Referring to description of 8TLT card in Circuit Card
Manual, connect each 2400 ODT CABLE/2400 ODT
CABLE-A and the corresponding installation cables.
At the PBX side, bring each 2400 ODT CABLE/2400
ODT CABLE-A up to the connector position on the front
of the 8TLT cards to be mounted in the PIM.
At the MDF side, confirm the location of the Terminal
Blocks to which each cable is to be terminated, then
bring the cables up to the terminal blocks.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 181
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-012
Sheet 4/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

(TOPU)

(PIM3)

(PIM2)

(FANU)

(PIM1)

(PIM0)

(LPM)

(BASEU)

REAR VIEW

Figure 012-1 LT Cable Routing
CHAPTER 3
Page 182
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-012
Sheet 5/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

Circuit Card
Front Connector
Cable Hole

Cable

Circuit Card
Up to three circuit card
front cables can be run
through the cable hole.

Cable Duct

SIDE VIEW

Six circuit card front
cables can be accommodated;
three on the left side, and
three on the right side.
FRONT VIEW

Figure 012-2 Cable Routing of Circuit Card Front Cable

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 183
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-012
Sheet 6/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

2. CABLE RUNNING FROM THE PBX TO THE MAT AND SMDR

START
MAT (Refer to NAP-200-016)

Referring to NAP-200-016, connect 68PH S 2 PORTS
CA-A and the installation cable (25P).
At the PBX side, confirm the connector name on the
LPM backplane, then run 68PH S 2 PORTS CA-A up to
the connector position.
At the MAT side, run RS-232-CA “0” up to the MAT.

SMDR (Refer to NAP-200-017)

Referring to NAP-200-017, connect the PBX and the
SMDR equipment.
At the PBX side, confirm the connector name on the
LPM backplane, then run 68PH S 2 PORTS CA-A up to
the connector position.
At the SMDR equipment side, run the installation cable
(25P) up to the SMDR equipment.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 184
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-012
Sheet 7/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

3. CONNECTIONS AT THE PBX SIDE

START
LT Connectors

Confirm each connector name on the backplane and the
corresponding LT connector, then connect the two.

MISC0A Connector

Connect the 68PH EXMISC CA cable to the MISC0A
rear connector on the LPM backplane.

NCU Connectors

Connect the NCU cable to the connector on the front of
the PFT card.

IOC Connectors

Connect 68 PH S 2PORTS CA-A to the MISC
connectors on the LPM backplane.

END
4. CABLE TYING AT THE PBX

START
Referring to Figure 012-3, secure the connector cables to the Module.
END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 185
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-012
Sheet 8/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

Backplane

LT6
PLO

LT3
LT2

LT1

LT5
LT4

LT0

TIE-WRAP

REAR SIDE

Figure 012-3 Example of Cable Tying Using Tie-Wrap
CHAPTER 3
Page 186
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-012
Sheet 9/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

5. TERMINATION OF THE CABLES BETWEEN THE PBX AND THE MDF OR ATTCON
ONTO THE CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

START
Remove of the Cable Support
Assembly.

Remove the Cable Support Assembly from the BASEU.
(See Figure 012-4.)

Peel the cable cover

Referring to Table 012-1, confirm the cable terminating
locations on the Cable Support Assembly.
Per the cable terminating locations, peel the cable cover
as shown on Figure 012-5.

Terminate the cable

Referring to Figure 012-5, wind the M-clamp onto the
cable portion from which the cover has been peeled off.
Referring to Figure 012-6, terminate the cable onto the
Cable Support Assembly.

When all the cables have been terminated to the Cable Support Assembly A, likewise terminate the
cables onto the Cable Support Assembly B, C, D, E in the order named.
END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 187
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-012
Sheet 10/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

(LPM, TSWM or APM)

(BASEU)

REAR VIEW

CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

A B C

FRONT

(LPM, TSWM or APM)

SIDE VIEW

Figure 012-4 Cable Support Assembly

CHAPTER 3
Page 188
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

D

NAP-200-012
Sheet 11/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

Table 012-1 Cable Support Assembly
BACKPLANE
MODULE

CONNECTOR NAME

MISCnA, MISCnB
LPM/
TSWM

MISC0A Note

CABLE
SUPPORT No.

A
A
A (Extra)

Front of Circuit Card
PIM0
LT0 - LT11

LT0 - LT11

B

B

LT cable

C

The number of cables is
limited to three for one
side, and six for both
sides.

C

LT cable

D

The number of cables is
limited to three for one
side, and six for both
sides.

D

LT cable

E

The number of cables is
limited to three for one
side, and six for both
sides.

E

LT cable

Front of Circuit Card
PIM2
LT0 - LT11
Front of Circuit Card
PIM3
LT0 - LT11
Note:

REMARKS

for I/O Equipment (MAT, Spare cable (15 cables) are
Printer, etc.)
to be used as Cable Support
Assembly extra cables.
for Alarm Indicating
The number of cables for the
Panel, etc.
whole system is limited to
Spare (15 cables)
maximum 100.
The number of cables is
limited to three for one
side, and six for both
sides.

Front of Circuit Card
PIM1

USE

If the required number of
cables exceeds 20, the Cable
Support Assembly extra
cables should be used.
If the required number of
cables exceeds 20, the Cable
Support Assembly extra
cables should be used.
If the required number of
cables exceeds 20, the Cable
Support Assembly extra
cables should be used.
If the required number of
cables exceeds 20, the Cable
Support Assembly extra
cables should be used.

For LPM only.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 189
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-012
Sheet 12/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

CLAMP (M-398902)

Approx.
18 mm (0.72 inch)

Shield cable

Figure 012-5 Clamp Winding

CHAPTER 3
Page 190
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-012
Sheet 13/13
Cable Running from the PBX to MDF,
ATTCON, MAT and SMDR

(FRONT)
CABLE

CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY

PANHEAD SCREW
(PL-C, P, B, MS 4X8X3 GF)
CABLE SUPPORT
ASSEMBLY

CLAMP

CABLE

Figure 012-6 Termination of Installation Cables

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 191
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-013
Sheet 1/1
Termination of Cables on MDF (Wire
Accommodation of Each Cable)

This NAP explains the procedures for terminating cables at the MDF.
CAUTION: When terminating Cables to the MDF, the line/trunk circuit card should extend about 50 mm (2 inches)

from the module, and must not contact the backplane connector.

START
Cable trying at the MDF

Secure the CHAMP Connector cables, which have been
extended to the MDF as per NAP-200-012, to the cable
supports on the MDF after confirming their positions on
the terminal block.

Cutting of excess cable

Shorten each CHAMP connector cable, leaving enough
length so that they can be neatly terminated to the
terminal block.

Cable termination to the MDF

Referring to Circuit Card Manual, punch down the
CHAMP connector cables to the MDF.

Confirmation of connections

After confirming that no erroneous connections have
been made on the Module Group side, use an IC buzzer
on similar device to verify the connections at the MDF.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 192
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-014
Sheet 1/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to
Peripheral Equipment, C. O. Lines, and
Tie Lines

This NAP explains the following work items:

MDF

Cross Connection of
Stations

C.O. Line/
Tie Line

Cross Connection of
Trunks (C.O. Lines and
Tie Lines)
Cross Connections
for PFT

Cross connection of Alarm
Indicating Panel and
Music on Hold

PBX

Page 195

Page 197

Page 199

Cross connections for
TAS indicator

Page 202

Cross connections for
External Switches

Page 205

Connection of
Announcement
Machine

NDA-24306

Page 194

Page 207

Connection of
Paging Equipment

Page 209

Cross connections for
Dterm Series E

Page 211

Cross Connections
for Digital Interfaces

Page 213

CHAPTER 3
Page 193
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 2/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

1. CROSS CONNECTION OF STATIONS
Note 1: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire.
It is recommended that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can
easily be distinguished.
Note 2: For cross connections between stations and C.O. lines for PFT, refer to Section 3. “CROSS CONNEC-

TIONS FOR PFT” in this NAP.

START
Check the terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and description
of 16LC card in Circuit Card Manual, identify the lead
names for the 16LC card and the terminal locations of
the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figure 014-1, provide the necessary cross
connections.

END

MDF
Module Group Side

AXX
16LC
CARD

TELEPHONE
SET
BXX

Figure 014-1 Cross Connection of Stations

CHAPTER 3
Page 194
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-014
Sheet 3/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

2. CROSS CONNECTION OF TRUNKS (C.O. LINES AND TIE LINES)
Note 1: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter

(24 AWG). 2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire.
It is recommended that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can
easily be distinguished.
Note 2: For cross connections between stations and C.O. lines for PFT, refer to Section 3. “CROSS CONNEC-

TIONS FOR PFT” in this NAP.

START
Check the terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and description
of 16COT card or 8TLT card in Circuit Card Manual,
identify the lead names for the 16COT, or 8TLT card
and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figure 014-2, provide the necessary cross
connections.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 195
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 4/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Module Group Side
(1) 16COT card
AX
16COT
CARD

C.O. LINE

BX

(2) 8TLT card (for DID Trunk)
AX
8TLT
CARD

TIE LINE

BX

(3) 8TLT card (for E&M Trunk)
TAX
RAX
EX
8TLT
CARD

MX

TIE LINE

TBX
RBX

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: For 2W/4W E&M systems, these leads are not used.
Note 2: For No. 4–7 trunks, the leads appear at the front of the card. Refer to the description of the 8TLT card

in the Circuit Card Manual.
Figure 014-2 Cross Connection of Trunks (C.O. Lines and Tie Lines)

CHAPTER 3
Page 196
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-014
Sheet 5/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

3. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR PFT
Note 1: The COT must be accommodated in a universal slot of the same Unit (U) in which the cross-connected PFT

is mounted. See the figure below.
Note 2: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

The PFT (PA-M53) card is mounted in slot 04 or in slot 15 of each PIM.
FRONT VIEW
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

PFT (PA-M53)

MUX
MUX

COT

PFT (PA-M53)

PIM

Universal Slots

Figure 014-3 Mounting Locations of PFT (PA-M53)

START
Check the terminal locations on
the Module Group side of the
MDF.

Referring to Section 1. “CROSS CONNECTION OF
STATIONS”., “CROSS CONNECTION OF STATIONS”
and Section 2. “CROSS CONNECTION OF TRUNKS
(C.O. LINES AND TIE LINES)” in this NAP, identify the
lead names of the stations and trunks to be connected to the
PFT (NCU) card and the terminal locations of the leads.
Referring to the description of PFT card in the “Circuit
Card Manual,” identify the lead names for the “NCU”
connector, “LT” connector, and the terminal locations of
the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figure 014-4, provide the necessary cross
connections.

END
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 197
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 6/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Installation Cable

PBX
MDF

MDF
LT

LT

AXX
BXX

AXX
LC

COT

BXX

Central
Office
Analog Telephone

NCU

PFT(PA-M53) Card

NCU

AOXX

ROXX

BOXX

TOXX

AIXX

RIXX

BIXX

TIXX


:

When PIM Power is OFF

:

When PIM Power is ON

Figure 014-4 Cross Connection for PFT

CHAPTER 3
Page 198
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-014
Sheet 7/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

4. CROSS CONNECTION OF ALARM INDICATING PANEL AND MUSIC ON HOLD
Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

Note:

•

Alarm Indicating Panel

START
Mounting of Alarm Indicating
panel

Mount the Alarm Indicating Panel by using AY plugs,
curl plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running

Referring to Figure 014-5, run the cables between the
Alarm Indicating Panel and the MDF.
Referring to Figure 014-5, run the cable between the RPT
on BASEU and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Terminate the installed cables to the Alarm Indicating
Panel, MDF, and RPT terminals.

Cross connection

Referring Figure 014-5, provide the necessary cross
connections at the Alarm Indicating Panel side and
Module Group side.

END
•

Music On Hold

START
Cross connection

Referring to Figure 014-6, run the cable between the
MDF and the music source.
Connect the music source to the FM0 and E connections.
Note:

FM1 is not used at this time.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 199
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 8/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Locations of Terminal and Connector
FRONT VIEW

LPR

BASEU

RPT Terminal (PZ-M377)
0 1 2 3 4

1 2 34 5
-48V
(RPT0)

TPWR
FALM

12 34 5
GND
(RPT1)

• General Cable Connection for Alarm Indicating Panel
ISW
MMC (PH-M22) : Slot No. 00

Installation
Cable

LPM
MISC0A
Connector

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL
ALARM INDICATING PANEL
MDF

MN

(BASEU)
REAR VIEW

01 02 03 04 05
-48V
(RPT0)

BELL
RPT Terminal on front
of the BASEU

01 02 03 04 05
G
(RPT1)

Figure 014-5 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel
CHAPTER 3
Page 200
Revision 1.0

MJ

NDA-24306

NAP-200-014
Sheet 9/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Cabling Diagram
68PH EXMISC CA cable
Pin Assignment

68PH EXMISC CA and
Installation cable
MDF

MISC0A

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

MPALM
EXTAA
BELAA
MNAA
SUPAA
MJAA

37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26

BELAA
MNAA
SUPAA
MJAA
BELBA

MJ/MN/BELL

MNBA

MNBA
SUPBA
MJBA

SUPBA
MJBA
RPT1(G)
RPT0(-48V)

Figure 014-5 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel (Continued)
ISW-LN PLO CA-A and
Installation Cable (25P)

• Cabling Diagram
ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable
Pin Assignment

(TSWM0 of LN)
EXCLK0/EXCLK1

PIN
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

LEAD PIN
NAME No.
26
E
E
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

22
23
24
25

MDF

LEAD
NAME
FM1
FM0

MUSIC
SOURCE
Note 1
Note 2

47
48
49
50

Note 1: FMI is not used at this time.
Note 2: Also perform multiple connections between No. 0 and No. 1 systems on the MDF here.
Figure 014-6 Connection of Music on Hold
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 201
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 10/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

5. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR TAS INDICATOR
Note:

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

START
Mounting of TAS Indicator

Mount the TAS Indicator by using AY plugs, curl plugs,
board plugs, etc.

Cable running

Referring to Figure 014-7, run the cables between the TAS
and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Terminate the installed cables to the TAS Indicator, and
MDF.

Check the terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and description
of ATI (PA-CS33) card in the “Circuit Card Manual,”
identify the lead names for the ATI card and the terminal
locations of the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figure 014-7, provide the necessary cross
connections at the TAS Indicator side and the PBX side.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 202
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-014
Sheet 11/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

The PA-CS33 card is used as the interface card to connect TAS. The card may be mounted in slot No. 12 or in
slot No. 23. The leads appear on LT5 and LT11 respectively.
Front View

• PA-CS33 (ATI) mounting slots

LT5

PA-CS33(ATI)

PIM

MUX
MUX

PA-CS33(ATI)

PA-CS33 (ATI) card may be mounted
in slots 12 and/or23.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

LT11

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

•

Backplane

LT cable connectors

Use LT5 connector when the PA-CS33
card is mounted in slot 12. When the
card is mounted in slot 23, use LT11
connector.

LT5

LT11

PIM

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

• LT cable Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on the LT
connector for PA-CS33 card.

PIN

LEAD

PIN

LEAD

No.

NAME

No.

NAME

26

1

27

2

32

7
8

33
34

BN4800

11 BN4821
12

38

TAS1B

13

39

BN4810

37

for TAS 0

BN4801

BN4820

36

for TAS 1

9
10

35

40

TAS0B

41

BN4830

42

16 BN4831
17
18

43
44

TAS1A
14 BN4811
15 TAS0A

B2

19

45

20

46

21

LT Connector

22

47
48

A2

B3

23

49

24

50

25

A3

Figure 014-7 Cable Connection Diagram for TAS

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 203
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 12/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

•

Cable Connection Diagram
Provide the following connections at the MDF.

PBX

MDF
LT connector Cable

Installation Cable (1P)

TAS0A0
TAS0B0

TAS Indicator

LT connector
TAS0A1
TAS0B1

Figure 014-7 Cable Connection Diagram for TAS (Continued)

CHAPTER 3
Page 204
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

TAS Indicator

NAP-200-014
Sheet 13/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

6. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR EXTERNAL SWITCHES
Note:

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

START
Mounting of External Switches

Mount the External Switches by using AY plugs, curl
plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running

Referring to Figure 014-9, run the cables between the
External Switches and the MDF.
Referring to Figure 014-9, run the cables between the
External Switches and RPT on the BASEU.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Terminate the installed cables to the External Switches,
and MDF.

Check the terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and description
of PFT (PA-M53) card in the “Circuit Card Manual,”
identify the lead names for the “LT” connector and the
terminal locations of the leads.

Cross connection

Referring to Figure 014-9, provide the necessary cross
connections at the External Switch side and the PBX side.

END
When the EFCT key is in the UP position, operations of K0-K7 are effective. To turn on a circuit, set the corresponding key (K0-K7) in the UP position.

EFCT K0

K1

K2 K3
K4 K5
K6 K7

Figure 014-8 Outer View of External Switch
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 205
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 14/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Provide cable connections at the MDF as shown below.
REAR VIEW

PIM Backplane

LT6

LPR
LT0

BASEU

MDF

G(RPT1)

2

External Switch No.0

2

External Switch No. 1

01 02 03 04 05

#1

#1

Pin Assignment 1
Pin Assignment 2

PIN LEAD PIN LEAD
No. NAME No. NAME
26
KY1
KY0
1
27
KY3
KY2
2
28
KY5
KY4
3
29
KY7
KY6
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

K0
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7

Figure 014-9 Connection of External Switches
CHAPTER 3
Page 206
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E

NAP-200-014
Sheet 15/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

7. CONNECTION OF ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE
Note:

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire.
It is recommended that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can
easily be distinguished.

START
Mounting of Announcement Machine

Mount the Announcement Machine by usingAY plugs,
curl plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running

Referring to Figure 014-10, run the cable between the
Announcement Machine and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Terminate the installed cables to the Announcement
Machine and MDF.

Check the terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and description
of 16COT card in Circuit Card Manual and Figure 014-9,
identify the lead names of the Announcement Trunk
(ANTK) and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross connections

Referring to Figure 014-10, provide the necessary cross
connections at the Announcement Machine side and the
PBX side.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 207
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 16/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Configuration of 16COT Lead
LEAD

LEAD

A

No. OF
CKT

B

A

A0

No.0

B0

A0

1

B1 (M)

A1

2

B2

A2

A3

3

B3

A3

A4

4

B4

A4

A5

5

B5

A5

No. OF
CKT

B

No.0

B0

1

B1

A1

2

B2

A2

3

B3

4

B4

5

B5

ANTK

Starting Wire
Speech Wires
When using 16COT-BE,
connect to ground

When No. 0 circuit is used for
Announcement Trunk.

When No. 0 circuit is used for COT.

Announcement Machine Cabling Diagram
MDF
TSW

SPEECH WIRES

ANNOUNCEMENT
MACHINE

ANTK (COT)

STARTING
WIRE
“LT” Connector Cable (25P)
already run in NAP-200-012.
Connections are made using installation cable.
A total of three wires are required per line: two wires
for speech and one starting wire.
For a loop start system, only two wires are required.

Note:

An ANTK circuit is available only on the No. 0 circuit of the 16COT card.
If a starting wire is required, the No. 1 circuit cannot be used for a COT.
Figure 014-10 Connection of Announcement Machine

CHAPTER 3
Page 208
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-014
Sheet 17/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

8. CONNECTION OF PAGING EQUIPMENT
Note:

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire.
It is recommended that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can
easily be distinguished.

START
Mounting of Paging Equipment

Mount the Paging Equipment by using AY plugs, curl
plugs, board plugs, etc.

Cable running

Referring to Figure 014-11, run the cables between the
Paging Equipment and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Terminate the installed cables to the Paging Equipment
and the MDF.

Check terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and description
of 16COT card in Circuit Card Manual and Figure 01411, identify the lead names for the Paging Trunk (PGT)
and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross connections

Referring to Figure 014-11, provide the necessary cross
connections at the Paging Equipment side and the PBX
side.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 209
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 18/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Configuration of 16COT Lead
LEAD

LEAD

No. OF
CKT

B

A

No. OF
CKT

B

A

No.0

B0

A0

No.0

B0

A0

1

B1

A1

1

B1 (M)

A1

2

B2

A2

2

B2

A2

3

B3

A3

3

B3

A3

4

B4

A4

4

B4

A4

5

B5

A5

5

B5

A5

ANTK

When No. 0 circuit is used for COT.

Starting Wire
Speech Wires
When using 16COT-BE,
connect to ground

When No. 0 circuit is used for PGT.

Paging Equipment Cabling Diagram
MDF
TSW

AMP

SPEECH WIRES
ANTK (COT)

STARTING
WIRE
“LT” Connector Cable (25P)
already run in NAP-200-012.
Connections are made using installation cable.
A total of three wires are required per line: two wires
for speech and one starting wire.
For a loop start system, only two wires are required.

Note:

A PGT circuit is available only on the No. 0 circuit of the 16COT card.
If a starting wire is required, the No. 1 circuit cannot be used for a COT.
Figure 014-11 Connection of Paging Equipment

CHAPTER 3
Page 210
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SP

NAP-200-014
Sheet 19/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

9. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR Dterm Series E
Note 1: Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5 mm diameter (24 AWG).

2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control wire. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.
Note 2: The maximum distance between the Module Group and Dterm is 850 meters (2459 feet). The installation

cable must be 24 AWG (0.5 mm dia.) or larger.

START
Cable running

Referring to Figure 014-13, run the cables between each
Dterm and its Modular Block (Jack), and between the
Modular Blocks and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Referring to Figure 014-13, terminate the installed cables
to the MDF and the Modular Blocks.

Check terminal locations on the
Module Group side of the MDF

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and description
of 16ELC card in “Circuit Card Manual,” identify the
lead names for the ELC card and the terminal locations of
the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figure 014-13, provide the necessary cross
connections at the Dterm side and the PBX side.

END

Figure 014-12 Outer View of Dterm Series E

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 211
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 20/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

Provide the following connections at the MDF.
PBX

MDF
LT connector Cable

A0

Dterm Series E
Modular Block

B0
ELC
(Jack)
LT connector

A15

1-pair cable
Modular Cable

B15

Maximum 850m (2459 feet)

Figure 014-13 Cable Connection for Dterm Series E

CHAPTER 3
Page 212
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-014
Sheet 21/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

10. CROSS CONNECTIONS FOR DIGITAL INTERFACES
To use digital interfaces, the system requires the Phase Lock Oscillator (master/slave), which is available on the
dedicated circuit card, PH-CK17-A/PH-CK16-A. According to Sections 10.1 and 10.2, perform necessary cross
connections at the MDF.
Note:

PH-CK17-A is available only in ISW, which is designated as the clock source office.

10.1 Cross Connections for Digital Interfaces (ISW)
Perform the following cross connections at the MDF, if the ISW uses PH-CK16-A as its PLO card, thus designating itself as the clock subordinate office:
Note:

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF by using copper wires of 0.5mm diameter (24 AWG).
2-core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control path. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

WARNING: When attempting the cross connections, be sure to keep the PLO card from the inside module connec-

tor. Otherwise, the fuse mounted on the DTI card will blow and the card will become inoperative.

START
Check terminal
locations on the Module
Group side of the MDF

Cross Connection
Note

Digital Trunk (DTI,
CCT, PRT)

Referring to the Port Accommodation
sheet and description of Digital Trunk card
in the “Circuit Card Manual,” identify the
lead names for the Digital Trunk card and
the terminal locations of the leads.

PLO leads

Referring to Figure 014-14, identify the
lead names and the terminal locations for
the PLO.

When accepting
synchronization clocks from
other node (master or
submaster node)

Referring to Figure 014-15, provide the
necessary cross connections.

When accepting
synchronization clocks from
External High-Stability
Oscillator

Referring to Figure 014-16, provide the
necessary cross connections.

END
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 213
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 22/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.

Front View
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

• PLO mounting slots

EXCLK1

EXCLK0

PLO card is mounted in slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.
ISWM

Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled “EXCLK0” and “EXCLK1”
on the ISWM backplane.

PLO

PLO

• LT cable connectors

Backplane
EXCLK0

EXCLK1

ISWM

• EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment
Pins are assigned as follows on “EXCLK0/EXCLK1” connector. When clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of “DIUxxx” leads among a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU leads have the following precedence:
DIU0xx(High)-> DIU3xx(Low). Contrarily, to receive clock from an external high-stability oscillator, use “DCSxx” leads.
Rear View

ISWM

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

EXCLK0
(Slot No.09)

EXCLK1
(Slot No.13)

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Installation Cable

E
E

DIU3A
DIU2A
DIU1A
DIU0A
DCSA
SYN1A
SYN0A

DIU3B
DIU2B
DIU1B
DIU0B
DCSB
SYN1B
SYN0B

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Figure 014-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW)
NDA-24306

FM1
FM0

MDF

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

CHAPTER 3
Page 214
Revision 1.0

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

NAP-200-014
Sheet 23/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

This figure shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This example also assumes that the
Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the 1st clock distribution route.

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

LN

LT Connector
MDF

Digital
Interface

ISW

PLO 0

Installation Cable

maximum 100
meters (330 feet)
(24AWG)

RA
RB
TA
TB
POUTA
POUTB

to other node

PCM Cable (2P)

PCM
Carrier
Equipment
DSU

Installation Cable

CLK
DIU0A0

EXCLK0

DIU0B0

Note 1

DIU1A0
PLO 1

DIU1B0

EXCLK1

DIU2A0
DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0
Installation Cable

DIU0A1
DIU0B1

Note 2

DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1

Note 1: PLO has a maximum four inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. Thus,

DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.
Figure 014-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Distributing Clock from Digital Interface

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 215
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 24/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

• Cable Connection Diagram
Provide the following wirings at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example where the system
has the PLO cards in a dual configuration.
maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24AWG)

MDF

PCM Cable (IP)

ISW

PLO 1

LT Connector Cable

External
High-Stability
Oscillator 1

DCSA
DCSB

CLK

EXCLK1

"EXCLK1"
PLO 0

LT Connector Cable

DCSB
DCSA

EXCLK0

PCM Cable (IP)
"EXCLK0"
BASEU

External
High-Stability
Oscillator 0
CLK

Note:

This diagram shows connections for a system having dual PLOs.
Figure 014-16 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Accepting Synchronization
Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator

CHAPTER 3
Page 216
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-014
Sheet 25/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

10.2 Cross Connections for Digital Interfaces (LN)
Usually, each LN accepts clock signals from PLO of ISW via the external ISW-LN PLO CA-n cables (See Figure “DCS Connections”). However, if the node requires a spare clock by an External High Stability Oscillator
for emergency, perform the following cross connections as well:
Note:

Provide the necessary cross connections at the MDF using copper wires of 0.5mm diameter (24AWG). 2core twisted wire is used for speech path, and single-core wire is used for control path. It is recommended
that wires of different colors be used for trunks, station lines, PFT, etc., so that they can easily be distinguished.

WARNING:When attempting the cross connections, be sure to keep the PLO card from the inside module connector.

Otherwise, the fuse mounted on the DTI card will blow and the card will become inoperative.

START
Check terminal locations
on the Module Group
side of the MDF

Digital Trunk
(DTI, CCT, PRT)

Referring to the Port Accommodation sheet
and description of Digital Trunk card in the
“Circuit Card Manual,” identify the lead
names for the Digital Trunk card and the
terminal locations of the leads.

PLO leads

Referring to Figure 014-17, identify the lead
names and the terminal locations for the PLO.

To accept synchronization clocks from other node for emergency, provide necessary cross connections
referring to Figure 014-18.
Note

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 217
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-014
Sheet 26/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

This figure shows an example for DCS connections between ISW and LN0. Also perform the same for connections
between ISW-LN1, ISW-LN2 and ISW-LN3, by using each LT connector and cable.

ISWM
CLK10
(Slot No.12)

CLK00
(Slot No.08)

"DCS Connections"


ISW-LN PLO CA-A
EXCLK1
(Slot No.23)
PLO CLOCK1
(Slot No.23)

EXCLK0
(Slot No.21)

TSWM0

TSWM1
PLO CLOCK1 PLO CLOCK0
(Slot No.23) (Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK0
(Slot No.21)

PLO-CLK CA-A

"DIU Connections" Note 1

MDF

Installation Cable

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

E
E

DIU3A
DIU2A
DIU1A
DIU0A

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

To Digital Interface

FM1
FM0

DIU3B
DIU2B
DIU1B
DIU0B

Note 2

Note 1: For DIU connection route diagram, see the figure on

the next page.
Note 2: “DCSnn” leads here are not used.

Figure 014-17 LT Connector Lead Accommodation of PLO (ISW-LN0)

CHAPTER 3
Page 218
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-014
Sheet 27/27
Cable Termination and Cross
Connections from MDF to Peripheral
Equipment, C. O. Lines, and Tie Lines

This figure shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN0. This example also assumes that
the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the 1st clock distribution route.

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)
LN0, IMG1
LT Connector

Digital
Interface

Installation Cable

maximum 100
meters (330 feet)
(24AWG)

PLO 0
EXCLK0

MDF
RA
RB
TA
TB
POUTA
POUTB

PCM Cable (2P)

PCM
Carrier
Equipment
DSU

to other node

CLK

Installation Cable
DIU0A0
DIU0B0
DIU1A0
DIU1B0
DIU2A0
DIU2B0
DIU3A0
DIU3B0

PLO 1
EXCLK1

Installation Cable

DIU0A1
DIU0B1
DIU1A1
DIU1B1
DIU2A1
DIU2B1
DIU3A1
DIU3B1

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum of four inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. Thus,

DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.
Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.
Figure 014-18 Cable Connection Diagram (LN) for Distributing Clock from a Digital Interface

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 219
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 1/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

This NAP explains the installation of the DESK CONSOLE and Cable Connection. Figure 015-1 shows the outer
view of the DESK CONSOLE. Use the PA-CS33 (ATI) card as an interface card between the system and the DESK
CONSOLE. The card can connect a maximum of two DESK CONSOLEs.
START
Cable running

Referring to Figures 015-2 through 015-5, run the cables
between each DESK CONSOLE and its Modular Block
(Jack), and between the Modular Blocks and the MDF.
Protect the cables by using cable ducts, etc.

Termination of cables

Referring to Figures 015-2 through 015-5 terminate the
installed cables to the MDF and the Modular Blocks.

Check the terminal locations on
the Module Group side of the
MDF.

Referring to Port Accommodation sheet and description of PACS33 card in the “Circuit Card Manual,” identify the lead
names for the card and the terminal locations of the leads.

Cross Connection

Referring to Figures 015-2 and 015-5, provide the necessary
cross connection at the DESK CONSOLE side and the PBX
side.

Mounting of Headset (Optional)

Referring to Figure 015-6, mount optional Headset on DESK
CONSOLE.

Mounting of Handset (Optional)

Referring to Figure 015-7 or 015-8, mount optional Handset
on DESK CONSOLE.

A

Figure 015-1 Outer View of DESK CONSOLE

CHAPTER 3
Page 220
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 2/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

A
Installation of Recording
Equipment (Optional)

Referring to Figures 015-9 through 015-12, install optional
Recording Equipment.

Connection of AC-DC Adapter
(Optional)

Referring to Figure 015-13, mount optional AC-DC adapter to
DESK CONSOLE in the case of local power supply.

Mounting of Add-On Console
(for Hotel system)

For the Hotel system, mount Add-On Console to DESK
CONSOLE referring to Figures 015-14 through 3-120.

Assignment of Configuration
Data

Assign configuration data for DESK CONSOLE.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 221
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 3/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

To connect DESK CONSOLE(s), the PA-CS33 card is used as the interface card. The card may be mounted
in slot No.12 or in slot No.23. The leads appear on LT5 and LT11 respectively. However, when replacing Attendant Console with DESK CONSOLE, the leads appear on the LT connector on the ATT TERM (See Note
on the next page).
Front View

• PA-CS33(ATI) mounting slots

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-CS33(ATI)

MUX
MUX
PA-CS33(ATI)

PA-CS33(ATI) card may be mounted in
slots 12 and/or 23.

PIM
LT5

LT11

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

Backplane

• LT cable connectors
Use LT5 connector when the PA-CS33 card
is mounted in slot 12. When the card
is mounted in slot 23, use LT11 connector.

PIM

LT5

LT11

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

• LT cable Pin Assignment

PIN LEAD PIN LEAD

Pins are assigned as follows for PA-CS33 card.

26
27

1
2

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

8
BN4800 9
10
BN4820 11
12
TAS1B 13
BN4810 14
TAS0B 15
BN4830 16
B0
17
18
B2
19
20
B1
21
22
B3
23
24
25

for ADD-ON CONSOLE 0
for DESK CONSOLE 0

for ADD-ON CONSOLE 1
for DESK CONSOLE 1
for ADD-ON CONSOLE 0
for DESK CONSOLE 0
for ADD-ON CONSOLE 1
for DESK CONSOLE 1

BN4801
BN4821

LT Connector

TAS1A
BN4811
TAS0A
BN4831
A0
A2
A1
A3

Figure 015-2 Cable Connection Diagram for DESK CONSOLE
CHAPTER 3
Page 222
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 4/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Note:

When replacing Attendant Console with DESK CONSOLE, follow the procedure below:
(a) Turn OFF the PWR card in the PIM.
(b) Remove installation cables connected to ATT0, ATT1 and LT connectors on the ATT TERM.
(c) Remove installation cables connected to the following connectors:
• RLT connector on the ATT TERM
• ATI0 and LT5, ATI1 and LT11 connectors on the PIM
(d) Install DESK CONSOLE using the LT connector on the ATT TERM.
(e) Turn ON the PWR card in the PIM.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 223
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 5/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

•

Cable Connection Diagram

a) When the power is supplied from the PBX

M
a

PBX

b

c
6-core Modular
Rosette

Installation Cable
MDF

ATI

IDF

A2

A

B2

B

BN4820

(–48V)

BN4820

BN4821

(–48V)

BN4821

DESK CONSOLE

6-core Modular Cable

GND
GND

6-core Modular
Rosette
A3

A

B3

B

BN4830

BN4830

BN4831

BN4831

DESK CONSOLE

6-core Modular Cable

GND
GND
RPT1

Figure 015-3 Cable Connection Diagram (When the power is supplied from the PBX)

The maximum distance between the ATI circuit card and DESK CONSOLE is as shown below.
Source

0.5 φ Cable

0.65 φ Cable

PBX

350 m (1148 ft. 3 in.)

500 m (1640 ft. 5 in.)

When exceeding the distance above, calculate the distance referring to instructions on the next page.

CHAPTER 3
Page 224
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 6/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Calculation of the distance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette

The distance M in Figure 015-3 is determined according to the Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables
(–48V and GND). Note that the maximum resistance is 26 Ω as shown in the following formula:
M = a + b + c ≤ 26 Ω
M:
a:
b:
c:

Maximum Direct–Current resistance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette
Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and GND) in the range of A
Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and GND) in the range of B
Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (–48V and GND) in the range of C

Example of Calculation

a, b, and c are calculated by the following formulae:
Note:

You are not required to use cable lengths in meters in the following formulae. You may use cable lengths
in feet, yards, or whatever unit you prefer. However, the units of resistance you use must match the units
of length you use. For example, if you use distance in feet, you must also use DC resistance per foot.
Resistance of –48V cables
a=

u (Ω/m) × x (m)
2

+

Resistance of GND cables

u (Ω/m) × x (m)
1

Number of –48V cables

Number of GND cable

Resistance of –48V cables
b=

v (Ω/m) × y (m)
2

+

Resistance of GND cables

v (Ω/m) × y (m)
2

Number of –48V cables

Number of GND cables

Resistance of –48V cables
c=

w (Ω/m) × z (m)
2

+

w (Ω/m) × z (m)
2

Number of –48V cables

u:
v:
w:
x:
y:
z:

Resistance of GND cables

Number of GND cables

Direct-Current resistance per meter in the range of A (Ω/m)
Direct-Current resistance per meter in the range of B (Ω/m)
Direct-Current resistance per meter in the range of C (Ω/m)
Cable length (m) in the range of A
Cable length (m) in the range of B
Cable length (m) in the range of C
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 225
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 7/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

b) When using Local Power Supply Note
Note:

When using local power supply, DESK CONSOLE cannot be used in case of power failure.

PBX
Installation Cable
A2

ATI

MDF

Installation
Cable

IDF

B2

Installation Cable

DESK CONSOLE

A
B

6-core Modular
Rosette

6-core Modular
Cable
DESK CONSOLE

A3

A

B3

B

Figure 015-4 Cable Connection Diagram (When using Local Power Supply)

The maximum distance between the ATI circuit card and DESK CONSOLE is as shown below.
Source

0.5 φ Cable

0.65 φ Cable

Local Power Supply

1,200 m (3937 ft.)

1,500 m (4921 ft. 3 in.)

CHAPTER 3
Page 226
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 8/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.
Bottom View

6-core Modular Cable

6-core Modular Block

IDF/MDF

PAGE
LINE
(8-core) REC (6-core)
(8-core)

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

DESK CONSOLE

PIN LEAD PIN LEAD
No. NAME No. NAME
26
1
27
2

DESK CONSOLE
Desk Console
Modular Jack
Transformer

Surge
Protection

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

6-core Modular Cable
GND
- 48 V
A1
B1

DC/DC
Convertor

GND
–48V/–24V

GND
- 48 V

BN4800
BN4820

BN4810
BN4830
B2
B0
B1
B3

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

BN4801
BN4821

BN4811
BN4831
A2
A0
A1
A3

Add-on for
Console 0
Console 0
Add-on for
Console 1
Console 1

G

Figure 015-5 Cable Connection Diagram for DESK CONSOLE Modular Block

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 227
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 9/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

•

Mounting of Headset (Optional)

The Headset cable is connected to one of the modular jacks (HAND H/S 0 or H/S 1) on the bottom of DESK
CONSOLE.
Head Band

Slide
Slide

Capsule Unit
(Microphone and
Speaker)
Ear Pad

Slide

Closing
Clip

Voice Tube

Quick Disconnect

Modular Plag Note
PIN1

PIN1 TX (+)
2 RX
3 RX
4 TX
(–)

Hand
H/S0
H/S1

Note:

In daily use, use Quick Disconnect when connecting/disconnecting the Headset.
Figure 015-6 Headset

CHAPTER 3
Page 228
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 10/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

•

Mounting of Handset (Optional)

The Handset cable is connected to the modular jack (HAND H/S 0) on the bottom of DESK CONSOLE.
a) When mounting at the left side of DESK CONSOLE (Standard)

Position Busy Night
Night
LDN

TIE

Busy

ATND

ANANS

Recall

Page

REC

EMG

BV

TRKSL

Call Park

SC

SVC

Start

Mute

Cancel

L6
2
ABC

3
DEF

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

*

0

#

1
L5
L4

L3

Position Busy

DEST

SRC
Talk

L2

Release

Hold

Answer

L1

1. Put the Handset code through the hole as shown below.

Handset code

(DESK CONSOLE side)

(Handset side)

Hole
Side View

Figure 015-7 Mounting of Handset (Left side of DESK CONSOLE)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 229
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 11/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Top View

Bottom View

2. Connect the Handset code to HAND H/S0 connector as shown below (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).

Hand
H/S0
Handset code
H/S1

Bottom View of DESK CONSOLE

Figure 015-7 Mounting of Handset (Left side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

CHAPTER 3
Page 230
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 12/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Mount the Handset Support to DESK CONSOLE with three screws as shown below.

projection

projection

Handset Support

Figure 015-7 Mounting of Handset (Left side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 231
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 13/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

b) When mounting at the right side of DESK CONSOLE
1. Remove the metal plate from the Handset, turn it over, and mount it to the Handset again.
Refer to the figure below.
Turn the metal plate over.

When mounting at the left side

When mounting at the right side
Screw (1)

Screw (2)

Screw (5)

Handset

Handset
Screw (4)

Screw (3)

Screw (3)

Screw (4)

Metal Plate

Screw (2)

Screw (5)

Screw (1)
Metal Plate

DESK CONSOLE

2. Put the Handset code through the hole as shown below.

(Handset side)

(DESK CONSOLE side)

Hole
Side View

Figure 015-8 Mounting of Handset (Right side of DESK CONSOLE)
CHAPTER 3
Page 232
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 14/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Bottom view

Top View

3. Connect the Handset code to HAND H/S0 connector as shown below (H/S1 is not used for the Handset).

Code
HAND
H/S0
H/S1

Bottom View of DESK CONSOLE

Figure 015-8 Mounting of Handset (Right side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 233
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 15/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Mount the Handset Support to DESK CONSOLE with three screws as shown below.

projection
Handset Support

projection

Figure 015-8 Mounting of Handset (Right side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

CHAPTER 3
Page 234
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 16/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

•

Connection of Recording Equipment

The followings are required for using recording function:
• The RECC circuit card
• Recording Equipment
• 8-core Line Cable
• Rosette
A RECC card (PA-M87) connects DESK CONSOLEs and recording equipment in the following combinations:
• Six DESK CONSOLEs and one recording equipment×1 set
• Three DESK CONSOLEs and one recording equipment×2 set
DESK CONSOLE

8-core Line Cable

MDF
Installation Cable

PIM

50FLT-CHAMP
CABLE

RECC
card

Rosette
8-pin Modular Connector

Recording
Equipment

Front
MDF

Rosette
8-core Line Cable

Recording
Equipment

8-pin Modular Connector

PIM

A

A0

B

B0

LA
LB

M0A
M0B

KA

K0A

KB

K0B

R
E
C
Circuit Card Front Connector

L0A

Note 1 Telephone
side leads
Note 1 C.O. line
side leads

L0B
T0A
T0B
ZA

Note 3
PIM
L0A Note 2
ZB

L0B
T0A

R
E
C

T0B
ZA
ZB
Bottom View of DESK CONSOLE

Note 1: Recording equipment is positioned between the C.O. line and telephones.
Note 2: One recording equipment can be shared with multiple RECC cards.
Note 3: When sharing one recording equipment with multiple RECC cards, multiple connection of ZA and ZB

terminals is required.
Figure 015-9 RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 235
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 17/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

a) When using three DESK CONSOLEs and one recorder

Note 1

Note 1: Switch settings of SW10, SW12 and SW13 on the PA-M87 card is required. For switch setting and connector

lead accommodation, refer to the Circuit Card Manual.
PIM
MDF

DESK CONSOLE
Note 2

A

A0

B

B0

LA

M0A

LB

M0B

KA

K0A

KB

K0B

Note 2

RECC
card

Circuit 0
Note 3
Front Connector

Circuit 1
Circuit 2

Recording
Equipment

L0A
C.O. line side
Note 4
leads

L0B
T0A

Telephone side
Note 4
leads

T0B

Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Circuit 5

Recording
Equipment

L1A
C.O. line side
leads Note 4
Telephone side
Note 4
leads

L1B
T1A
T1B

Note 2: Refer to Figure 015-9, “RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram” for cable connection.
Note 3: Connections of Circuit 1 through 5 are the same as those of Circuit 0.
Note 4: Recording equipment is positioned between the C.O. line and telephones.
Figure 015-10 Three DESK CONSOLEs and One Recording Equipment
CHAPTER 3
Page 236
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 18/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

b) When using six DESK CONSOLEs and one recording equipment

Note 1

Note 1: Switch settings of SW10, SW12 and SW13 on the PA-M87 card is required. For switch setting and connector

lead accommodation, refer to the Circuit Card Manual.

PIM
MDF

DESK CONSOLE
Note 2

A

A0

B

B0

LA

M0A

LB

M0B

KA

K0A

KB

K0B

Note 2

RECC
card

Circuit 0
Note 3
Front Connector

Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Circuit 5

Recording
Equipment

L0A
C.O. line side
leads Note 4

L0B
T0A

Telephone side
leads Note 4

T0B

Note 2: Refer to Figure 015-9 “RECC Card Cable Connection Diagram” for cable connection.
Note 3: Connections of Circuit 1 through 5 are the same as those of Circuit 0.
Note 4: Recording equipment is positioned between the C.O. line and telephones.
Figure 015-11 Six DESK CONSOLEs and One Recording Equipment

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 237
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 19/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

•

8-core Line Cable (Installation Cable)

Note 1

8-pin Modular Connector
(Rosette side)

8-pin Modular Connector
(DESK CONSOLE side)

8-core Line Cable (Installation Cable)

Pin No.

12345678

Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

LEAD NAME
A
B
–
–
KA
KB
LA (Note 2)
LB (Note 2)

MEANING
Speech
Speech
Not used
Not used
Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)
Recording Start Signal (Relay Contact)
Recording Lamp Signal (+)
Recording Lamp Signal (–)

Note 1: Cut the cable in proper length. Attach the modular connector to both sides of the 8-core line cable using

installation tool.
Note 2: Be sure to check the polarity of pin numbers 7 (LA) (+) and 8 (LB)(–).
Figure 015-12 8-core Line Cable

CHAPTER 3
Page 238
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 20/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

•

Connection of AC-DC adapter (Optional)

The AC-DC adapter is required when the power supply from the distant PBX is not available.
The connector for the AC-DC adapter is on the rear side of DESK CONSOLE.

AC-DC Adapter (

)

Figure 015-13 Connection of AC-DC Adapter

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 239
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 21/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

•

Mounting of Add-On Console (for Hotel System)

ADD-ON CONSOLE is used in the Hotel System.
1. Cable Connection Diagram
a) Cable Connection Diagram of Add-On Console (When the power is supplied from the PBX)

M
PBX

a

b

c
6-core Modular
Rosette

Installation Cable
ATI

MDF

IDF

A0

A0

B0

B0

BN4800

(–48V)

BN4800

BN4801

(–48V)

BN4801

ADD-ON CONSOLE

6-core Modular Cable

GND
GND

6-core Modular
Rosette
A1

A1

B1

B1

BN4810

BN4810

BN4811

BN4811

6-core Modular Cable

GND
GND
RPT1

Figure 015-14 Add-On Console Cable Connection Diagram
(When the power is supplied from the PBX)

CHAPTER 3
Page 240
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

ADD-ON CONSOLE

NAP-200-015
Sheet 22/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

b) Cable Connection Diagram of Add-On Console (When using Local Power Supply) Note
Note:

When using local power supply, DESK CONSOLE cannot be used in case of power failure.

PBX
Installation Cable
ATI

A0

MDF

Installation
Cable

IDF

B0

Installation Cable

ADD-ON CONSOLE

A
B

6-core Modular
Rosette

6-core Modular
Cable
ADD-ON CONSOLE

A1

A

B1

B

Figure 015-14 Add-On Console Cable Connection Diagram (When using Local Power Supply)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 241
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 23/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.
Bottom View

6-core Modular Cable

6-core Modular Block

IDF/MDF

PAGE
LINE
(8-core) REC (6-core)
(8-core)

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

DESK CONSOLE

PIN LEAD PIN LEAD
No. NAME No. NAME
26
1
27
2

DESK CONSOLE
Desk Console
Modular Jack
Transformer

Surge
Protection

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

6-core Modular Cable
GND
- 48 V
A1
B1

DC/DC
Convertor

GND
–48V/–24V

GND
- 48 V

BN4800
BN4820

BN4810
BN4830
B2
B0
B1
B3

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

BN4801
BN4821

BN4811
BN4831
A2
A0

Console 0

A1

Add-on for
Console 1

A3

G

Figure 015-15 Cable Connection Diagram for Add-On Console Modular Block

CHAPTER 3
Page 242
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

Add-on for
Console 0

Console 1

NAP-200-015
Sheet 24/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

2. Mounting of ADD-ON CONSOLE
a) When mounting at the right side of DESK CONSOLE

TRKSL

Alarm

Position Busy

Position Busy

Night

PAGE

REC

START

MUTE

SVC

SC

DDC

HWS

BV

WUS

DDS

RCS

MWS

WUR

DDR

RCR

MWR

TG1

TG6

TG2

TG7

TG3

TG8

TG4

TG9

Night
LDN

TIE

BUSY

ADM

ANANS

RECALL

HWC

HP

DD

GST

LT

ICPT

TF

Position Busy

STS

MR CLR

Cancel

L6
1

2
ABC

3
DEF

L5

SRC

DEST
Talk

L4

L3

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

*

0

ENTER

CLEAR
Release

HOLD

Answer

L2
EXIT
TG10

TG5

#

L1

TRKSL

SVC

SC

DDC

HWS

BV

WUS

DDS

RCS

MWS

DDR

RCR

MWR

TG1

TG6

TG2

TG7

TG3

TG8

TG4

TG9

TG5

TG10

WUR

STS

MR CLR

ENTER

CLEAR

EXIT

TOP VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW

Figure 015-16 Mounting of Add-On Console (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 243
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 25/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

Mount the ADD-ON CONSOLE to DESK CONSOLE with three screws as shown below.

Projection

Projection

ADD-ON CONSOLE

DESK CONSOLE

Figure 015-16 Mounting of Add-On Console (Right Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)

CHAPTER 3
Page 244
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 26/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

b) When mounting at the left side of DESK CONSOLE

TRKSL

SVC

DDC

HWS

BV

WUS

DDS

RCS

SC

ALARM

POSITION AVAILABLE

POSITION BUSY

NIGHT
NIGHT

WUR

DDR

MWS

LDN

RCR

MWR

HWC

TG1

TG6

TG2

TG7

STS

TIE

BUSY

ADM

NANS

RECALL

HP

DD

GST

LT

ICPT

TF

PAGE

REC

START

MUTE

POSITION BUSY

MR CLR

CANCEL

L6
2
ABC

3
DEF

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

*

0

1

DEST

SRC

L5
TALK
ENTER
TG3

TG8

TG4

TG9

TG5

TG10

L4

CLEAR

L3

RELEASE

HOLD

ANSWER

L2
EXIT

#

L1

1. Remove the metal plate from the ADD-ON CONSOLE, turn it over, and mount it to the ADD-ON CONSOLE
again. Refer to the figure below.

Turn over the metal plate.
When mounting at the right side
Screw (2)

Screw (4)

Screw (5)

Screw (1)
Screw (3)

When mounting at the left side

Screw (6)

Screw (6)

Screw (3)

Screw (5)

Screw (1)

Screw (4)
Metal Plate

Screw (2)
Metal Plate

ADD-ON CONSOLE

ADD-ON CONSOLE

Figure 015-17 Mounting of Add-On Console (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 245
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 27/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

TRKSL

SVC

SC

DDC

HWS

BV

WUS

DDS

RCS

MWS

WUR

DDR

RCR

MWR

TG1

TG6

TG2

TG7

TG3

TG8

TG4

TG9

TG5

TG10

STS

MR CLR

ENTER

CLEAR

EXIT

Top View

Bottom View

2. Mount the ADD-ON CONSOLE to DESK CONSOLE with three screws as shown below.

Projection

Projection

DESK CONSOLE
ADD-ON CONSOLE

Figure 015-17 Mounting of Add-On Console (Left Side of DESK CONSOLE) (Continued)
CHAPTER 3
Page 246
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 28/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

3. Connection of AC-DC adapter for Add-On Console (Optional)
The AC-DC adapter is required when the power supply from the distant PBX is not available.
The connector for the AC-DC adapter is on the rear side of ADD-ON CONSOLE.

AC-DC Adapter (

)

Connector for AC-DC Adapter

Figure 015-18 Connection of AC-DC Adapter for Add-On Console

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 247
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 29/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

•

Configuration Menu
[General]

Configuration Menu is used for assigning configuration data for DESK CONSOLE. The menu has the following
items:
1. HEADSET/HANDSET
2. HEADSET TYPE
3. MUTE
4. REC CONTROL
5. PAGE CONTROL
6. SUP CONNECTION
7. REC VOLUME
8. BLF
9. HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP
[Selection of Configuration Item]

1. Displaying Configuration Menu
a) Turn on the power while pressing the L3 and L6 keys simultaneously.

Alarm Position Available

[L6 key]

Position Busy

Night

LDN

TIE

Busy

ATND

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

EMG

BV

TRKSL

Call Park

SC

SVC

START

MUTE

Cancel

L6
1

2
ABC

3
DEF

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MN0

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

*

0

#

L5

SRC

DEST
Talk

L4

[L3 key]

L3

L2

L1

CHAPTER 3
Page 248
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

Release

Hold

Answer

Night

Position Busy

NAP-200-015
Sheet 30/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

The first page of Configuration Menu appears on the LCD. Configuration Menu has a total of three pages.
• 1st Page
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
2: HEADSET TYPE
3: MUTE

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x
1: REC CONTROL
2: PAGE CONTROL Note
3: SUP CONNECTION

SRC: prev page
DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

• 2nd Page

Note:

Do Not change this data.
• 3rd Page
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x

SRC: prev page

1: REC VOLUME

Release: exit

2: BLF

Answer: update

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP

b) When the DEST key is pressed, the display changes to the next page. When returning to the previous
page, press the SRC key.
c) When the Release key is pressed, Configuration Menu disappears and the DESK CONSOLE returns to
normal operation.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 249
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 31/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

2. Selection of Configuration Item
Using a numeric key, press the desired number in Configuration Menu. A menu for assigning configuration
data appears. Assign configuration data referring to “Assignment of Configuration Data” on the next page.

Alarm Position Available

Position Busy

Night
Night

LDN

TIE

BUSY

ATND

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

EMG

BV

TRKSL

Call Park

SC

SVC

START

MUTE

Position Busy

[SRC key]
Cancel

L6
1

2
ABC

3
DEF

DEST

SRC

L5

Talk

L4

L3

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

*

0

#

Release

Hold

Answer

[Answer key]

L2

L1

[Numeric keys]

CHAPTER 3
Page 250
Revision 1.0

[DEST key]

[Release key]

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 32/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

[Assignment of Configuration Data]

This section explains how to assign each configuration data. When assigning configuration data, the following
shaded keys are used.

Alarm Position Available

Position Busy

Night
Night

LDN

TIE

BUSY

ATND

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

EMG

BV

TRKSL

Call Park

SC

SVC

START

MUTE

Position Busy

[SRC key]
Cancel

L6
1

2
ABC

3
DEF

DEST

SRC

L5

Talk

L4

L3

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

*

0

#

Release

Hold

Answer

L2

L1

[Numeric keys (1 - 4)]

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 251
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 33/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

1. [HEADSET/HANDSET]
This item specifies an optional device connected to the HAND H/S0 connector.
Note:

With regard to the H/S1 connector, only the Headset is connected. Accordingly, data assignment for H/S1
connector is not required.
a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[HEADSET/HANDSET]
*1: HEADSET
2: HANDSET

SRC: menu

1:
Headset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector
2:
Handset is connected to the HAND H/S0 connector
SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “1: HEADSET”.
b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
2: HEADSET TYPE
3: MUTE

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to "[Updating Configuration Data]" on Page
260. When the other item is also specified, return to "2. Selection of Configuration Item" on Page 250.

CHAPTER 3
Page 252
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 34/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

2. [HEADSET TYPE]
This item specifies the type of Headset connected to the H/S1 connector.
a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[HEADSET TYPE]
*1: SUPRA
2: COROLLE

SRC: menu

1:
The type of Headset is “SUPRA”
2:
The type of Headset is “COROLLE”
SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “1: SUPRA”.
b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
2: HEADSET TYPE
3: MUTE

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to "[Updating Configuration Data]" on Page
260. When the other item is also specified, return to "2. Selection of Configuration Item" on Page 250.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 253
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 35/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

3. [MUTE]
This item specifies On/Off setting of the mute function for the HAND H/S0 or H/S1 connector.
While the mute function is set to On, if the Mute key is pressed, the voice at the DESK CONSOLE side is not
sent to the other party.
a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[MUTE]
*1: H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON
2: H/S0 ON, H/S1 OFF
3: H/S0 OFF, H/S1 ON
1:
2:
3:
SRC:
Note:

SRC: menu

Both H/S0 and H/S1 are set to On
Only H/S0 is set to On
Only H/S1 is set to Off
Return to Configuration Menu

Default setting is “1: H/S0 ON, H/S1 ON”.
b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P1] VER x
1: HEADSET/HANDSET
2: HEADSET TYPE
3: MUTE

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to "[Updating Configuration Data]" on Page
260. When the other item is also specified, return to "2. Selection of Configuration Item" on Page 250.

CHAPTER 3
Page 254
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 36/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

4. [REC CONTROL]
This item specifies the operation mode of a recording device. The following two types of modes are available:
[Manual mode]
Manual mode is available when the REC circuit card is mounted in the system. When the REC key is pressed,
the system starts recording and the REC lamp lights. When the REC key is pressed again, the recording stops
and the REC lamp goes off.
[Automatic mode]
In Automatic mode, a dedicated recording device is directly connected to the REC connector.
When a call is connected/disconnected, the system starts/ends recording automatically. Note that the REC key
is not effective in Automatic mode.
a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[REC CONTROL]
*1: MANUAL
2: AUTO

SRC: menu

1:
Manual mode
2:
Automatic mode
SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “1: MANUAL”.
b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x
1: REC CONTROL
2: PAGE CONTROL Note
3: SUP CONNECTION

Note:

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

Do Not change this data.
c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to "[Updating Configuration Data]" on Page
260. When the other item is also specified, return to "2. Selection of Configuration Item" on Page 250.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 255
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 37/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

5. [SUP CONNECTION]
This item specifies whether the supervisory console is connected or not.
a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[SUP CONNECTION]
*1: NONE
2: CONNECTED

SRC: menu

1:
Supervisory Console is connected
2:
Supervisory Console is not connected
SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “1: NONE”.
b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P2] VER x
1: REC CONTROL
2: PAGE CONTROL Note
3: SUP CONNECTION

Note:

SRC: prev page
DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

Do Not change this data.
c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to "[Updating Configuration Data]" on Page
260. When the other item is also specified, return to "2. Selection of Configuration Item" on Page 250.

CHAPTER 3
Page 256
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 38/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

6. [REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT]
This item specifies the recording level of the received voice from the other party. Note that the voice level at the
operator side cannot be adjusted.
a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[REC VOLUME ADJUSTMENT]
1: +2dB
4: -8dB
*2: 0dB
3: -4dB
1:
2:
3:
4:
SRC:
Note:

SRC: menu

+2dB Up
0dB (Standard level)
-4dB Down
-8dB Down
Return to Configuration Menu

Default setting is “2: 0dB”.
b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x
1: REC VOLUME
2: BLF
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE

SRC: prev page
Release: exit
Answer: update

c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to "[Updating Configuration Data]" on Page
260. When the other item is also specified, return to "2. Selection of Configuration Item" on Page 250.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 257
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 39/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

7. [BLF]
This item specifies On/Off setting of the BLF function. When using BLF function, system data assignment is
also required.
a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[BLF]
1: ENABLE
*2: DISABLE

SRC: menu

1:
BLF Available
2:
BLF Not available
SRC: Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “2: DISABLE”.
b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x

DEST: next page

1: REC VOLUME

Release: exit

2: BLF

Answer: update

3: HOLD/START/RELEASE SWAP

c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to "[Updating Configuration Data]" on Page
260. When the other item is also specified, return to "2. Selection of Configuration Item" on Page 250.

CHAPTER 3
Page 258
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-015
Sheet 40/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

8. [HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP]
This item specifies the locations of HOLD, START and RELEASE key.
a) Press the desired number. An asterisk shows the selected number.
[HOLD/START/RELEASE/SWAP] SRC: menu
*1: ORIGINAL
2: SWAPPED
1: Original setting
2: Swapped setting
Note:

The locations of each key changes as shown below.

Original setting
RELEASE
HOLD
START

Swapped setting
START
RELEASE
HOLD

SRC:Return to Configuration Menu
Note:

Default setting is “1: ORIGINAL”.
b) Press the SRC key. The display returns to Configuration Menu.
[CONFIG MENU P3] VER x
1: REC VOLUME
2: BLF
3: HOLD/START/RELEASE

DEST: next page
Release: exit
Answer: update

c) When configuration data assignment is finished, proceed to "[Updating Configuration Data]" on Page
260. When the other item is also specified, return to "2. Selection of Configuration Item" on Page 250.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 259
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-015
Sheet 41/41
Installation of the DESK CONSOLE and
Cable Connection

[Updating Configuration Data]

When configuration data assignment is complete, update configuration data according to the procedure below.
When the RELEASE key is pressed, update is cancelled.
While one of the Configuration Menu is displayed on the LCD, press the ANSWER key.
Configuration data is updated and the DESK CONSOLE is automatically restarted.

Alarm Position Available

Position Busy

Night
Night

LDN

TIE

BUSY

ATND

NANS

Recall

PAGE

REC

EMG

BV

TRKSL

Call Park

SC

SVC

START

MUTE

Position Busy

Cancel

L6
1

2
ABC

3
DEF

DEST

SRC

L5

Talk

L4

L3

4
GHI

5
JKL

6
MNO

7
PQRS

8
TUV

9
WXYZ

*

0

#

Release

Hold

L1

[Release key] (Cancel)

CHAPTER 3
Page 260
Revision 1.0

Answer

[Answer key] (Update)

L2

NDA-24306

NAP-200-016
Sheet 1/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and
Cable Connections

This NAP explains the installation of the MAT (Maintenance Administration Terminal) and the System Message
Printer focusing on their cable connections.
1. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTIONS

START
Preparation of the MAT

Set up the Personal Computer, CRT Display, Printer, and
so on.

Cable Connection

Connect the cables between the MAT and the PBX
referring to Figures 016-1 and 016-2.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 261
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-016
Sheet 2/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11

BASEU

PH-PC40(EMA)
PH-IO24(IOC)
Note

LPM

LANI (PZ-PC19)

10BASET (straight)

MAT

HUB

Figure 016-1 Cabling of MAT when Using Ethernet

CHAPTER 3
Page 262
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-016
Sheet 3/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections


• To connect the PBX and the MAT, the following three
kinds of cables are required. The “RS-232C Cable should
be provided by the customer.

PBX

RS-232C Cable
(customer provided)

MAT

To MISC Connector

SERIAL PORT 0
TYP0

RS-232C CA-(1)

SERIAL PORT 1

TYP1


• The location of the MISC connector to which the “68PH S 2PORTS CA-A” cable
is connected varies depending on the mounting location of the IOC (PH-IO24)
card and the IOC port number (0 ~ 3). See the table below.
Slot No.

Port No.
IOC Port 0
IOC Port 1
IOC Port 2
IOC Port 3
IOC Port 0
IOC Port 1
IOC Port 2
IOC Port 3

02

03

port 1

MISC 2B
MISC 3B / 4B Connector

MISC 2A

LPM

MISC 3A

port 2

TYP1

TYP0

TYP1

TY0

SIDE VIEW
MISIC 2A / 3A Connector

MISC2B

MISC3A

MISC2A

— Legend —
LPM

BASEU
FRONT VIEW

port 0
port 3

MISC 3B

MISC3B

IOC 1

IOC 0

LPM

(2 m / 6 feet)

PIM

MISC Connector

Slot No. 03 02
00 01 02 03 04

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

: Champ Connector (Male)
: Champ Connector (Female)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Male)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female)
: 68-Pin Connector (Female)

REAR VIEW

Figure 016-2 Cable Connection Diagram for the MAT

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 263
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-016
Sheet 4/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

2. INSTALLATION OF MAT AND CABLE CONNECTION BY USING MODEM
Note:

When the distance between the PBX and the MAT (Maintenance Administration Terminal) exceeds 15
meters (50 feet), connect them with Modems as shown in Figure 016-3.

START
Preparation of the MAT

Set up the Personal Computer, CRT Display, Printer, and
so on.

Preparation of the modems

Set up the modems referring to its instruction book.

Cable connection

Connect the cables referring to Figure 016-3.

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 264
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-016
Sheet 5/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

• To connect the PBX and the MAT, the following four kinds of communication cables are required. The
“RS-232C Cable” should be provided by the customer.
PBX

MAT

Installation Cable
(less than 10 m (33 feet)

RS-232C Cable
(customer provided)
To the MISC connectors
RS-232C CA-(3)
ANALOG LINE
(2W/4W)
MODEM

TYP0

serial port 0

MODEM

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A
(2 m / 6 feet)

— Legend —
: Champ Connector (Male)
: Champ Connector (Female)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Male)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female)
: 68-Pin Connector (Female)

TYP1

serial port 1

Figure 016-3 Cabling of MAT Using Modems

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 265
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-016
Sheet 6/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

3. INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM MESSAGE PRINTER AND CABLE CONNECTIONS

START
Installing printer

Install printer according to its instructions.

Cable connection

Connect the cable between the PBX and the dedicated
System Message Printer which is equipped with a parallel
port referring to Figure 016-4.

END
• To connect the PBX and the dedicated SYSTEM MESSAGE
PRINTER, the following three kinds of communication cables
are required. The “RS-232C Cable” should be provided by the
customer.

PBX

To the MISC connectors
RS-232C Cable
(customer provided)

RS-232C CA-(0)

TYP0

SERIAL PORT 0

TYP1

SERIAL PORT 1
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A
(2 m / 6.6 feet)
— Legend —

PRINTER

: Champ Connector (Male)
: Champ Connector (Female)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Male)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female)
: 68-Pin Connector (Female)

Figure 016-4 Connection of System Message Printer

CHAPTER 3
Page 266
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-016
Sheet 7/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

RS-232C CA-(0)
1500mm (4 feet 1 inch)
DTE

TYP

Champ Connector
(Female)

25-Pin Cannon Connector
(Male)

TYPE-1-SD

DTE-3-RD

-2-RD

-2-SD

-3-RS

-8-CD

-4-CS

Connect to
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

-5-DR

-20-ER

-6-SG

-7-SG

-7-CD

-4-RS

Connect to PRT

-5-CS
-8-ER

-6-DR

-9-PB

-11-PB

-10-SP0

-24-ST1

-12-SP2
-17-RT

-11-SP1

-15-ST2

Figure 016-5 Detail of RS-232C CA-(0)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 267
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-016
Sheet 8/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

RS-232C CA-(1)
1500mm (4 feet 1 inch)
DTE

TYP

Champ Connector
(Female)

25-Pin Cannon Connector
(Female)

TYPE-1-SD

DTE-3-RD

-2-RD

-2-SD

-3-RS

-8-CD

-4-CS

Connect to
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

-5-DR

-20-ER

-6-SG

-7-SG

-7-CD

-4-RS
-5-CS

-8-ER

-6-DR

-9-PB

-11-PB

-10-SP0

-24-ST1

-12-SP2
-17-RT

-11-SP1

-15-ST2

Figure 016-6 Detail of RS-232C CA-(1)

CHAPTER 3
Page 268
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

Connect to
RS-232C Cable

NAP-200-016
Sheet 9/9
Installation of the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) and Cable
Connections

RS-232C CA-(3)
1500mm (4 feet 1 inch)
DTE

TYP

Champ Connector
(Female)

Connect to
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

25-Pin Cannon Connector
(Male)

TYP-1-SD

DCE-2-SD

TYP-2-RD

DCE-3-RD

TYP-3-RS

DCE-4-RS

TYP-4-CS

DCE-5-CS

TYP-5-DR

DCE-6-DR

TYP-6-SG

DCE-7-SG

TYP-7-CD

DCE-8-CD

TYP-8-ER

DCE-20-ER

TYP-10-SP0

DCE-17-RT

TYP-11-SP2

DCE-24-ST1

TYP-12-SP1

DCE-15-ST2

Connect to MODEM

Figure 016-7 Detail of RS-232C CA-(3)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 269
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-017
Sheet 1/3
Connections of SMDR

This NAP explains the cable connection of SMDR equipment.
Note:

The IOC circuit card (PH-IO24), which has four RS-232C interfaces, can be mounted in the slot Number
3 and/or 2 of the LPR. Consequently, the system can have maximum eight ports for the RS-232C terminals.

RS-232C cable

MISC 2B/3B

Backplane
AMP
AMP

Front

AMP

Circuit 1

Circuit 2

TYP0
TYP0

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

To RS-232C
Terminal

TYP0
TYP1

IOC (PH-IO24)

TYP0

Circuit 0
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

MISC 2A/3A
TYP1
TYP1

Circuit 3

Figure 017-1 I/O Port Interface

The SMDR RS-232C interface specifications are:
• Synchronization
— Asynchronous
• Data Speed
— 9600 bps (maximum)
• Code
— ASCII 7-bit + Parity Bit
• Maximum Distance
— 15 meters (50 feet) without Modems.
START
Installation of SMDR equipment
Cable connection

Connect the cables referring to Figure 017-2.
• Refer to Figure 017-3 when the length of the cables
exceeds 15 meters (49.5 feet).

END

CHAPTER 3
Page 270
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-017
Sheet 2/3
Connections of SMDR

• The location of MISC connector to which “68PH S 2PORTS CA-A” cable is connected varies depending on
the mounting location of the IOC (PH-IO24) card and the designated IOC port number (0 ~ 3).

PBX

Slot Number 03

MISC2B MISC2A

IOC 0
IOC 1

LPM

MISC3B MISC3A

00 01 02 03 04

PIM

02

LPM

FRONT VIEW

BASEU

PBX
FRONT VIEW

IOC

RS 232C Cable
(customer provided)

MISC 2B/3B Connector

SMDR

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

Port 1
TYP1

Port 0
TYP0

PIM
Port 3

TYP1

2400 RS 232C CA-1

Port 2
TYP0

-- Legend --

SIDE VIEW

: Champ Connector (Male)
: Champ Connector (Female)

MISC 2A/3A Connector

: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Male)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female)
: 68-Pin Connector (Female)

Figure 017-2 Cable Connection Diagram for the SMDR Equipment

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 3
Page 271
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-017
Sheet 3/3
Connections of SMDR

• The location of MISC connector to which “68PH S 2 PORTS CA-A” cable is connected varies depending
on the mounting location of the IOC (PH-IO24) card and the designated IOC number (0 ~ 3).
PBX

Slot Number

FRONT VIEW

PBX

MISC2B MISC2A

MISC3A

IOC 0
IOC 1

LPM

PIM

02

MISC3B

00 01 02 03 04

03

LPM

BASEU
REAR VIEW

MISC 2B/3B Connector
Analog Line
(2W/4W)

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

MODEM
RS 232C Cable
(customer provided)

MODEM
SMDR
Port 1

TYP1

Port 0
TYP0

IOC

2400 RS 232C CA-(3)

Port 3
TYP1

Port 2
TYP0

-- Legend --

MISC 2A/3A Connector

: Champ Connector (Male)
: Champ Connector (Female)
: 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Male)
: 68-Pin Connector (Female)

Figure 017-3 Connection of SMDR by Using MODEM

CHAPTER 3
Page 272
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4

SYSTEM STARTUP

1. GENERAL
This chapter describes the method to start up the system initially after completion of the installation of the PBX,
and the method to check as to whether the system has started up normally. Before beginning the system startup,
thoroughly read Section 2., “PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING SYSTEM STARTUP” in this chapter,
and observe the precautions while performing the system startup. Failure to so may delay the system cutover or
may result in damage to the system equipment.
2. PRECAUTIONS BEFORE BEGINNING SYSTEM STARTUP
1.

The system is to be started up using the basic system data.

2.

When starting up the system, it is necessary to start up theMAT.

3.

The following preparatory steps must be completed before the tests are begun:
• All circuit card switches should be correctly set.
• Flat cables should be securely connected.
• CHAMP connectors should be securely connected.
• All connector-ended cables should be secured at both ends.
• The –48 V (Blue) and G (Red) power supply leads must be correctly connected.
• An earth lead (less than 10 ohms) must be connected to the communication ground.
• The installer should confirm at this point that all installation steps have been completed.

4.

Do not place any object (a tool, manual, etc.) on top of the Module Group or within a unit (module).
• An object such as a book, when placed on top of the Module Group, will adversely affect heat dissipation from the Module Group.
• If an object placed on top of the Module Group or left within a unit (module) falls out, it may cause
backplane pins, circuit cards, etc. to short-circuit.

5.

Before initially turning ON power to the system, read the Power On Procedure (NAP-200-018).
• Until the normal operation of all circuit cards has been confirmed, leave power ON only during testing.

6.

Observe the temperature in the switch room.
• Does the air-conditioning function properly at night?
• Does the temperature fluctuate constantly because people go in and out frequently, or rise above the recommended level due to excessive heat being generated by any single piece of equipment?
• The fan should be left ON constantly until the installation tests are completed.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 273
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

7.

A floppy disk (FD) copy of the programmed Office Data should be created. If a backup is not made, and
the contents of the Data Memory are accidentally altered or destroyed, all the Office Data will have to be
programmed again.

8.

If any portion of the Office Data (especially data related to ringing patterns) has been changed via commands “ARTD/ARTDN,” “AKYD,” or “ASYD/ASYDL/ASYDN,” the system must be initialized and tests
involving the changed data must be performed.

9.

After the system is initialized, perform the following.
• Set the current date and time using MAT command “ATIM/ATIMN.”
• When the system is initialized, the system begins operating in Day Mode. To change over to Night
Mode, press the NITE key on the Attendant Console.
• If no Attendant Console is equipped, the system begins operating in night mode.

10. The following cross connections must be made at the MDF:
• Complete necessary cross connections by extracting the related circuit cards from their mounting slots
or by disconnecting the circuits with a cut plug if test springs are in use.
• If the connection to a Dterm is made incorrectly, the electronic fuse of the circuit card will blow out.
(Repair Method: Correct the cross connections and flip the MB switch on the card Down-Up-Down).
• While a test is in progress, do not perform cross connections without first consulting with the person
conducting the test (Ringing signal: AC 20 Hz, effective value 90 V, may be flowing through the terminals).
• Remove all temporary cross connections after the tests have been performed (If Office Data was assigned for test purposes, restore the original Office Data).
11. Observe the following when connecting cables:
• Before connecting or disconnecting the control cable (Front & Backplane), turn OFF the power to the
Module Group (LPM / PIM etc).
• Before connecting or disconnecting a CHAMP connector, turn OFF the power to the Module Group.
This will prevent an accident from occurring in the event that a metal object such as a screw, screwdriver,
etc. accidentally contacts the backplane circuitry or pins.
• When connecting or disconnecting the connector cable of the Attendant Console, first set the MB switch
on the ATI circuit card to the UP position, then connect/disconnect the cable.
12. Precautions when Handling Circuit Cards
• When handling a circuit card, use a Field Service Kit to protect against static discharge (example: 3M
No. 8012 Portable Field Service Kit; available from NEC).
• When touching a circuit card, be sure to wear the grounded wrist strap provided with the Portable Field
Service Kit.
• Set the MB switch to the UP position and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.
CHAPTER 4
Page 274
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

• When holding a circuit card with bare hands, do not touch the component mounted side of the card or
the connector portion.

Wrist Strap
Place the Circuit
Card on a
conductive sheet.

Connector
(Contact) Portion

Connect ground wire to the Earth
terminal of the Module Group.

(Component-Mounted
Side)

Front Side

Card Puller Tab

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 275
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

• When placing a circuit card on a table or other flat surface, spread out a conductive sheet and set the
card on the sheet.

Circuit
Card

Perform work on the conductive sheet
while wearing a grounded wrist strap.

• Set the MB switch of the circuit card to the UP position and confirm its mounting slot (Note). Then insert the card into its mounting slot.
Note:

Confirm that the color of the card puller tab is the same as the color of the label showing the Slot Number.

3. SYSTEM STARTUP PROCEDURE
The NAPs indicated in the following flowchart describe the procedures for powering on, starting up the system,
assigning Office Data, and checking the startup conditions.
START
Power ON:

NAP-200-018

Program Install/Load:

NAP-200-019

Office Data Assignment:

NAP-200-020

Check of Lamp Indication and System Messages:

NAP-200-021

Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU:

NAP-200-022

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 276
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-018
Sheet 1/2
Power ON

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Visual Inspection

Check whether any pins are shorting on the backplane of each
Module.
Check whether any foreign matter such as a cleaning fluid
residue is present on the connector portion of the circuit cards.
On each circuit card equipped with ROM (CPU, etc.), check
whether any pins of the ROM are bent or improperly seated.

Leave all circuit cards inserted
halfway

Mount all circuit cards (including PWR Supplies) in the
Module, leaving them inserted only halfway. (They should not
be inserted into their connectors.)

Check input voltage

Check insulation across the -48 V and G terminals on the power
receiving terminal of the Base Unit.
Turn power to the rectifier ON and check the voltage (DC -48V
± 5V) and its polarity on the power receiving terminal of the
Base Unit.

Turn ON Fan Units

Turn FAN UNIT ON.
Verify that air is blown upwards.
If the Fuse blows, the input polarity is reversed.
Turn OFF the FAN UNIT.
Correct polarity, replace the fuse and turn FAN UNIT ON.
Verify that the FAN blows air upwards.

Check PWR Supply

Check the Power Supplies for each Module one at a time. Check
Steps:
1. Turn circuit breaker OFF and insert the PWR Supply.
2. Turn circuit breaker ON (See Note).
3. Various lamps (Green) illuminate.
4. Observe the PWR Supply for a while and confirm that
nothing abnormal (unusual smell, smoke, etc.) occurs.
5. Turn the circuit breaker ON/OFF a few times and observe the
condition.
6. Turn the circuit breaker OFF and remove the PWR Supply.
Note:

If a Module is equipped with dual PWR Supplies, they
must be turned ON/OFF simultaneously.

A

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 277
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-018
Sheet 2/2
Power ON
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Insert all PWR Supplies

Insert all PWR Supplies into their positions.
Insertion Steps:
1. Turn each Power Supply’s circuit breaker OFF and insert
them one at a time.
2. Turn circuit breakers ON.
3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications (unusual
smell, smoke, alarm, etc.)

Insert and check Line/Trunk
circuit cards

Insert Line (16LC, etc.) and Trunk (16COT, etc.) circuit cards
into their backplane connectors one at a time and confirm that
no fuses are blown in the process.
Check Steps:
1. Set MB switch UP and insert the card.
2. Set MB switch DOWN.
3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications.
4. Set MB switch UP and remove the card.

Insert and check control system
cards

Insert control system circuit cards (TSW, MUX, etc.) one at a
time and confirm that no fuses are blown in the process.
Check Steps:
1. Set MB switch UP and insert the card.
2. Set MB switch DOWN.
3. Confirm that there are no abnormal indications.
4. Set MB switch UP and remove the card.

Note:

If a Module contains dual PWR Supplies, they must be turned ON or OFF simultaneously.
For LNs: IMG3 → IMG2 → IMG1 → IMG0
IMG3: PIM0 → PIM1 → PIM2 → PIM3
IMG2: TSWM1 → PIM0 → PIM1 → PIM2 →PIM3
IMG1: TSWM0 → PIM0 → PIM1 → PIM2 → PIM3
IMG0: CPR0 → CPR1 → PIM0 → PIM1 → PIM2 → PIM3
For ISW: CPR0 → CPR1 → ISWM
For LNs:IMG3 → IMG2 → IMG1 → IMG0
IMG3: PIM3 → PIM2 → PIM1 → PIM0
IMG2: PIM3 → PIM2 → PIM1 → PIM0 → TSWM1
IMG1: PIM3 → PIM2 → PIM1 → PIM0 → TSWM0
IMG0: PIM3 → PIM2 → PIM1 → PIM0 → CPR1 → CPR0
For ISW: ISWM → CPR1 → CPR0

END
CHAPTER 4
Page 278
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-019
Sheet 1/6
Program Install and Load

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Procedure for Program Install consists of the following items.
Perform the procedures below for all the LNs and ISW, individually:
START

Off-Line Start Up
Refer to (a) Procedure for Off-Line Start Up

HD Initial

Refer to (b) Procedure for HD Initial
• HD format
• Generic Software (1) Install
• Making Directory in the HD

• Generic Software 2~11
• Internal MAT Software 1~2
• TCP/IP Software 1
Install

Refer to (c) Procedure for Basic Software Install

Application
Software Install

Refer to (d) Procedure for Application Software Install

END

Note:

The control of 7-seg LED is the next page.
(Case of program install and restart processing)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 279
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-019
Sheet 2/6
Program Install and Load
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(a) Procedure for off-line start-up

Status change of 7 Segment LED on the EMA card

START

Set the SENSE switch
corresponding to the
system to be initialized
(CPU0, CPU1) to “c” on
the CPU Front Panel.

• Push the CPURST
button on the CPU
Front Panel.
Startup
end

or

(OFF-LINE MODE)

• Turn Power-SW ON.

END

Note:

Procedures (a) through (e) must be performed in all LNs and ISW, individually.

CHAPTER 4
Page 280
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-019
Sheet 3/6
Program Install and Load
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(b) Procedure for HD Initial

Status change of 7 Segment LED on the CPU Front
Panel.

START

Set the SENSE switch
corresponding to the
system to be initialized
(CPU0, CPU1) to “1” on
the CPU Front Panel.

Insert the FD Generic Disk 1
into the FDD.
1
Flip the MBR key on the
CPU Front Panel [OFF →
ON → OFF].

2

3

• HD Format

Display end
END

SENS SW
‘1’

Note:

7SEG LED
→

→

FUNCTION
FORMAT → COPY

→ MAKING DIRECTORY

Procedures (a) through (e) must be performed in all LNs and ISW, individually.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 281
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-019
Sheet 4/6
Program Install and Load

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(c) Procedure for Generic Software (2 ~ 11) Internal
MAT Software (1 ~ 2), TCP / IP Software (1) Install

Status change of 7 Segment LED on the CPU Front
Panel.

START

Set the SENSE switch
corresponding to the
system to have DATA
installed (CPU0, CPU1)
to “3” on the CPU Front Panel.

Insert the FD Generic
Disk 2 into the FDD.

*

Flip the MBR key on the
CPU Front Panel card
OFF→ON→OFF.

* Repeat
Generic Software 3 ~ 11
Internal MAT Software 1 ~ 2
TCP/IP Software 1
END

WARNING: Removal or Make Busy of the HFD card is

not allowed while the Floppy Disk or Hard
Disk is being accessed.

Note:

Procedures (a) through (e) must be performed in all LNs and ISW, individually.

CHAPTER 4
Page 282
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-019
Sheet 5/6
Program Install and Load
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(d) Procedure for Application Software Install

Status change of 7 Segment LED on the CPU Front
Panel.

START

Set the SENSE switch
corresponding to the
system to have DATA installed
(CPU0, CPU1)
to “3” on the CPU Front Panel.

Insert the FD “Application
Software” into the FDD.

Flip the MBR Key on the
CPU Front Panel
[OFF→ON→OFF].

END

WARNING: Removal or Make Busy of the HFD card is

INSTALL END

not allowed while the Floppy Disk or Hard
Disk is being accessed.

Note:

Procedures (a) through (e) must be performed in all LNs and ISW, individually.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 283
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-019
Sheet 6/6
Program Install and Load
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(e) Procedure for Program Load
This section describes system start-up procedure in which a program is loaded from the HD to the MEM and the
data memory is cleared.
START
Program Load

Set the SENSE switch to “1” (restart with data
memory clear) on the CPU Front Panel and press the
CPURST button.
The system is initialized when LOADING from the
HD to the MEM is completed.
Verify that the OPE lamp on the CPU Front Panel
starts flashing.

Set On-Line mode

Set the SENSE switch to “2” (restart without data
memory clear) on the CPU Front Panel.

END
Note:

Procedures (a) through (e) must be performed in all LNs and ISW, individually.

CHAPTER 4
Page 284
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 1/6
Assignment of Office Data

This NAP explains the procedure to assign office data to each node and ISW, after the Program Install and Load in
NAP-200-019 are thoroughly completed. Follow the procedures below:
START
Start up the MAT
Enter basic data in ISW

Assign the following basic data via the MAT per the office
data programming sheet.
“ATIM”: Assignment of Data and Time
“ASYD (SYS1, 2, & 3)” /”ASYDL(SYS1 & 2)”:
System Data assignment Note1

Assignment of Office Data

Assign the remaining office data according to the office data
programming sheet. Note 2

Save Office Data onto HD

Save the Office Data onto hard disk (HD) from the MEM
using the MEM_HDD command.

Save Office Data onto HD/FD

Save the Office Data onto a floppy disk (FD) from the HD of
ISW using the HDD_FDD command.

Enter basic data in LNs

Assign the following basic data via the MAT per the office
data programming sheet.

Note 3

“ATIM”: Assignment of Data and Time
“ASYD (SYS1, 2, & 3)” /”ASYDL(SYS1 & 2)”:
System Data assignment Note1
“ASYDN”: System Data Assignment for NDM
(Required only when the node is designated as the
Network Control Node. For details, refer to the Fusion
Network System Manual.)
“AUNT”: Unit Data assignment
A
Note 1: See Sheet 3/6 in this NAP.
Note 2: See Sheet 4/6, 5/6 in this NAP.
Note 3: The procedures here are required in each LN, independently.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 285
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 2/6
Assignment of Office Data
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Assignment of Office Data
Note 3

Assign the remaining office data according to the office data
programming sheet. Note 2
(Assign all the remaining NDM data, too, if the node is
designated as the Network Control Node. For details, refer to
the Fusion Network System Manual.)

Confirmation of data assignment
at NCN

If the Network Control Node (NCN) exists outside the
installed system (i.e. other IPX series is designated as the
NCN), make sure that all the network-level data (NDM data)
has been properly assigned at the NCN. (Reference: the
Fusion Network System Manual)

Broadcasting of NDM Data

Transfer all the NDM data, assigned at the NCN, to each
Local Node and ISW, by using the CBCN command.

Save Office Data onto HD

Save the Office Data onto hard disk (HD) from the MEM
using the MEM_HDD command.

Note 3

Save Office Data onto HD/FD
Note 3

Initialization of the system

Save the Office Data onto a floppy disk (FD) from the HD
using the HDD_FDD command.
Initialize the whole system (ISW + all LNs) simultaneously,
using the keys on the TOPU of ISW
Set the INITIAL SELECT key to SYSTEM side.
Set the EFFECT key to ON side.
Set the SYSTEM DATA key to NON LOAD side, and
PROGRAM key to NON LOAD side.
Perform the system initialization by pressing the
START button.

END
Note 2: See Sheet 4/6, 5/6 in this NAP.
Note 3: The procedures here are required in each LN, independently.

CHAPTER 4
Page 286
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 3/6
Assignment of Office Data

Note 1: To initially start up the system, the data below must be at least assigned in the following nodes:

1.

Data to be assigned in ISW only
ASYD
SYS1
INDEX 62, bit 6-7 (ACT/ST BY Changeover at Routine Diagnosis)
INDEX 86, bit 2-3 (Fault Recovery on TRK Ineffective Hold Detection)
INDEX 87 (Routine Diagnosis Program Start Time (Hour))
INDEX 88 (Routine Diagnosis Program Start Time (Minute))
INDEX 89 (Items of Routine Diagnosis)
INDEX 90 (Items of Routine Diagnosis)
ASYDL SYS1
INDEX 929, b0-3 (TSW mounting condition in ISW)
INDEX 930-933 (FPC No. of the LN to which TSW0 is connected)
Note: Available when SYS1, INDEX929, b0=1.
INDEX 934-937 (FPC No. of the LN to which TSW1 is connected)
Note: Available when SYS1, INDEX929, b1=1.
INDEX 938-941 (FPC No. of the LN to which TSW2 is connected)
Note: Available when SYS1, INDEX929, b2=1.
INDEX 942-945 (FPC No. of the LN to which TSW3 is connected)
Note: Available when SYS1, INDEX929, b3=1.

Note:

In the following INDEX of ASYD command, default data, as shown below, has been already assigned.
These data must not be changed on the ISW side.
SYS1
INDEX 0 (Number of Module Group) = 01H (fixed)
INDEX 198 (IMG Mounting Status) = 03H (fixed)

2.

Data to be assigned in LN only
ASYD
SYS1
INDEX 0 (Number of Module Group)
INDEX 1 (Number of Main Processor)
INDEX 194, bit 0 = (MP Mounting Status)
INDEX 198, bit 0-1 (IMG0 Mounting Status), bit 4-5 (IMG1 Mounting Status) 0/1=Not mounted/Mounted
INDEX 199, bit 0-1 (IMG2 Mounting Status), bit 4-5 (IMG3 Mounting Status) 0/1=Not mounted/Mounted
INDEX 232, bit 0-2 (Items of CF Clear)
INDEX 304 (Items of Routine Back-up)

Note:

To enable the ISW to totally supervise the system-base Routine Diagnosis program, assign “FFFF” for
SYS1, INDEX87, 88 of each LN. If other data is assigned at the LNs, the diagnosis works individually on
each node basis.
ASYDL SYS1
INDEX 928 (Recognition of FPC No. of ISW)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 287
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 4/6
Assignment of Office Data

3.

Data to be assigned in both LN and ISW
ASYD
SYS1
INDEX 3 (Configuration of Time Division Switch)
INDEX 30 (Mounting capacity of Data Memory)
INDEX 31 (Mounting capacity of Common Memory)
INDEX 58, b0 (Configuration of CPU) 0/1=Single/Dual
INDEX 64, b0=0 (µ-law for Time Division Switch)
INDEX 86, b0-1, 4, 6-7 (Details on System Message Output)
INDEX 91, b6-7 (PLO mounting condition)
INDEX 96-115 (Office Name for each LN/ISW) Note

Note:

Office Name can be entered also via AOFC command.

CHAPTER 4
Page 288
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 5/6
Assignment of Office Data

Note 2: When assigning office data, be sure to enter the following Fusion Trunk Data, too, by using ACRD and

AFPC command. Refer to “Office Data Specification Manual” for Data Sheet.
1.

ACRD: Assignment of Route Class Data
• In LNs, assign the connection route class data for the direction to ISW
• In ISW, assign the connection route class data for the direction to each LN

CDN

FUNCTION

DATA

1

TF

3

Type of Trunk Function

2

TCL

4

Trunk Class

3

RLP

2

Trunk Release Pattern

4

SMDR

0

Detailed Billing Information

5

LSG

12/13 Note

Line Signal

6

PAD

0

PAD control

7

TRKS

0

Trunk Selection Sequence

8

TC/EC

0

Trunk Coda/Echo Canceller Control

9

FINT

0

Fusion Interface Specification

10

FPEG

0

Fusion-PEG

11

TC

0

Timer Class

12

MTC

0

Miscellaneous Timer Counter

13

STSEQ

0

Status ENQ

14

FGH

0

-

15

MMN

0

Kind of Multiple Equipment

16

LKIND

1

Kind of Fusion Link

Note:

2.

CONTENTS

REMARKS

Assign “12” for this system.
AFPC: Assignment of FCCH Routing Data for Local Data Memory
• In each LN, assign connection routes (C_RT) toward ISW/other LN(s).
• In ISW, assign connection routes (C_RT) toward each LN.
(Example: See Figure 020-1 on the next page)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 289
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-020
Sheet 6/6
Assignment of Office Data

This figure shows an example for connection route (C_RT) data assignment by AFPC command.

ISW LN0
FPC: 10
FCH: 0
C_RT: xxx
FCHN/FPC: 10

LN1 ISW
FPC: 20
FCH: 0
C_RT: yyy
FCHN/FPC: 20

LN1 LN0

ISW LN1

LN1

C_RT
(yyy)

ISW

(FPC=11)

(FPC=20)

FPC: 10
FCH: 0
C_RT: yyy
FCHN/FPC: 20

C_RT
(zzz)

LN1 LN2
FPC: 12
FCH: 0
C_RT: yyy
FCHN/FPC: 20

LN2
(FPC=12)

LN2 ISW
FPC: 20
FCH: 0
C_RT: zzz
FCHN/FPC: 20

LN2 LN0

LN2 LN1

FPC: 10
FCH: 0
C_RT: zzz
FCHN/FPC: 20

FPC: 11
FCH: 0
C_RT: zzz
FCHN/FPC: 20

FPC: 11
FCH: 0
C_RT: yyy
FCHN/FPC: 11

C_RT
(xxx)

ISW LN2
FPC: 12
FCH: 0
C_RT: zzz
FCHN/FPC: 12

LN0
(FPC=10)

LN0 ISW
FPC: 20
FCH: 0
C_RT: xxx
FCHN/FPC: 20

LN0 LN1
FPC: 11
FCH: 0
C_RT: xxx
FCHN/FPC: 20

LN0 LN2
FPC: 12
FCH: 0
C_RT: xxx
FCHN/FPC: 20

Figure 020-1 Example of Connection Route Data Assignment (AFPC Command)

CHAPTER 4
Page 290
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-021
Sheet 1/5
Check of Lamp Indications and System
Messages

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Check lamp indications on Line/
Trunk circuit cards

Check lamp indications on each of the assigned Line/
Trunk circuit cards.
OPE lamp (G):

ON

BL lamp (R):

OFF

If the lamp indications are other than above, investigate
per Chapter 6, “FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS”
Check lamp indications on control
system circuit cards

The OPE lamps (G) are shown in Figure 021-1 through
Figure 021-4.
If any alarm lamp illuminates, check switch settings on the
circuit card, mounting positions of the cards within that
module, control cable connections (Front & Backplane),
and Office Data assignments.

Confirm that no alarm lamps (R) / (Y)
are illuminating on the TOPU

For explanations of the TOPU (Top Unit) lamp
indications, refer to the System Operation and
Maintenance Manual.

Check System Messages

Display System Messages using MAT command
“DFTD.”
If a System Message which indicates a fault is displayed,
investigate and recover the fault referring to the System
Operation and Maintenance Manual.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 291
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-021
Sheet 2/5
Check of Lamp Indications and System
Messages

This figure shows the LED indications (example) of ISW.
System State
CPU 0 -> ACT
TSW 0 -> ACT
PLO 0 -> ACT

PLO
OPE

TSW
IOGT

MB

TSW ACT

TSW ACT
TSW MB
MB
TSW MBR
MBR

FRONT
FRONT

FRONT
ISW
HSW

TOPU

HSW ACT

02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
HSW11 (PU-SW01)

HSW10 (PU-SW01)

TSW13 (PU-SW00)

TSW12 (PU-SW00)

TSW11 (PU-SW00)

TSW10 (PU-SW00)
PLO1
(PH-CK16-A/17-A)

IOGT1 (PH-GT10)

IOGT0 (PH-GT10)
PLO0
(PH-CK16-A/17-A)

TSW03 (PU-SW00)

TSW02 (PU-SW00)

03

TSW01 (PU-SW00)

TSW00 (PU-SW00)

00

HSW01 (PU-SW01)

FRONT

HSW00 (PU-SW01)

MB

ISWM

04
IMG 0

OPE

OPE OPE/MB CPU OPE
EMA (PH-PC49)

IOC(PH-IO24)

MMC(PH-M22)

LPM
IMG 0
CPU OPE

DSP 0 (PZ-DK224)

DSP 1 (PZ-DK224)

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

Legend
:

Note:

Lamp is ON

:

Lamp is Flashing

This example assumes that the system adopts the fully expanded configuration.
Figure 021-1 LED Indications of ISW in Normal Operation (example)

CHAPTER 4
Page 292
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

:

Lamp is OFF

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-021
Sheet 3/5
Check of Lamp Indications and System
Messages

This figure shows the LED indications (example) for a fully expanded IMG0 system.
System State
CPU 0 -> ACT
PLO 0 -> ACT
TSW 0 ->777 ACT

IMG0 (LN)
TOPU
13

14

MUX ACT
MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

13

14

MB

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

FRONT

13

14

MUX
MUX ACT

MUX ACT

PIM2

FANU
MUX ACT
MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

13

14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM1

MUX ACT

PIM0

DSP 1 (PZ-DK224)
00

03

04
IMG 0

OPE

OPE/MB

IOC(PH-1024)

EMA(PH-PC40)

MMC(PH-M22)

LPM

OPE

CPU OPE

IMG 0
CPU OPE

BASEU

DSP 0 (PZ-DK224)

FRONT VIEW
Legend
: Lamp is ON (Green)

: Lamp is Flashing (Green)

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 021-2 LED Indications of IMG0 in Normal Operation (example)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 293
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-021
Sheet 4/5
Check of Lamp Indications and System
Messages

This figure shows the LED indications (example) for a fully expanded IMG1/2.
System State

IMG1/2 (LN)
TOPU

TSW 0 -> ACT
PLO 0 -> ACT
13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

MUX
MUX ACT

13 14

MB
MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM2

FRONT

FANU
13 14

GT

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM1

TSW
TSW ACT

OPE/MB
13 14

MB
TSW ACT

PIM0
FRONT

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

MB
MBR
MBR

FRONT

08 09 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

OPE/MB

BASEU
MB
Note 2

Note 1

DLKC

ACT
Note 1

TSW 13 (PH-SW12)
TSW 12 (PH-SW12)
TSW 11 (PH-SW12)
TSW 10 (PH-SW12)
TSW 03 (PH-SW12)
TSW 02 (PH-SW12)
TSW 01 (PH-SW12)
TSW 00 (PH-SW12)
GT (PA-GT09)
GT (PA-GT09)
DLKC (PH-PC20)
DLKC (PH-PC20)

TSWM0/1

PLO

MB

FRONT

FRONT VIEW
Legend
: Lamp is ON

FRONT

: Lamp is OFF

Note 1: PLO (PH-CK16A) for TSWM0.

CLK (PH-CK18) for TSWM1.
Note 2: DLKC (PH-PC20) cards are not used in IMG2 (TSWM1).
Figure 021-3 LED Indications of IMG1/2 in Normal Operation (example)
CHAPTER 4
Page 294
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-021
Sheet 5/5
Check of Lamp Indications and System
Messages

This figure shows the LED indications (example) of a fully expanded system of IMG 3.
System State

IMG 3 (LN)

TSW0 0 -> ACT

TOPU
13 14

MUX
MUX ACT

13 14

MB

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM2

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

FRONT

FANU
13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM1

13 14
MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM0

DUMMY

BASEU
FRONT VIEW
Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 021-4 LED Indications of IMG3 in Normal Operation (example)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 295
Revision 1.0

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-022
Sheet 1/2
Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Test Outline:

The System has Alarm Lamps on the TOPU of ISW and IMG0 of each LN.
Figure 022-1 shows the Alarm Lamps on the TOPU.
For more information about each lamp, see the “System Operations and Maintenance Manual.”

G

R

R

R

R

PWR

SMJ

SMN

MJ

MN

ON

Y
SUP/IP

ALM

• G : green
• R : red
• Y : yellow

Figure 022-1 Alarm Lamps on the TOPU

CHAPTER 4
Page 296
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SYSTEM STARTUP

NAP-200-022
Sheet 2/2
Check of Alarm Lamps of the TOPU
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Test of MJ (MAJOR) Lamp

Set the circuit breakers of the Power Supplies (PWR0, 1)
in a PIM to OFF (About 10 seconds later, set the circuit
breaker(s) back ON.
Confirm that the MJ lamp (red) on the TOPU
illuminates.
Cancel the alarm indication by pressing the ALM RST
button on the TOPU.

Test of MN (MINOR) Lamp

Take an act side RGU Fuse out of the PWR card.
Confirm that the MN lamp (red) on the TOPU
illuminates.
Cancel the alarm indication by pressing the ALM RST
button on the TOPU.

Test of SUP/IP (SUPERVISORY)
Lamp

On the EMA Circuit card, flip the MB switch DOWNUP-DOWN
Confirm that the SUP/IP lamp (yellow) on the TOPU
illuminates.
Cancel the alarm indication by pressing the ALM RST
button on the TOPU.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 4
Page 297
Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 4
Page 298
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

1. HOW TO ENTER DATA IN THE TEST CHECK COLUMN
Each NAP in this chapter has check column for test result entry for each test item (see Figure 5-1). This paragraph explains the method of entering test result into the check column concerned using Figure 5-1 as an example.
1.

Method of Entry
Each check column consists of two sections of “PROVIDED” and “CHECK”. If the equipment or service
feature pertaining to the test item is provided in the system, enter “*” in the PROVIDED section. At the
time of performing installation tests, the test item with “*” marked in the PROVIDED section must be tested without exception.
In the “CHECK” column, enter the results of each test as follows:
• When the test result is good:

“OK”

• When the test result is no good: “×”
2.

Fault Recovery
If a fault is discovered as a result of an installation test, enter “√” into the related check sheet. After finishing
all tests in the same category, be sure to repair the detected fault before proceeding to the next test.

3.

Entry into Check Column after Fault Recovery
After fault recovery work has been completed, a test must be performed to confirm that the fault has been
completely corrected. If the result of this confirmation indicates that the fault has been corrected, enter
“OK” next to the “×” entered previously. This entry should appear as: “× OK.”

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 299
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

•

This example is NAP-200-024: Dial Tone Connection Test
When “*” is already printed in the “PROVIDED” section, the item concerned
is a basic function of the system. Test the item without exception.

Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is turning ON on the RST circuit cards.
Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is turning ON on the LC circuit cards.

*
*

Lift handset.
Confirm dial tone.
Check whether the Busy lamp (R) is turning ON for the connected ORT and
LC.

*
*

Continue listening to dial tone for about 12 seconds.
Confirm that dial tone changes to reorder tone.
*

Continue listening to reorder tone for about 30 seconds.
When System Data (SYS1,
INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 0)
are assigned.

Confirm that reorder tone changes to
“no tone.”

When System Data (SYS1,
INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 1 or
b3 = 1, b4 = 0) are assigned.

Confirm that howler tone is heard
after reorder tone stops.
(Analog Ports only)

Hang up and release the connection.

When “PROVIDED” section is blank, the installer should enter “*”
mark as per the Job Specification.
The item marked with “*” must be tested without exception.

Figure 5-1 Example of Entry to Test Check Column

CHAPTER 5
Page 300
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

These are the
Test Check
Columns, the left
column is
“PROVIDE”
column and the
right columns is
the “CHECK”
columns.

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

2. BASIC CONNECTION TEST
2.1 Outline

After the system has been started up, establish some basic connections and verify that the system operates normally.
2.2 Basic Connection Test Procedure

Perform tests on the operations of the processors and the system by referring to the NAP Number indicated to
the right of each item in the following flowchart. If an operation cannot be performed satisfactorily, perform the
necessary repair procedure(s) based on Chapter 5, “INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE”.
START
Dial Tone Connection Test:

NAP-200-023

Station-to-Station Connection Test:

NAP-200-024

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 301
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

dial tone, reorder tone

NAP-200-023
Sheet 1/1
Dial Tone Connection Test

A

LC

ORT

START
Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is illuminating on the RST circuit cards.
Check whether the OPE lamp (G) is illuminating on the LC circuit cards.

*
*

Lift handset.
Confirm dial tone.

*

Check whether the Busy lamp (R) is illuminating for the connected ORT and
LC.

*

Continue listening to dial tone for about 12 seconds.
*

Confirm that dial tone changes to Reorder Tone.
Continue listening to reorder tone for about 30 seconds.
When System Data (SYS1,
INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 0) are
assigned.

Confirm that reorder tone changes to “no
tone”.

When System Data (SYS1,
INDEX 64, b3 = 0, b4 = 1 or
b3 = 1, b4 = 0) are assigned.

Confirm that howler tone is heard after reorder
tone stops. (Analog Ports only)

Hang up and release the connection.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 302
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-024
Sheet 1/2
Station to Station Connection Test

START
Confirm that a connection can be established between Station “A” and Station “B.”
Station “A” goes off-hook.
Station “A” hears dial tone.

*

Station “A” dials the station number of Station “B.”
Station “A” confirms that dial tone stops when the first digit has been dialed.

*

Station “A” confirms that ringback tone is heard after dialing ends.

*

Station “B” hears ringing on the telephone set.

*

Station “B” lifts handset and answers the call.
After answering, both Stations “A” and “B” confirm that they can talk with
each other.

*

Stations “A” and “B” hang up. The connection is released.
END
Note:

For this test, there are three patterns for connections which possibly can be set up. Refer to Figure 024-1
on the next page.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 303
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-024
Sheet 2/2
Station to Station Connection Test


Self-Node
(ex. LN0)

ELN
Dial T

dial tone, reorder tone

ORT

Other Node
(ex. LN1)

ISW
LC/
ELC

LC/
ELC

STN B

STN A
Fusion Link

Fusion Link

RG


When Station A in IMG0/1 calls Station B in IMG2/3 of the same node.
When Station A in IMG2/3 calls Station B in IMG0/1 of the same node.
Self-Node
(ex. LN0)

ELN
Dial T

dial tone, reorder tone

ORT

ISW

LC/
ELC

STN A

LC/
ELC

STN B

FCCS Link


When Station A in IMG0/1 calls Station B in IMG0/1 of the same node.
When Station A in IMG2/3 calls Station B in IMG2/3 of the same node.
Self-Node
(ex. LN0)

ELN
Dial T

dial tone, reorder tone

ORT
LC/
ELC

STN A

LC/
ELC

ISW: Inter-node Switch
LN: Local Node
TELN: Telephone Number

STN B

Figure 024-1 Station-to-Station Connection Test

CHAPTER 5
Page 304
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

3. SYSTEM INITIALIZED TEST
3.1 Outline

Tests are to be performed on the restart processing (reinitialization) and system changeover functions which enable the system to restart its operations and services.
3.2 System Initialized Test Procedure

The System Changeover Test and Initialization Tests are to be performed per the NAP Numbers indicated to the
right of each item in the following flowchart.
START
System Changeover Test:

NAP-200-025

System Initialization Test:

NAP-200-026

Circuit Card Initialization Test:

NAP-200-027

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 305
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 1/13
System Changeover Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Test Outline
Tests are to be performed to see if the ACT/ST-BY of the following equipment is normally changed over:
1.

Control Systems in each Local Node (LN)

2.

Control Systems in ISW

3.

Speech Path Systems in each LN (TSWM0/TSWM1)

4.

Speech Path Systems in ISW + all LNs as a whole

5.

PLO

CHAPTER 5
Page 306
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 2/13
System Changeover Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

1. Control System changeover in each LN
Follow the procedures below to perform the Control System changeover tests in each Local Node (LN). This
test must be performed in each LN independently:
START
Control System changeover
via MBR key on the CPR
DSP (PZ-DK224)

On the CPR DSP on which CPU OPE lamp is illuminating, flip the
MBR key DOWN → UP → DOWN (OFF → ON → OFF).
Lamp indication on the DSP changes to “DSP in ST-BY mode” as
shown in Figure 025-1.
System messages “7-C” and “7-D” are displayed in succession.

Control System changeover
via CPU SEL key on the
EMA card. (Forced
Changeover).

Designate CPU changeover via CPU SEL key on the EMA (PHPC40) card.
• CPU SEL key=UP:
CPU of No. 0 system goes active (ACT)
• CPU SEL key=DOWN: CPU of No. 1 system goes active (ACT)

Confirm the changed lamp indications on both DSP in ACT/ST-BY
mode as shown in Figure 025-1.
System messages “7-C” and “7-D” are displayed in succession.

END
Note:

This changeover can also be performed via the CMODI/CMOD command. Refer to the “System Operations
and Maintenance Manual.”
DSP (Front View)
MBR

CPUOPE

DSP (Front View)
MBR

WOT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2

CPUOPE WOT IMG0
IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

IMG3

MBR key
STATUS

1

STATUS

2

: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is Flashing

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 025-1 DSP in ACT/ST-BY Mode (Local Node)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 307
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 3/13
System Changeover Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

2. Control System changeover in ISW
Follow the procedures below to perform the Control System changeover tests in ISW:
START
Control System changeover
via MBR key on the CPR
DSP (PZ-DK224)

On the CPR DSP on which CPU OPE lamp is illuminating, flip the
MBR key DOWN → UP → DOWN (OFF → ON → OFF).
Lamp indication on the DSP changes to “DSP in ST-BY mode” as
shown in Figure 025-2.
System messages “7-C” and “7-D” are displayed in succession.

Control System changeover
via CPU SEL key on the
EMA card.
(Forced Changeover).

Designate CPU changeover via CPU SEL key on the EMA (PH-PC
40) card.
• CPU SEL key=UP: CPU of No. 0 system goes active (ACT)
• CPU SEL key=DOWN: CPU of No. 1 system goes active (ACT)
Confirm the changed lamp indications on both DSP in ACT/ST-BY
mode as shown in Figure 025-2.
System messages “7-C” and “7-D” are displayed in succession.

END
Note:

This changeover can also be performed via the CMODI command. Refer to the “System Operations and
Maintenance Manual.”
DSP (Front View)
MBR

CPUOPE

DSP (Front View)
MBR

WOT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2

CPUOPE WOT IMG0
IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

IMG3

MBR key
STATUS

1

STATUS

2

DSP in ACT mode

DST in ST-BY mode
Legend
: Lamp is ON

Note:

: Lamp is Flashing

This figure assumes that the system adopts the fully-expanded configuration.
Figure 025-2 DSP in ACT/ST-BY Mode (ISW)

CHAPTER 5
Page 308
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

: Lamp is OFF

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 4/13
System Changeover Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

3. Speech Path System changeover in each ISW
Follow the procedures below to perform the Speech Path System changeover tests in ISW:
START
Change over the ACT/ST-BY of Speech Path Systems in ISW via key operation.
On the active GT (PH-GT10) card in ISW, flip the MB key DOWN → UP → DOWN (OFF
→ ON → OFF).
Make sure that the ACT/ST-BY of all Speech Path Systems in LN0/1/2/3 are totally changed
over (Refer to Figures 025-3 and 025-7).
Circuit cards to be checked

• TSW (PH-SW12)
• DLKC (PH-PC20)

• TSW (PH-SW12)

• MUX (PH-PC36)
Analyze the system messages “7-E”, “7-F” and “1-T” to be displayed automatically.
END
Note:

This changeover can also be performed via the CMODI/CMOD command. Refer to the “System Operations
and Maintenance Manual.”

Note:

If you change over from LNs, the entire system will be changed over. Therefore, it is best to change over
from ISW.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 309
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 5/13
System Changeover Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

4. Total Speech Path System changeover
Perform the total Speech Path System changeover test by referring to the flowchart below. As suggested in the
previous page, the ACT/ST-BY of Speech Path Systems can be differently set in every Local Node (LN). However, excepting a particular case, the Speech Path changeover is normally performed on a system basis as shown
in this page:
START
Change over the ACT/ST-BY of the whole Speech Path Systems via key operation.
On the active IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISWM, flip the MBR key DOWN → UP → DOWN
(OFF → ON → OFF).
Make sure that the ACT/ST-BY of all Speech Path Systems (in ISW and each Local Node)
are totally changed over (Refer to Figures 025-3, 025-5, 025-6 and 025-7).
Circuit cards to be checked



• IOGT (PH-GT10) • TSW (PH-SW12)
• TSW (PH-SW12)
• TSW (PU-SW00)
• DLKC (PH-PC20)
• MUX (PH-PC36)
• HSW (PH-SW01) • MUX (PH-PC36)
Note: Check the whole cards in all LNs and ISW.
Analyze the system messages 17-Y, 17-Z and 1-T to be displayed automatically.
END
Note:

This changeover can also be performed via the CMODI/CMOD command. Refer to the “System Operations
and Maintenance Manual.”

CHAPTER 5
Page 310
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 6/13
System Changeover Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

ISW

PH-GT10

green

LN

PU-SW00

PU-SW01

PH-SW12

PH-PC36

green

green

green

green

green

MUX ACT

OPE/MB

HSW ACT

TSW ACT

TSW ACT
MB

TSW MB

MBR

TSW MBR

IOGT: Active

TSW: Active

TSW ACT

TSW ACT

MBR

TSW MBR

MB

MB

TSW MBR

TSW: Active

TSW ACT

HSW ACT
TSW MB

TSW: ST-BY

MB

HSW: Active

MB

IOGT: ST-BY

TSW ACT
MB

PH-PC20

MB

MUX: Active

MUX ACT
MB
TSW MBR

HSW: ST-BY

TSW: ST-BY

DLKC: Active

OPE/MB
MB

MUX: ST-BY

MB

DLKC: ST-BY

Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 025-3 LEDs and Switches for Speech Path System Changeover

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 311
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 7/13
System Changeover Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

5. PLO changeover
Perform the PLO changeover test referring to the flowchart below.
START
Change over the ACT/ST-BY of the PLO systems in each LN via key operation.
On the active PLO (PH-CK16-A) card in TSWM0, flip the MB key DOWN → UP → DOWN
(OFF → ON → OFF).
Make sure that the ACT/ST-BY of the whole PLO systems (PLO in TSWM0 and CLK in
TSWM1) in the same Local Node (LN) are totally changed over. (Refer to Figures 025-4 and
025-7.)
Circuit cards to be checked
< TSWM0 >
Note
• PLO (PH-CK16-A)
< TSWM1 >
Note
• CLK (PH-CK18)
Note: Check the whole cards in the same node
Analyze the system messages "7-U" and "7-V" to be displayed automatically.
Repeat the steps above for all the remaining Local Nodes.
Change over the ACT/ST-BY of the PLO systems in ISW via key operation.
On the active PLO (PH-CK16-A/PH-CK17-A) card in ISWM, flip the MB key DOWN → UP
→ DOWN (OFF → ON → OFF).
Make sure that the ACT/ST-BY of the PLO systems (PLO0/PLO1 in ISWM) are securely
changed over. (Refer to Figures 025-4 and 025-6)
Circuit cards to be checked
< ISWM >
Note
• PLO (PH-CK16-A/PH-CK17-A)
Note: Even though the PLO in ISWM is once
changed over, the PLO/CLK in each LN are not
changed over.
Analyze the system messages "7-U" and "7-V" to be displayed automatically.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 312
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 8/13
System Changeover Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

[ISW]

green
OPE

OPE

MB

MB

PLO: Active

PH-CK16-A / PH-CK17-A

PLO: ST-BY

[Local Nodes]

green
OPE

OPE

MB

MB

PLO: Active

PH-CK16-A

PLO: ST-BY

green
OPE

OPE

MB

MB

CLK: Active

PH-CK18

CLK: ST-BY
Legend

: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 025-4 LEDs and Switches for PLO Changeover
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 313
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 9/13
System Changeover Test

This figure roughly shows the general block diagram of the whole system.

To MUX To MUX
(IMG0) (IMG1)

:

Circuit Card
(No. 0 System)

:

Circuit Card
(No. 1 System)

TSW00

Note 1
HSW00, 01 for No. 0 System /
HSW10, 11 for No. 1 System

TSW01

TSW00

TSW03

PLO

TSW01

TSW02

MISC

IOC

CLK

GT

GT

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

CPU

LN1

LANI

To MUX To MUX
(IMG0) (IMG1)

To MUX
(IMG2)

To MUX
(IMG3)

Note 2

Note 1

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW00

TSW03

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW
TSW01

TSW02

TSW03
PLO

CLK

DLKC

Note 4
PLO

Note 3

TSWM0

GT

GT

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

TSWM1

IOGT

MISC

IOC

ISAGT
MISC

IOC

EMA
CPU

EMA

To PLO of
LN2/3

CPU

LN0

LANI

LANI

ISW

FCCS Link

< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >
ISAGT: PZ-GT13
LANI: PZ-PC19
HSW: PU-SW01
PLO: PH-CK16/17-A

IOGT: PH-GT10
EMA: PH-PC40

ISW: PU-SW00
IOC: PH-IO24

< LN (Local Node) >
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20

LANI: PZ-PC19

GT: PH-GT09

TSW: PH-SW12

DLKC: PH-PC20

PLO: PH-CK16-A

CLK: PH-CK18

EMA: PH-PC40

IOC: PH-IO24

MUX: PH-PC36

Figure 025-5 General Block Diagram of the Whole System (1/2)
CHAPTER 5
Page 314
Revision 1.0

TSWM1

EMA

Note 4
PLO-CLK CA-n Cables

TSW00

TSW03

Note 4
TSWM0

Note 3
ISW-LN PLO CA-n Cables

To TSW
of LN3

TSW02

DLKC

Note 2
ISW-LN TSW CA-n Cables

To TSW
of LN2

To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 10/13
System Changeover Test

This figure roughly shows the general block diagram of the whole system.

To MUX To MUX

To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

(IMG0) (IMG1)

: Circuit Card
(No. 0 System)
: Circuit Card
(No. 1 System)

TSW00

Note 1
HSW00, 01 for No. 0 System /
HSW10, 11 for No. 1 System

TSW01

TSW03

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

CLK

PLO
DLKC

Note 4

Note 2
ISW-LN TSW CA-n Cables

TSWM0

Note 3
ISW-LN PLO CA-n Cables

MISC

IOC

GT

GT

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

TSWM1

EMA

Note 4
PLO-CLK CA-n Cables

To TSW To TSW
of LN2
of LN3

TSW02

CPU

LN1

LANI

To MUX To MUX
(IMG0) (IMG1)

To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

Note 2

Note 1

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW00

TSW03

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW
TSW00

TSW02

TSW01

TSW03
PLO

CLK

DLKC

Note 4

PLO

TSWM0

Note 3

GT

GT

TSWM1

IOGT

ISAGT-A
MISC

IOC

ISAGT-B

EMA

ISAGT
MISC

IOC

To PLO of
LN1

EMA
CPU

CPU

LN0

LANI

LANI

ISW

FCCS Link
< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >
ISAGT: PZ-GT13
LANI: PZ-PC19
HSW: PU-SW01
PLO: PH-CK16/17-A

IOGT: PH-GT10
EMA: PH-PC40

ISW: PU-SW00
IOC: PH-IO24

< LN (Local Node) >
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20

LANI: PZ-PC19

GT: PH-GT09

TSW: PH-SW12

DLKC: PH-PC20

PLO: PH-CK16-A

CLK: PH-CK18

EMA: PH-PC40

IOC: PH-IO24

MUX: PH-PC36

Figure 025-5 General Block Diagram of the Whole System (2/2)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 315
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 11/13
System Changeover Test

This figure shows a system block diagram of ISW, which adopts a dual configuration. As seen in the figure, ISW
has the following terminals for the ACT/ST-BY changeover of dual system equipment:
CPU: If the ACT/ST-BY of CPU (ISW) is once changed over, the whole controlling block (including CPU, ISAGT, LANI in ISW) are also changed over.
IOGT: If the ACT/ST-BY of IOGT (ISW) is once changed over, the whole switching block within the system
(IOGT, TSW, HSW in ISW and TSW, MUX, DLKC in all LNs) are also changed over.
However, PLO (in both ISW and each LN) is not affected.
PLO: If the ACT/ST-BY of PLO in ISW is once changed over, only the PLOs in ISW are solely changed over.
HSW 11
HSW 01
HSW 10

External Cables
HSW 00
(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)
To TSW of LN3

TSW 03

To TSW of LN2

TSW 02

To TSW of LN1

TSW 01

To TSW of LN0

TSW 00

TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS

External Cables
(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

TSW 13

To TSW of LN3

TSW 12

To TSW of LN2

TSW11

To TSW of LN1

TSW 10

To TSW of LN0
To PLO1 (TSWM0)
of each LN

PLO 1
PLO 0

External Cables
(ISW-LN PLO CA-n)

To PLO0 (TSWM0)
of each LN

Note

IOGT 1
IOGT 0

ISAGT CPR 1

CPR 0 ISAGT

CPU 1

CPU 0
LANI

LANI

LANI

LANI

MISC BUS
IOC/
MISC

EMA
FCCS Link

Note:

ISAGT: PZ-GT13

LANI : PZ-PC19

IOGT: PH-GT10

TSW : PU-SW00

HSW : PU-SW01

PLO : PH-CK16/17-A

EMA : PH-PC40

IOC : PH-IO24

Even though the ACT/ST-BY of PLO in ISW is once changed over, the PLO/CLK in each LN are not
changed over. This is because the PLOs in ISW and each LN (TSWM0) have multiple connections, respectively, via the backboard bus. For more details, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”
Figure 025-6 System Block Diagram for ISW Switching Network

CHAPTER 5
Page 316
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 12/13
System Changeover Test

This figure shows a system block diagram of LN, which adopts a dual configuration. As seen in the figure, each
LN has following terminals for the ACT/ST-BY changeover of dual system equipment:
CPU:
If the ACT/ST-BY of CPU is once changed over, the whole controlling block in the same node (including CPU, ISAGT, LANI) and GT in both TSWM0 and TSWM1 are also changed over.
GT (TSWM0): If the MBR key is flipped on the active GT (PH-GT09) card in TSWM0, the whole switching block
in IPX-U [IMG0/1 (TSW, MUX, DLKC) and IMG2/3 (TSW, MUX)] is totally changed over. However, PLO (in TSWM0) and CLK (in TSWM1) are not affected.
PLO (TSWM0):If the MB key is flipped on the active PLO (PH-CK16-A) card (in TSWM0), the ACT/ST-BY of
both PLOs in TSWM0 and CLKs in TSWM1 are totally changed over.
To/From TSW of ISWM

LN0/1/2/3

IMG 0

IMG 1

Line/Trunk PM

Line/Trunk PM

MUX

PM BUS
PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

MUX

MUX

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

PM BUS
PCM HW

PCM HW

PCM HW

PCM HW

MUX

MUX

External Cables
(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

MUX

TSW 12 TSW 13
TSW 02 TSW 03
TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS
DLKC 1
DLKC 0

PLO 1

From PLO
of ISWM

To CLK of
TSWM1

Note
PLO 0
External Cables
(ISW-LN PLO CA-n)

External Cables
(PLO-CLK CA-n)
GT 1

GT 0

TSWM0
To TSWM1

To TSWM1

ISAGT-B

ISAGT-A
ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

CPU 1
CPU 0

LANI

CPR 0

LANI

LANI

LANI

CPR 1

MISC BUS
IOC/
MISC

EMA

FCCS Link
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13
MUX: PH-PC36

Note:

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20
DLKC: PH-PC20

LANI: PZ-PC19
PLO: PH-CK16-A

GT: PH-GT09
EMA: PH-PC40

TSW: PH-SW12
IOC: PH-IO24

See “Note” on the previous page.
Figure 025-7 System Block Diagram for LN Switching Network (1/2)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 317
Revision 1.0

INSTALLATION TEST PROCEDURE

NAP-200-025
Sheet 13/13
System Changeover Test

LN0/1/2/3
To /From TSW of ISWM

IMG 2

IMG 3

Line/Trunk PM

Line/Trunk PM

MUX

MUX

PM BUS
PCM HW

MUX

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS
PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

PCM HW
MUX

External Cables
(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

MUX

TSW 12 TSW 13
TSW 02 TSW 03
TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS

CLK 1

From PLO
of ISWM

CLK 0

External Cable
(PLO-CLK CA-n)
GT 1

GT 0

To TSWM0

TSWM1

To TSWM0

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

CPU 1
CPU 0

LANI
LANI

CPR 0

LANI

LANI

CPR 1

MISC BUS
IOC/
MISC

EMA

FCCS Link
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20

LANI: PZ-PC19

GT: PH-GT09

MUX: PH-PC36

CLK: PH-CK18

EMA: PH-PC40

IOC: PH-IO24

TSW: PH-SW12

Figure 025-7 System Block Diagram for LN Switching Network (2/2)

CHAPTER 5
Page 318
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-026
Sheet 1/5
System Initialization Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Test Outline
Tests are to be performed to see if the system initialization can be executed on the following basis:
1.

System Initialization on a Local Node basis (in each Local Node individually)

2.

System Initialization in ISW only

3.

System Initialization on a system basis (in ISW and all Local Nodes simultaneously)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 319
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-026
Sheet 2/5
System Initialization Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

1. System Initialization on a Local Node basis
Perform the system initialization test in each Local Node (LN), using the keys on the TOPU (refer to Figure 0261):
START

*

On the TOPU of the LN to be tested, set the EFFECT key to “ON” side.
On the TOPU, set the SYSTEM DATA key to “NON LOAD” side, and PROGRAM key to “NON LOAD”
side.
Perform the system initialization by pressing the START button.
Confirm

When the system is initialized, the CPU OPE lamp on the DSP
of active CPR lights steady-green.
When the system is initialized, system message “7-B” is
displayed automatically.

Assign data and time via MAT command “ATIMN/ATIM”.
Repeat the steps above for all the remaining LNs.
END


PFT
ALM
RST

ON

PROGRAM

SYSTEM DATA
NON LOAD

INITIAL
START

LOAD

EFFECT
ON

LOAD
OFF
OFF

NON LOAD

Figure 026-1 Keys on the TOPU (Local Node)

CHAPTER 5
Page 320
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-026
Sheet 3/5
System Initialization Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

2. System Initialization in ISW
Perform the system initialization test in ISW, by using the keys on the TOPU (refer to Figure 026-2):
START

*

On the TOPU of ISW, set the INITIAL SELECT key to “SELF” side.
On the TOPU of ISW, set the EFFECT key to “ON” side.
On the TOPU of ISW, set the SYSTEM DATA key to “NON LOAD” side and PROGRAM key to “NON
LOAD” side.
Perform the system initialization by pressing the START button.
Confirm

When the system is initialized, the CPU OPE lamp on the DSP
of active CPR lights steady-green.
When the system is initialized, system message “7-B” is
displayed automatically.

Assign data and time via MAT command “ATIMN/ATIM”.
END


PFT
ALM
RST

ON

PROGRAM

SYSTEM DATA
NON LOAD

INITIAL
START

LOAD

EFFECT

SYSTEM
SELECT

ON

SYSTEM

OFF

SELF

LOAD

OFF

NON LOAD

Figure 026-2 Keys on the TOPU (ISW)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 321
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-026
Sheet 4/5
System Initialization Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

3. System Initialization on a system basis
Perform the system initialization tests in ISW and all Local Nodes simultaneously, per the flowchart cited below. As in the flowchart, there are two kinds of method here; test via the keys on the TOPU of ISW, and test by
turning the power ON and OFF.
START
Perform the total system initialization via the keys on the TOPU (ISW)
Note:

*

For key allocations, refer to Figure 026-2 on the previous page.

On the TOPU of ISW, set the INITIAL SELECT key to “SYSTEM” side.
On the TOPU of ISW, set the EFFECT key to “ON” side.
On the TOPU of ISW, set the SYSTEM DATA key to “NON LOAD” side and
PROGRAM key to “NON LOAD” side.
Perform the system initialization by pressing the START button.
Confirm

When the system is initialized, the CPU OPE lamps on the DSP
of active CPR in all LNs and ISW light steady-green.
When the system is initialized, system message “7-B” is
displayed automatically.

A

CHAPTER 5
Page 322
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-026
Sheet 5/5
System Initialization Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Perform the total system initialization by powering ON/OFF

*

On all PWR supplies, set the circuit breaker OFF (DOWN). If a module contains two PWR
supplies, they must be turned OFF simultaneously.

• For LNs:
IMG3 IMG2

• For ISW:

IMG3:
IMG2:
IMG1:
IMG0:

PIM3
PIM3
PIM3
PIM3

ISWM

CPR1

IMG1
PIM2
PIM2
PIM2
PIM2

IMG0
PIM1
PIM1
PIM1
PIM1

PIM0
PIM0
PIM0
PIM0

TSWM1
TSWM0
CPR1
CPR0

CPR0

Turn ON the PWR supplies in each module in the following order. If a module contains two
PWR supplies, they must be turned ON simultaneously.

• For LNs:
IMG3 IMG2

• For ISW:

IMG1

IMG3:
IMG2:
IMG1:
IMG0:

PIM0
TSWM1
TSWM0
CPR0

CPR0

CPR1

Confirm

PIM1
PIM0
PIM0
CPR1

IMG0
PIM2
PIM1
PIM1
PIM0

PIM3
PIM2
PIM2
PIM1

PIM3
PIM3
PIM2

PIM3

ISWM
When the system is initialized, the CUP OPE lamps on the DSP
of active CPR in all LNs and ISW light steady-green.
When the system is initialized, system message “7-B” is
displayed automatically.

Assignment of Data and Time

Upon completion of all the initialization tests, assign data and
time via MAT command “ATIMN (available in the Network
Control Node only).”

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 323
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-027
Sheet 1/1
Circuit Card Initialization Test

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Make the No. 0 CPU into active state.
In each PIM, initialize any
Line/Trunk circuit card.
*

On the selected Line/Trunk circuit card, set the MB switch UP.
The OPE lamp goes out.
System Message “7-K” is displayed.
Set the MB switch DOWN.
The OPE lamp illuminates.
System Message “7-L” is displayed.

Clear the alarm

Clear the alarm indication by pressing the “ALM RST” button
on the TOPU.

Place the No. 1 CPU into ACT system.
In each PIM, unitialize any
Line/Trunk circuit card.

On the selected Line/Trunk circuit card, set the MB switch UP.
The OPE lamp goes out.
System Message “7-K” is displayed.
Set the MB switch DOWN.
The OPE lamp illuminates.
System Message “7-L” is displayed.

Clear the alarm

Clear the alarm indication by pressing the “ALM RST” button
on the TOPU.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 324
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

4. PORT CONNECTION TEST
4.1 Outline

Tests are to be performed on all the circuits of LC and Trunk circuit cards and PWR Supplies. LC and Trunk
circuit cards are tested with respect to their operations and speech path conditions. PWR Supplies are tested with
respect to howler tone and ringing signal.
While tests are in progress, the No. 0 CPU and TSW systems must be ACT (active).
4.2 Port Connection Test Procedure

The connection test procedure for each type of circuit card is described in the NAP indicated to the right of each
item in the following flowchart.
START
ORT (RST Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-028

ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-029

Line (LC, ELC, DLC Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-030

Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-031

Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-032

Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-033

SND (RST Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-034

3-Party Conference Trunk Function Test:

NAP-200-035

Connection Test - Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service:

NAP-200-036

Connection Test - Digital Announcement Trunk for Announcement Service:

NAP-200-037

Connection Test - Paging Trunk for Paging Access Service:

NAP-200-038

Connection Test - Paging Trunk for Paging Transfer Service:

NAP-200-039

Radio Paging Trunk (COT Card) Connection Test:

NAP-200-040

Howler and Ringing Signal Test:

NAP-200-041

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 325
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-028

dial tone, ringback

Sheet 1/2

tone
ORT

ORT (RST Card) Connection Test
A (DP)

LC

B (PB)

LC
RG

START
Make busy all ORTs

On the front of the RST card, set all MBR switches (0-7) to
the OFF position, making all ORTs busy.

From Station “A” (DP), test
ORTs one circuit at a time.

Un-busy (make idle) only the ORT to be tested.

*

Station “A” goes off-hook and after hearing dial tone, dials
the station number of Station “B.”
Station “A” confirms ringing to Station “B” and Station “B”
answers.
Stations “A” and “B” go on-hook.

From Station “B” (PB), test
ORTs one circuit at a time.
*

Un-busy only the ORT to be tested.
Station “B” goes off-hook and after hearing dial tone, dials
the station number of Station “A.”
Station “B” confirms ringing to Station “A” and Station “A”
answers.
Stations “A” and “B” go on-hook.

A

CHAPTER 5
Page 326
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-028
Sheet 2/2
ORT (RST Card) Connection Test

A
Perform tests for a situation where all ORTs are busy.
System Data SYS1,
INDEX 4, b0 =0

Station “A” goes off-hook.
Station “A” confirms that reorder tone is heard.
Station “A” goes off-hook.

System Data SYS1,
INDEX 4, b0 =1
*

Station “A” goes off-hook.
Station “A” confirms that no tone is heard.
Un-busy (make idle) a single ORT circuit.
Station “A” confirms that dial tone is heard.
Station “A” goes off-hook.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 327
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-029

ATTCON
ATI

Sheet 1/1

dial tone, ringback tone

ATTCON (ATI Card) Connection Test
ATI

A

LC

START
A station repeats an ATTCON
call. Each ATTCON answers
the call.
*

Station “A” dials the operator access code (normally, “0”).
At each ATTCON, the operator confirms that theATT lamp
flashes and the ringer sounds.
At each ATTCON, the operator answers the call by pressing
the ATND key.
Station “A” confirms speech with each ATTCON.
The operator at each ATTCON releases by pressing the
CANCEL key.
Station “A” goes on-hook.

Each ATTCON calls a station
by pressing LOOP keys one at a
time.
*

At each ATTCON, the operator dials the number of Station
“A” by using LOOP keys (L1-L6) one at a time.
Ringing at Station “A” is confirmed.
Station “A” answers the call and confirms speech.
The operator at the ATTCON releases by pressing the
CANCEL key.
Station “A” goes on-hook.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 328
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-030

LC/ELC/DLC

Sheet 1/1
Line (LC, ELC, DLC Card) Connection
Test

Line being
tested
(XXXX)
ATTCON
D term
ATI/ELC/DLC
dial tone, RBT

START
An ATTCON or Dterm is called
from each station. The called
party confirms the station
number.
*

On the MDF, a telephone set is connected to the line circuit
to be tested
The station (XXXX) to be tested goes off-hook and
confirms dial tone.
The station (XXXX) calls an ATTCON or D term.
The called ATTCON or Dterm answers the call, and confirms
speech and the station number of the calling station.
The call is released.

The ATTCON or Dterm calls a
station being tested.

The ATTCON or Dterm dials the station number of the
station being tested.
The called station answers and confirms speech.

*

The ATTCON or Dterm confirms that the number dialed and
the number of the station being tested are the same.
The call is released.

The test conducted when the
station involved is assigned as a
Hot Line/House Phone.

The station being tested goes off-hook and confirms
ringback tone.
The station checks whether the call is routed to the
predetermined station/ATTCON or that a call is originated
to a predetermined trunk.
The called side answers the call and confirms speech.
The call is released.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 329
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-031
Sheet 1/3
Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)
Connection Test

Test Outline:
The purpose of this test is to confirm, by setting up an outgoing connection test for each outgoing trunk, that speech
can be made and that the call can be released.
Outgoing trunks must be tested one at a time using the sequence of Routes and Trunk Numbers assigned at each
office.
START
When a C. O. Line or Tie Line is
not connected with a trunk circuit,
temporary cross connections
between the Outgoing trunk being
tested and the terminating trunk
should be set up on the MDF as a
loop-back circuit.

Referring to Figures 031-1 through 031-3, make temporary
cross connections on the MDF for a loop-back circuit.

Make busy all Outgoing Trunks.

On the front of the Trunk circuit card, set the MB switch to
the OFF position, making the trunk busy.

Test the trunk circuits one at a
time by establishing access from a
station.

Un-busy (make idle) only the trunk to be tested.

Temporarily assign Office Data from the MAT so that a loopback connection from the trunk can be established.

The station dials the Access Code of the trunk being tested
and the number for the call destination.
The called side answers.
The station confirms speech.
The call is released.
Make temporary cross connections for the next trunk to be
tested.

Restore the temporary
connections, temporary Office
Data, etc. to the original.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 330
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-031
Sheet 2/3
Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)
Connection Test

•

Set up a loop-back connection between the COT (C.O. Trunk) to be tested and a station line.

A

LC

C

LC

B

LC

COT

Figure 031-1 COT Test Configuration

•

The trunk route must be assigned for Loop Start.

A

LC

TLT

B

LC

TLT

Figure 031-2 TLT Test Configuration

•

Set up a loop-back connection between the TLT (Tie Line Trunk) to be tested and another EMT.

•

If the TLT is a DID (Direct Inward Dialing) Trunk, connect the related leads as shown below.

TLT

•

T

T

R

R

TLT

If the TLT is a 2W E&M System, connect the related leads as shown below.
T

T

R

R

TLT

TLT
E

E

M

M

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 331
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-031
Sheet 3/3
Outgoing Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)
Connection Test

•

If the TLT is a 4W E&M System, connect the related leads as shown below.

Receive
TLT
Send

•

T
R

T
R

T
R
E
M

T
R
E
M

Receive
TLT
Send

Set up a loop-back connection between the DTI Trunk to be tested and another DTI Trunk as shown below:

A

LC

DTI

B

LC

DTI

Figure 031-3 DTI Test Configuration

Receive

RA
RB

RA
RB

Receive

Send

TA
TB

TA
TB

Send

DTI

•

DTI

If the office is the primary office (Clock-Source-Office), perform the tests by disconnecting the PLO and the
M-OSC. (The mode of the PLO becomes “Self Operation Mode.”)

CHAPTER 5
Page 332
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-032
Sheet 1/2
Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)
Connection Test

Test Outline:
The purpose of this test is to confirm, by setting up an incoming trunk connection test for each incoming trunk, that
speech can be made with the ATTCON when a Ringdown Signal Interface is used, or with a station when a Dial-In
Signal Interface is used. This test also confirms that the call can be released. Incoming trunks must be tested one at
a time using the sequence of Route and Trunk Numbers assigned at each office.
START
On the MDF, make temporary
cross connections between the
Incoming Trunk to be tested and an
outgoing trunk as a loop-back
circuit.

Referring to Figures 031-1 through 031-3 in NAP-200-031,
make temporary cross connections on the MDF for a loopback circuit.
Temporarily assign Office Data from the MAT so that a loopback connection from the trunk can be established.

Make busy all outgoing trunks
other than the cross-connected
trunk.
Test Incoming trunk circuits one at
a time.
For Ringdown Signal
Interface.

Station “A” dials the telephone number of Station “C.”
The call terminates to an Attendant Console.
The Attendant Console answers the call and confirms
speech.
The call is released.
Make temporary connections for the next trunk to be tested.

A

B

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 333
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-032
Sheet 2/2
Incoming Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI Card)
Connection Test

A

B
For a Dial-In Signal
Interface.

Station “A” dials the access code for the outgoing trunk and
the telephone number of Station “B.”
Station “B” answers the call and confirms speech.
The call is released.
Make temporary cross connections for the next trunk to be
tested.

Restore the temporary cross
connections, temporary Office
Data, etc. to the original.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 334
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-033

COT
DIT

Sheet 1/1
Direct-In Termination Trunk (COT Card)
Connection Test

A

LC

B

LC

C

LC

START
On the MDF, make temporary
cross connections between the
Trunk for Direct-In Termination
(DIT) and an LC.
C.O. Line Incoming Call

Station “B” dials the telephone number of LC “C” (Station
“C”).

Incoming Call to Station via
DIT Trunk.

The call terminates to Station “A”; Station “A” rings.
Confirm that the ringing is distinct from that of an intraoffice call or ordinary C.O. call.
• The ringing signal for Direct-In Termination calls can be
the same as that used for C.O. calls if the related Office
Data is assigned.
System Data SYS1, INDEX 72, SYS3, INDEX 0,
and parameter DR of Command “ARTD.”

Answer and Talk

Station “A” goes off-hook.
Stations “A” and “B” talk with each other.

Release

Station “A” and “B” both go on-hook.

Remove the temporary cross
connections.
END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 335
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-034
SND

Sheet 1/1
SND (RST Card) Connection Test

COT
A

LC

B

LC

ORT

LC
MAT

START
When a C.O. Line or Tie Line is
not connected with the trunk,
make an arrangement for trunk
loop-back as illustrated above.

On the MDF, make temporary cross connections for a
loop back circuit.

Make busy all SNDs

On the front of the RST circuit card, set all MBS switches
(0-7) to the OFF position, thereby making all SNDs busy.

Test SNDs one after another

Un-busy (make idle) only the SND to be tested.

Temporarily assign Office Data from the MAT so that a
connection can be set up with Station “B” via a SND.

Station “A” dials the access code of the trunk and the
telephone number of Station “B.”
Station “B” answers and talks
The call is released.
Restore the temporary cross
connections, temporary Office
Data etc. to the original.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 336
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

SPDT,RBT

NAP-200-035
Sheet 1/1
3-party Conference Trunk Function Test

A

LC

B

LC

C
F
T

C

LC

TSW/INT
CARD

RC

START
Make busy all CFTs

Make busy all CFTs using MAT command “MBTK.”

Test CFTs one at a time

Un-busy (make idle) only the CFT to be tested.
Stations “A” and “B” are engaged in a station to station
connection.
Station “A” makes a Switch Hook Flash (SHF) and after hearing
dial tone, dials the telephone number of Station “C.”
Station “C” answers the call.
Station “A,” after having talked with Station “C,” makes a SHF
and confirms that a three-way connection has been set up.
The call is released.

Cancel the Make Busy of
the CFT

Un-busy (make idle) the CFT using the “MBTK” command.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 337
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-036
Sheet 1/1

A

LC

B

LC

Connection Test-Announcement Trunk for
Announcement Service

ANNOUNCEMENT
TRK

ANNOUNCEMENT
MACHINE

START
Dial the announcement service
code

Station “A” dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the
announcement

Station “A” is connected to the announcement machine and
hears the announcement.

Dial the announcement service
code

Station “B” dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the
announcement

Station “B” is connected to the announcement machine and
hears the announcement.

Release

Confirm that the announcement machine stops when both
Stations “A” and “B” goes on-hook.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 338
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-037
A

Sheet 1/1
Connection Test-Digital Announcement
Trunk for Announcement Service

LC

ANNOUNCEMENT
TRK
DAT

B

LC

START
Dial the announcement service
code

Station “A” dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the
announcement

Station “A” is connected to the announcement trunk and
hears the announcement.

Dial the announcement service
code

Station “B” dials the announcement service code.

Check the contents of the
announcement

Station “B” is connected to the announcement trunk and
hears the announcement.

Release

Confirm that the announcement stops when both Stations
“A” and “B” goes on-hook.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 339
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-038
Sheet 1/1
Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging
Access Service

A

LC
PGT
AMP

SP

ATTCON

START
Dial the paging access code

Station “A”/ATTCON dials the paging access code and hears
CRBT (Continuous Ringback Tone).
In about 1 sec., CRBT stops.

Speaker Paging

Check whether speaker paging is possible after CRBT has
stopped.

Release

Station “A” goes on-hook or theATTCON depresses the
CANCEL key.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 340
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-039
Sheet 1/2
Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging
Transfer Service

Paged Station
C

LC

Hold Station
B

LC

Paging Station
A

LC
PGT
AMP

SP

• Paging Transfer Service can be selected according to System Data (SYS1, INDEX 73).
1. Non-Delay System
2. Delay and Non-Delay System
3. Paging Transfer Supervision
START
Call the Paging Trunk

Stations “A” and “B” are engaged in a station to station
connection.
Station “A” makes a Switch Hook Flash (SHF) and hears SPDT.
Station “B” is held on the line.
Station “A” dials the paging access code and hears CRBT. In
about 1 sec., CRBT is no longer heard and Station “A” is able to
page through the loudspeaker.

The paging party

For a Non-Delay System:
Station “A” remains on hold.
For a Delay System with Paging Transfer Supervision:
Station “A” hangs up.

The paged party answers

Station “C” (the paged party) dials the paging access code
(answer).

A

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 341
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-039
Sheet 2/2
Connection Test-Paging Trunk for Paging
Transfer Service

A
Connection
For Non-Delay-System
Station “C” is connected to Station “A.”
When Station “A” hangs up, Stations “B” and “C” are automatically connected with each
other.
For a Delay-System
Station “A” rings and picks up handset.
Station “A” is connected to Stations “C.”
When Station “A” hangs up, Stations “B” and “C” are automatically connected with each
other.
For Paging Transfer Supervision
Station “C” is connected to Station “B.”
Release
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 342
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-040
RG

Sheet 1/1
Radio Paging Trunk (COT Card)
Connection Test

COT
A

LC
COT

B

LC

RBT
RADIO PAGING
SLAVE STATION

START
Call the Radio Paging Equipment

Station “A” dials the radio paging access code and hears
special dial tone from the Radio Paging Equipment, then
dials the slave station number.
The paging radio of the slave station starts ringing.
By hearing CRBT (Continuous Ring Back Tone) from the
Radio Paging Equipment, Station “A” confirms that the slave
station is being paged, then goes on-hook.

The paged party answers

The slave station (the radio-pages party) dials the paging
answer code at the nearby Station “B”, hears SPDT through
the Radio Paging Equipment, then dials the paging answer
code.
Station “A” rings and picks up the handset.
Confirm that Stations “A” and “B” can talk with each other.

Release

Stations “A” and “B” both go on-hook.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 343
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-041

Howler Signal

Sheet 1/2
A

Howler & Ringing Signal Test

LC
RG

B

LC

C

LC
RBT

Test Outline:
The Howler Tone Generator and the Ringing Generator are equipped on the PWR Supply.
The purpose of the test is to confirm ringing signal by setting up a station to station connection and a howler tone
connection from a station accommodated in any PIM.
START
Check PWR0 in each PIM.
While both PWR Supplies are OFF, turn power to PWR0 ON. Leave PWR1 OFF.
Check howler tone.

*

A station accommodated in the PIM for which the PWR Supply is to be tested goes offhook. (analog port only)
The station hears dial tone.
In about 12 seconds, the station hears reorder tone.
About 30 seconds later, the station should confirm hearing howler tone.
Check ringing signal.

*

Set up a station-to-station connection between two stations accommodated in the PIM
in which the PWR Supply is to be tested. (analog port only)
Confirm that ringing signal is sent out.
A

CHAPTER 5
Page 344
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-041
Sheet 2/2
Howler & Ringing Signal Test

A
Check PWR1 in each PIM.
While both PWR Supplies are OFF, turn power to PWR1 ON. Leave PWR0 OFF.
Check howler tone.

*

A station accommodated in the PIM in which the PWR Supply is to be tested goes offhook. (analog port only)
The station hears dial tone.
In about 12 seconds, the station hears reorder tone.
About 30 seconds later, the station should confirm hearing howler tone.
Check ringing signal.

*

Set up a station-to-station connection between two stations accommodated in the PIM
in which the PWR Supply is to be tested. (analog port only)
Confirm that ringing signal is sent out.
END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 345
Revision 1.0

5. OVERALL TEST
5.1 Outline

Tests are to be performed to check the following lines by connecting them to a trunk on an individual basis:
•

C.O. lines

•

FCCS (Fusion Call Control Signal) - If the system has a connection with other IPX and/or IMX series via
Fusion link

•

Tie lines - If the system has a connection with tie lines including CCIS

The speech path conditions (speech level, presence of noise, one-way speech, no speech, etc.) over the connection to the distant office will be checked. Release of the trunk used will also be checked.
5.2 Overall Test Procedure

The procedure for performing the Overall Test is described in the NAPs indicated to the right of each item in
the following flowchart.
START
Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call:

NAP-200-042

Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call:

NAP-200-043

Overall Test of Fusion Link Connection with Other IPX and/or NAP-200-044
IMX Series:
Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing Call:

NAP-200-045

Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Incoming Call:

NAP-200-046

Test of Connection and Alternate Routing to All Tie Lines:

NAP-200-047

Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line:

NAP-200-048

PAD Setting:

NAP-200-049

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 346
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-042
Sheet 1/3
Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call

START
Seizure of trunk to be tested
When seizing from a station

Place the trunk to be tested into idle state, and make all other
trunks busy.
Station “A” dials the trunk access number.
Station “A,” after hearing dial tone from the C.O., dials the
pilot number for the local office and allows the call to be
terminated to that office via loop-back at the C.O.

When seizing from an
ATTCON

An ATTCON sets up the connection with a specific trunk
designated via Individual Trunk Access service.
The ATTCON, after hearing dial tone from the C.O., dials
the pilot number for the local office and allows the call to be
terminated to that office via loop-back at the C.O.

Call termination to ATTCON

The call looped back at the C.O. terminates to the ATTCON.

Check of speech conditions

After the call has been answered at the ATTCON, check the
speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise,
and one-way speech state.

Release
When all COTs have been checked
and a fault is detected.

Perform a trunk loop-back test at the C.O., and determine
whether the trunk side or the C.O. Line side is faulty.
If the C.O. Line is faulty, make a request to the C.O. for
repair.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 347
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-042
Sheet 2/3
Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call


Self-Node
(ex. LN0)

Central
Office
Exchange

Other Node
(ex. LN1)
ISW

STN A

LC/
ELC

COT

ATI

COT

ATI

COT

ATTCON

ATTCON
FCCS Link

FCCS Link


• When Station/ATTCON in IMG0/1 seizes COT accommodated in IMG2/3 of the same node.
• When Station/ATTCON in IMG2/3 seizes COT accommodated in IMG0/1 of the same node.
Central
Office
Exchange

Self-Node
(ex. LN0)

(example)

IMG0/1 IMG2/3
COT

COT

ISW

STN A

LC/
ELC

ATI

ATTCON

ATI

ATTCON

FCCS Link

COT

Figure 042-1 Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call (1/2)

CHAPTER 5
Page 348
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-042
Sheet 3/3
Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call


• When Station/ATTCON in IMG0/1 seizes COT accommodated in IMG0/1 of the same node.
• When Station/ATTCON in IMG2/3 seizes COT accommodated in IMG2/3 of the same node.

Central
Office
Exchange
Self-Node
(ex. LN0)
STN A

LC/
ELC
COT
ATI

ATTCON
COT

ATI

ATTCON

COT

Figure 042-1 Overall Test for C.O. Line Outgoing Call (2/2)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 349
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-043
Sheet 1/3
Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call

Test Outline:
The tests comprising this NAP are to be performed according to the C.O. Line Number Table provided by the C.O.
If the C.O. Line Numbers are not known, tests cannot be performed because loop-back cannot be performed at the
C.O.
In addition, tests cannot be performed which involve Direct Inward Dialing. Under such circumstances, the C.O.
must be asked to perform an incoming test.
START
Seizure of trunk to be tested

From the ATTCON, set up a connection with a specific trunk
designated via Individual Trunk Access.
After hearing dial tone from the C.O., dial the C.O. Line
number of the trunk being tested from the ATTCON.

Call termination to ATTCON

The call looped back at the C.O. terminates to the
ATTCON.

Speech Condition Check

After the call has been answered at theATTCON, check the
speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise,
and one-way speech.

Release
When all COT trunks have been
checked and a fault is detected.

Perform a trunk loop-back test at the C.O. and identify
whether the trunk side or the C.O. Line side is faulty.
If the C.O. Line side is faulty, make a request to the C.O. for
repair.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 350
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-043
Sheet 2/3
Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call


Self-Node
(ex. LN0)

Central
Office
Exchange

Other Node
(ex. LN1)
ISW
COT

ATI

ATTCON

COT

COT

ATI

ATTCON
FCCS Link

FCCS Link


• When call is terminated from COT in IMG2/3 to ATTCON in IMG0/1 of the same node.
• When call is terminated from COT in IMG0/1 to ATTCON in IMG2/3 of the same node.
Central
Office
Exchange

Self-Node
(ex. LN0)

(example)

IMG0/1 IMG2/3
COT

COT

ISW

ATI

ATTCON

ATI

ATTCON

FCCS Link

COT

Figure 043-1 Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call (1/2)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 351
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-043
Sheet 3/3
Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call


• When call is terminated from COT in IMG0/1 to ATTCON in IMG0/1 of the same node.
• When call is terminated from COT in IMG2/3 to ATTCON in IMG2/3 of the same node.
Central
Office
Exchange
Self-Node
(ex. LN0)

COT
ATI

ATTCON
COT

ATI

ATTCON

COT

Figure 043-1 Overall Test for C.O. Line Incoming Call (2/2)

CHAPTER 5
Page 352
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-044
Sheet 1/1
Overall Test of Fusion Link Connection
with Other IPX and/or IMX Series

As explained in CHAPTER 1, the installed system (IPX-U) can have a connection also with other IPX and/or IMX
series via the FCCS link. If this is the case, perform the following tests, too, by referring to the “Fusion Network
System Manual”:
1. FCCS (Fusion Call Control Signal) Connection Tests between the installed system and other IPX and/or
IMX series
- Station-to-Station Test
- ATTCON Connection Test
- Line (LC, ELC, DLC card) Connection Test
- 3-party Conference Trunk Function Test
2. FCCS Alternate Routing Test

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 353
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-045
Sheet 1/2
Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing
Call

If the installed system has a connection with a CCIS tie line, perform the test indicated in this NAP.

PBX-A

Station A

PBX-B

Station B
LC

LC
ATTCON
ATI
(PBX to be tested)

START
Seizure of trunk to be tested
When seizing from a station

Place the trunk to be tested into idle state, and make busy all
other trunks.
Station “A” dials the number for station “B” in the PBX-B

When seizing from an
ATTCON

An ATTCON sets up the connection with a specific trunk
designated by Individual Trunk Access for CCIS TRK
service and dials the number for Station “B” in the PBX-B.

Call termination to Station “B” in
the PBX-B

The call terminates to Station “B” via a CCIS Tie Line.

Check of speech conditions

After the call has been answered at the ATTCON, check the
speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise
and one-way speech state.

Release
When all CCIS Tie Line Trunks
have been checked and a fault has
been detected

Perform fault localization procedure when a fault has
occurred to CCIS Tie Line (See Procedure A on the next
page)
If the distant office is faulty, make a request to the distant
office for repair.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 354
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-045
Sheet 2/2
Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Outgoing
Call

(Procedure A)
START
On the DTI/CCT card, set its MB switch UP.
In any office other than the Primary Office (Clock-Source-Office), disconnect the DTI/CCT cable
connector at the DTI/CCT side (Backplane of PIM)
PLO alarm is generated, but ignore it.
The PLO starts running by itself.
Make the following connection at the MDF using a paired wire.

DTI/CCT
LEADS

MDF

TA

CROSS
CONNECTION

TB
RA
RB

The DTI does not recover. (CCH/
CCT Link Failure may occur, but
ignore it.)

System message “3-J” is not displayed.

The DTI recovered. (CCH/CCT
Link Failure may occur, but ignore
it.)

System message “3-J” is displayed.

The DTI/CCT is faulty.

The DTI/CCT is normal.
Call the distant office and ask for repair.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 355
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-046
Sheet 1/1
Overall Test of CCIS Tie Line Incoming
Call

If the installed system has a connection with a CCIS tie line, perform the test indicated in this NAP.

PBX-A

Station A
LC

PBX-B

Station B
LC

(System to be tested)

START
Seizure of trunk to be tested

Place the trunk to be tested into idle state, and make busy all
other trunks.

Termination of incoming call to
station “A” in the self office

An incoming call from the distant office terminates to
Station “A.”

Check of speech

After the call has been answered at Station “A,” check the
speech conditions including speech level, presence of noise
and one-way speech state.

Release
When all CCIS Tie Line Trunks
have been checked and a fault has
been detected

Perform fault localization procedure when a fault has
occurred to CCIS Tie Line. (See Procedure A of NAP-200045)
If the distant office is faulty, make a request to the distant
office for repair.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 356
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-047
Sheet 1/2
Test of Connection and Alternate Routing
to All Tie Lines

If the installed system has a connection with any of the Public Network or Tie Line Network, perform the test indicated in this NAP.
START
Test the trunks in the primary route
one at a time.

Make busy all trunks in the primary route except the trunk to
be tested.
Station “A” calls Station “B” via the primary route.
After Station “B” answers, check the normality of the speech
condition including the speech level, presence of noise, and
one-way speech.
Release.

Make all the trunks in the primary route busy.
Test the trunks in the alternate
route one at a time.

Make busy all trunks in the alternate route except the trunk
to be tested.
Station “A” calls Station “B” via the alternate route.
After Station “B” answers, check the normality of the speech
condition including the speech level, presence of noise, and
one-way speech.
Release.

Cancel the Make Busy condition of the trunks.
END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 357
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-047
Sheet 2/2
Test of Connection and Alternate Routing
to All Tie Lines

Basic Route
Tie Line
Network
TRKs
Station A

IPX-U
(System to
be tested)

Alternate
Route

PBX

Station B

TRKs
Public
Network

Figure 047-1 Combination of Tie Line Network and Public Network

BASIC ROUTE
PBX

TRKs

Station A

IPX-U
(System to
be tested)

ALTERNATE
ROUTE
TRKs

PBX

Figure 047-2 Tie Line Network

CHAPTER 5
Page 358
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

PBX

Station B

NAP-200-048
Sheet 1/2
Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line

If the installed system has a connection with any of the tie lines, perform the test indicated in this NAP.
IRT

Primary Route

IPX-U
PBX
(1)
Station A

PBX

TRKs
Alternate
Route

TRKs
(3)

PBX
Station B

TRKs
(2)
PBX
ATTCON

(1):
(2):
(3):

PBX to
be tested

Station C

Direct tandem connection by dial-in
Tandem connection via ATTCON
Tandem connection via Station

Figure 048-1 Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line

START
Test of direct dial-in tandem
connection

Test of Primary Route
Station “A” calls Station “B”
Confirm speech between Stations “A” and “B.”
Release.
Test of Alternate Route
Make busy all the trunks in the primary route.
Station “A” calls Station “B.”
Confirm speech between Stations “A” and “B.”
Release.
Un-busy (make idle) all the trunks.

A

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 359
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-048
Sheet 2/2
Test of Tandem Connection to Tie Line

A
Test of tandem connection via
ATTCON

Station “A” dials the access code for the ATTCON.
The ATTCON answers and sets up a tandem connection to
Station “B.”
The ATTCON releases, and speech between Stations “A” and
“B” is confirmed.
Release.

Test of tandem connection via
station

Station “A” calls Station “C.”
Station “C,” after answering, makes a Switch Hook Flash
(SHF) and calls Station “B.”
After Station “B” answers, Station “C” release. Speech between
Stations “A” and “B” is confirmed.
Release.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 360
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-049
Sheet 1/2
PAD Setting

PAD Setting
1. Analog Trunk
a) For an outgoing/incoming call via a Tie Line:
• Via MAT command “ARTD” and switch settings on the TLT circuit card.
b) For a tandem Tie Line connection:
• Via command “APAD” or switch settings on the TLT circuit card(s).
At both the originating and terminating offices, an 8 dB PAD is set for the EMT route via the “ARTD” command or
switch settings. At the tandem office, a 4 dB PAD is set for the terminating and originating sides of each EMT route
via command “APAD.”
Through this arrangement, an 8 dB PAD is in service for outgoing and incoming connections, and 4 dB PADs are in
service for each line in a tandem connection (total: 8 dB). This arrangement is shown in Figure 049-1.

Originating Office
0 dB

Carrier
Terminal

EMT
8 dB –8
8 dB

Tandem Office
Carrier
Terminal
0

EMT
4 dB
PAD 4 dB

–8

0

-8 dB

Terminating Office
0 dB

8 dB –8

0

8 dB

–8

0

4 dB
PAD 4 dB

-8 dB
EMT

Carrier
Terminal

Carrier
Terminal

EMT

Figure 049-1 Example of PAD Setting (Analog)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 361
Revision 1.0

NAP-200-049
Sheet 2/2
PAD Setting

2. Digital Trunk
a) For an outgoing call to/incoming call from a Tie Line:
• Via command “ARTD”/“ACRD” Note
b) For a tandem Tie Line connection:
• Via command “APAD”/“AFPD” Note
Note:

Command “ACRD” and “AFPD” are available for the Fusion network only. For details, refer to the “Office Data Specification.”

At both the originating and terminating offices, 0 dB is set to the outgoing side and 8 dB is set to the terminating of
the DTI/CCT route via “ARTD”/“ACRD” command.
At the tandem office, 0 dB is set for both the terminating and originating sides of each DTI/CCT route via “APAD”/
“AFPD” command.
This arrangement is shown in Figure 049-2.

Originating Office

Tandem Office
DTI/CCT
0 dB

0 dB
–8 dB

DTI/CCT
0 dB
0 dB

–8 dB

Terminating Office
DTI/CCT
0 dB

0 dB
–8 dB

0 dB
0 dB

–8 dB

Figure 049-2 Example of PAD Setting (Digital)

CHAPTER 5
Page 362
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

6. LOAD TEST
6.1 Outline

Load tests are to be performed by simulating actual operating conditions. When performing load tests, five to
ten telephone sets, an Attendant Console, and, if available, a test call device are to be connected to the system.
While load tests are in progress, System Messages, TOPU lamps, etc. must be checked to determine whether an
abnormal condition is present.
6.2 Load Test Procedure

The procedure for performing the Load Test is described in NAP-200-050 “Load Test”.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 363
Revision 1.0

MDF

NAP-200-050
Sheet 1/2

LC

TRK

LC

TRK

LC

ATI

CALL TEST
EQUIPMENT

Load Test

ATTCON

LC

START
On the MDF, connect telephone
sets and the call test equipment to
line circuits.

On the MDF, connect five to ten telephone sets to line
circuits. The accommodated locations of the line circuits are
shown in Table 050-2.
Provide the required jumper connections according to the
test pattern being used.

Perform load test from Pattern 1
through Pattern 4 as shown in
Table 050-1.

Set No.0 systems of TSW and CPU in all Local Nodes and
ISW to the ACT mode (Test of Pattern 1).
Turn ON the power to the call test equipment, and perform
tests for about 30 minutes. Check if a fault occurs.
Using the call test equipment and telephone sets, set up
various types of connections (see Table 050-2) for about 10
seconds duration. Check if a fault occurs.
Similarly, perform the remaining load tests (Pattern 2Pattern 4) per Table 050-1 plus 050-2.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 364
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

NAP-200-050
Sheet 2/2
Load Test

Table 050-1 Load Test Patterns by CPU and TSW Mode
Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Pattern 4

Active CPU

No.0 system

No.0 system

No.1 system

No.1 system

Active TSW

No.0 system

No.1 system

No.0 system

No.1 system

Table 050-2 Load Test Connection Sheet
Called Party

LN (IMG0/2)
PIM0

Calling
Party

U=0

U=1

PIM1
U=2

U=3

LN (IMG1/3)

PIM2
U=0

U=1

PIM3
U=2

U=3

PIM0
U=0

U=1

PIM1
U=2

U=3

PIM2
U=0

PIM3

U=1

U=2

U=3

PIM U=0
0
U=1
LN

PIM U=2
1
U=3

IMG PIM U=0
0/2
2
U=1
PIM U=2
3
U=3
PIM U=0
0
U=1
LN

PIM U=2
1
U=3

IMG PIM U=0
1/3
2
U=1
PIM U=2
3
U=3

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 5
Page 365
Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 5
Page 366
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 6

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

1. GENERAL
The fault recovery procedures described in this chapter are used when a connection cannot be established in the
normal manner or an abnormal connection is discovered as a result of the tests designated in Chapter 4, “SYSTEM STARTUP”, and Section 2., “BASIC CONNECTION TEST” of Chapter 5.
2. OUTLINE OF PROCEDURE FOR FAULT RECOVERY
The procedures for performing fault recovery are described in the NAPs indicated to the right of each item in
the following flowchart.
START
Abnormal Lamp Indication After System Startup:

NAP-200-051

Dial Tone Connection Fault:

NAP-200-052

Station To Station Connection Fault:

NAP-200-053

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 6
Page 367
Revision 1.0

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-051
Sheet 1/2
Abnormal Lamp Indications After System
Startup

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Check conducted when the OPE lamp (Green) do not illuminate on any circuit cards mounted in a PIM.
Using MAT command “AUNT”, check whether UNIT data has been assigned.
Replace the MUX card in the PIM with a spare.
Check whether the “MT24 TSW” cable, linking the MUX and TSW circuit cards, and the ISA
bus (34PH 50AL CA-A or 34PH 50AL CA-B) cable, linking the ISA Gate and TSWM, are
securely connected.
A PIM will occasionally malfunction due to a single circuit card mounted in the PIM.
Therefore, check the circuit cards via the following steps:
Extract all circuit cards from the PIM other than the TSW/MUX and the PWR Supplies.
Insert one circuit card into its mounting slot and see if its OPE lamp illuminates. Repeat
this procedure for the remaining circuit cards.
Check conducted when the OPE lamp (Green) does not illuminate on a Line Circuit card.
Confirm that the MB switch of the circuit card is DOWN.
Using command “ASDT”, check whether station data is assigned to the circuits on the card.
Replace the card with a spare.
Check conducted when OPE lamp of a Line Circuit card illuminates, but the BL lamp (Red) for an
individual line flashes
Using command “MBST”, confirm that the specific line is not in Make Busy state.
Using command “ASDT”, check whether station data has been assigned to the line circuit.
Replace the circuit card with a spare.
A

CHAPTER 6
Page 368
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-051
Sheet 2/2
Abnormal Lamp Indications After System
Startup

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Check conducted when the OPE lamp (Green) does not illuminate on a Trunk circuit card.
Confirm that the MB switch of the circuit card is DOWN.
Using command “ATRK,” check whether Trunk data has been assigned for the circuits on the
card.
Replace the circuit card with a spare.
Check conducted when the OPE lamp of a Trunk circuit card illuminates, but the BL lamp (Red) for an
individual circuit flashes.
Confirm that the MB switch for each circuit of the card is OFF.
Using command “MBTK,” confirm that the trunk circuit is not in Make Busy state.
Using command “ATRK,” check whether trunk data has been assigned for the trunk circuit.
Replace the circuit card with a spare.
Perform the following check before replacing a circuit card which is considered defective with a spare.
Confirm the switch settings on the circuit card.
Poor contact at the connector portion of the circuit card may be responsible for the malfunction.
Check the circuit card once again by inserting and extracting it two or three times.
END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 6
Page 369
Revision 1.0

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-052
Sheet 1/1
Dial Tone Connection Fault

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Dial tone is not heard.
On the MDF, check the cross connections between the telephone and the corresponding line
circuit.
Check whether the LT cable is securely connected to the PIM.
Replace the LC card with a spare.
Dial tone cannot be heard from one or more lines of the same circuit card.
Replace the LC card with a spare.
Dial tone cannot be heard from the lines accommodated by a specific PIM.
Check the switch settings on the TSW/MUX circuit card.
Replace the TSW/MUX card with a spare.
Check the switch settings on the TSW circuit card.
Replace the TSW card with a spare.
Check whether the “MT24 TSW” cable, connected to the front connector of the MUX card, is
securely inserted to the “MUXnnn” connector fixed on the BWB (Back Wired Board) of the
TSWM.
END

CHAPTER 6
Page 370
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-053
Sheet 1/2
Station to Station Connection Fault
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Dial tone is still heard after a digit is dialed (cannot break dial tone)
A specific RST card is involved

Replace the RST card with a spare.

A specific LC card is involved

Replace the LC card with a spare.

A specific UNIT card is involved

Replace the TSW/MUX card with a spare.

Entire System is involved

Replace the TSW card with a spare.

Reorder tone is heard after a station number is dialed.
Using MAT command “ANPD/ANPDL/ANPDN,” check “Necessary Number of Digits” data.
Using command “ASPA/ASPAL/ASPAN,” check “Special Number” data.
Using command “ASDT,” check “Station” data.
Using command “ATNR,” check “Tenant Restriction Class” data.
RBT (Ring Back Tone) is heard, but the bell at the called station remains silent.
Check whether the called station is assigned the correct LENS data in command “ASDT.”
When all the stations accommodated in a specific PIM do not ring, replace the PWR circuit
card with a spare.
If the fault involves one or more lines within the same LC circuit card, replace the LC card
with a spare.
A

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 6
Page 371
Revision 1.0

FAULT RECOVERY DURING TESTS

NAP-200-053
Sheet 2/2
Station to Station Connection Fault

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
After the call has been answered, noise is heard or the speech path is one-way.
If the fault involves one or more lines within the same LC circuit card, replace the card with a
spare.
If the fault involves a specific PIM, replace the MUX circuit card with a spare.
If noise is heard throughout the entire system, replace the TSW circuit card with a spare.
END

CHAPTER 6
Page 372
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

This chapter explains various kinds of work and site cleaning, etc. which the installer must perform after completion of installation tests so that the system can be cut over normally.
Upon completion of all the required tests, the technician must confirm or perform the following.
1.

Office Data Management

2.

Preparation of Test Result Reports

3.

Mounting of the Front and Rear Covers

4.

Attachment of Inter-frame Brackets

5.

Site Cleaning

1. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT
This Section explains the method of creating backup of the Office Data and the method of protecting the Office
Data.
The PBX executes various kinds of processing according to the results of access by the CPU to the Data Memory
in which the Office Data are stored. If the contents of Data Memory becomes faulty. It may result in erroneous
operation of the system or in a system down. If any part of the Office Data has been illegally changed, it may
also bring about a trouble the same as in the case of a fault occurrence to the Data Memory.
Thus, upon completion of the installation tests, ensure to create backup of the Office Data and provide a proper
measure of office data protection.
1.1 Preservation of Office Data

The following items should be kept at the job site after the installation test has been completed for preservation
of office data.
1.

Office Data Programming Sheets
Since the office data programming sheets should reflect the most up-to-date data at all times, entries into
the office data programming sheets must be made in pencil.

2.

Floppy Disks for Storing Data
If a major change is made to the office data, especially a change involving System Data (command “ASYD/
ASYDL/ASYDN”), the system may not function as expected afterward. To prepare for such an occurrence,
an FD containing the office data before the change and one containing the data after the change should be
kept on hand. The FD containing the data before the change allows the technician to restore the previous
(running) condition if the system will not operate properly with the new data.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7
Page 373
Revision 1.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Note:

Cautions pertaining to Floppy Disks.
(1) Do not place a heavy object on an FD or the FD will be damaged.
(2) When taking an FD out of its protective envelope, hold the top edge of the disk and gently pull it out.
(3) Do not expose the FD to direct sunlight or to a high temperature (above 65°C (150°F)).
(4) Do not pinch the FD with a clip.
(5) Do not touch the recorded surface of the floppy disk with bare hands; fingerprints left by bare hands
will attract dust.
(6) Avoid cleaning of the floppy disk.
(7) Do not place the floppy disk near a magnet, etc. If an FD is exposed to a magnetic field of more than
50 Oe, the data on the disk is likely to be altered or destroyed.
(8) Do not bend the floppy disk.
(9) Do not apply force to outer edge of the floppy disk.

2. PREPARATION OF TEST RESULT REPORT
When submitting a report of test results to the end user or when performing test with customer’s representatives
attending, prepare Test Result Report and record the test results into the prepared Test Result Report.

CHAPTER 7
Page 374
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

3. MOUNTING OF THE FRONT AND REAR COVERS
When mounting the front cover and the rear cover of the PBX, follow the procedure below.
START
Inspection

Set all MB switches back to their positions
prior to the installation tests.
Confirm that all circuit cards are mounted in
the proper slots according to the Bayface
Layout.

Mounting of Side Covers

Mounting of Rear Covers

Mounting of Front Cover(s)

Referring to Figures 7-1 through 7-4, mount
the side covers onto the Modules and the Fan
Unit.
Modules

Referring to Figures 7-5 and 7-6, mount the
rear covers.

Fan Unit

Referring to Figure 7-7, mount the rear
covers.

Modules

Referring to Figures 7-8 through 7-11, mount
the front cover(s) (A).

Check

Confirm that the mounted covers do not
contact any of the cables, circuit cards, etc.

END

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7
Page 375
Revision 1.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

REAR COVERS

SIDE COVERS

FRONT

SIDE COVERS

FRONT
COVER
Figure 7-1 Mounting of the Covers in a Full System

CHAPTER 7
Page 376
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Figure 7-2 Mounting of the Covers

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7
Page 377
Revision 1.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

SIDE COVER

REAR

FRONT

SCREW

Figure 7-3 Side Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPM+PIM0)

CHAPTER 7
Page 378
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Note:

•
•

The cover can also be mounted upside-down, so confirm the upper and lower sides.
The side covers included with the Top Unit (TOPU) are different from the module covers shown here.

Figure 7-4 Side Cover Mounting Method (PIM)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7
Page 379
Revision 1.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

REAR COVER

SCREW
SCREW

SCREW
SCREW

SCREW

REAR SIDE
SCREW

REAR COVER
SIDE VIEW

Figure 7-5 Rear Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPM+PIM0)
CHAPTER 7
Page 380
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

MODULE

SCREW
SCREW
REAR SIDE
REAR COVER

MODULE

REAR COVER
SIDE VIEW

Figure 7-6 Rear Cover Mounting Method (PIM)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7
Page 381
Revision 1.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

FANU

REAR COVER
SCREW

SCREW

FANU

REAR COVER

Figure 7-7 Rear Cover Mounting Method (FANU)

CHAPTER 7
Page 382
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Loosen these screws.

Tighten these screws securely.
These screws are not used for
mounting the covers.

Remove this screw
(the lower screws of this module).

FRONT
hinge

GND cable

FRONT
Figure 7-8 Front Cover Mounting Method in a Full System

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7
Page 383
Revision 1.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

FRONT COVER

Figure 7-9 Front Cover Mounting Method (BASEU+LPM+PIM0)

CHAPTER 7
Page 384
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

Mount the Front Cover onto the module using screws.

SCREW

FRONT COVER

Note:

The Front Cover can be set to open
to either the “left side” or “right
side”. The Front Cover shown in
this figure is set to open to the left
side. When it is to be set to open to
right side, mount the Front Cover
onto the frame by setting the respective hinges on the left side of the
frame and the Front Cover.

Figure 7-10 Front Cover Mounting Method (PIM)

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7
Page 385
Revision 1.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

FANU

FRONT COVER C(U)

Figure 7-11 Front Cover Mounting Method (FANU)

CHAPTER 7
Page 386
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

4. ATTACHMENT OF INTER-FRAME BRACKETS
This section covers how to attach inter-frame brackets between the cabinets.
The inter-frame brackets should be attached in the following locations.

LN0/1/2/3
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

ISWM

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

LPM

TSWM0

TSWM1

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

ISW
TOPU

BASEU

Inter-frame Brackets

Figure 7-12 Locations of Inter-frame Brackets

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7
Page 387
Revision 1.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS


STEP 1: Referring to Figure 7-13, fix the brackets (E) between the LPM and PIM.

(PIM)

Dedicated screws for
inter-module stabilization.
Note
Bracket (E)

(LPM/PIM)

Note:

These screws are appended when obtaining the module components from NEC.
Figure 7-13 How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets

STEP 2: Referring to Figure 7-13, fix the brackets (A) with the four screws.
STEP 3: Referring to Figure 7-13, fix the brackets (B) with the four screws.

CHAPTER 7
Page 388
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

SL-C.P.B.M.S x 4 x 8 x 3GF
Bracket (D)

Bracket (A)

(PIM)
Bracket (A)

Bracket (B)

(FANU)

Bracket (B)
Bracket (B)

Bracket (F)
(BASEU)
PL-C.P.I.M.S x 4 x 10 x 15 BF
P.I.WA x 4 x 15 BF
#2.ST.L.WA x 4 x 15 BF
A.HEX.I.N. x 4 x 15 BF

Bracket (F)

Figure 7-13 How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets (2 of 3)
NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7
Page 389
Revision 1.0

Bracket (D)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (A)
Bracket (B)

Bracket (E)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (A)
Bracket (A)
Bracket (A)
Bracket (A)
Bracket (B)
Bracket (B)
Bracket (F)
Bracket (A)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (A)

Bracket (B)
Bracket (F)

Figure 7-13 How to Attach Inter-frame Brackets (3 of 3)

STEP 4: Referring to Figure 7-13, fix the brackets (D) with the two screws.
STEP 5: Referring to Figure 7-13, fix the brackets (F) with the two screws.

CHAPTER 7
Page 390
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

5. SITE CLEANING
Upon completion of the works described in Sections 1 to 4 of this CHAPTER, execute or confirm the following
items.
•

Restore the cross connections arranged for test purposes to their original conditions.

•

Clean around the Module Group and the MDF.

•

Collect and organize all test equipment, tools, etc. used during the installation tests.

•

Dispose of dust, trash, etc.

NDA-24306

CHAPTER 7
Page 391
Revision 1.0

WORK AFTER INSTALLATION TESTS

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 7
Page 392
Revision 1.0

NDA-24306



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 420
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Author                          : EZ Manuals
Mod Date                        : 2002:01:30 08:28:11-06:00
Creation Date                   : 2000:10:30 08:30:16Z
Modify Date                     : 2002:01:30 08:28:11-06:00
Create Date                     : 2000:10:30 08:30:16Z
Metadata Date                   : 2002:01:30 08:28:11-06:00
Creator                         : EZ Manuals
Title                           : NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)
Page Layout                     : SinglePage

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools